Home

Manual - Test Equipment Depot

Contents

1. Pi Ol ower On OR MSB Measurement Summary Bit EAV Error Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit MAV Message Available ESB Event Summary Bit RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Staus OSB Operation Summary Bit Always Zero Note RQS bit is in serial poll byte ESR ESE MSS bit is in STB2 response ESE Measurement Operation Measurement Measurement Event Operation Operation Event Condition Event Enable Condition Event Enable Register Register Register Register Register Register Reading Overfolw ROF Calibrating Low Limit 1 High Limit 1 Low Limit 2 Lo High Limit 2 Measuring Reading Available Trigger Layer Logical OR Logical Buffer Available Buffer Half Full Buffer Full Filter Settled Idle Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 15 Condition registers As Figure 11 4 shows some register sets have a condition register A condition register is a real time read only register that constantly updates to reflect the present operating conditions of the instrument For example while a measurement is being performed bit B4 Meas of the Operation Condition Register is set When the measurement is completed bit B4 clears Use the CONDition query commands in the STATus Subsystem to read the condition registe
2. Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO y AA Al Al ae Idle Filt Trig Meas Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO ry S Idle Filt Trig Meas Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Idle Idle state of the 2182 Filt Filter Settle Trig Trigger Layer Meas Measuring Cal Calibrating amp Logical AND OR Logical OR Operation Condition Register Operation Event Register Operation Event Enable Register Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 17 Figure 11 7 Measurement event status BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF Measurement B15 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Condition Register BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF Measurement Event B15 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Register re eer tie BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF Measurem
3. MX B ViV2 LSYNC TYPE OUIPUT Aout TCOUPL OS S GO00 2 DeLay HOLD Gi Peer trig TRIG STORE RECALL RECALL VALUE ON OFF oot E HALT E 232 Er TEST RANGE PIB RS step SCAN Gare res rae oicits RATE CEXiT_j ENTER D O G 12V MAX 350V PEAK ANY TERMINAL TO CHASSIS NOTE Most keys provide a dual function or operation The nomenclature on a key indicates its unshifted function operation which is selected by pressing the key Nomenclature in blue above a key indicates its shifted function A shifted function is selected by pressing the SHIFT key and then the function operation key 1 Special keys and power switch SHIFT Use to select a shifted function or operation LOCAL Cancels GPIB remote mode POWER Power switch In position turns 2182 on 1 out position turns it off 0 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 8 Getting Started 2 Function and operation keys Top Row Un shifted DCV1 DCV2 V1 V2 ACAL FILT REL TEMPI1 TEMP2 Shifted MX B V1 V2 LSYNC TYPE OUTPUT AOUT TCOUPL Middle Row Un shifted EX TRIG TRIG STORE RECALL VALUE ON OFF danda Shifted DELAY HOLD Selects Channel 1 voltage measurement function Selects Channel 2 voltage measurement function Selects Ratio Channel 1 voltage reading Channel 2 voltage reading Selects au
4. CALL SEND 7 form elem read unit status CALL SEND 7 trac data status CALL ENTER reading lengths 16 status PRINT reading NOTE To repeat buffer storage send the following command and then repeat the steps following the Start everything comment in the previous example CALL SEND 7 feed cont next status Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Example Programs E 7 Taking readings using the READ command This programming example demonstrates a simple method for taking and displaying on the computer CRT a specified number of readings The number of readings is specified by the SAMPle COUNt command When READ is asserted the specified number of readings is taken After all the readings are taken they are sent to the computer Note that these readings are also stored in the buffer The following program takes 10 readings on the DCV1 function and displays them on the computer CRT For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeegb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls clear buffer and place 2182 in idle CALL SEND 7 rst status CALL SEND 7 trac cle status CALL SEND 7 sample coun 10 status CALL SEND 7 form elem read unit status CALL SEND 7 read s
5. External trigger After the stepping or scanning operation is configured pressing the EX TRIG key places the instrument in the external trigger mode When STEP or SCAN key is pressed the step scan is enabled However it doesn t start until an external trigger is received or the TRIG key is pressed After the trigger occurs operation drops down to the Delay block Delay If a delay auto or manual is being used operation will hold up at this block until the delay period expires Device action Measurements are performed at this block For internal stepping the first measurement is performed on Channel 2 of the Model 2182 Subsequent measurements are performed on Channel 1 For internal scanning and external scanning each measurement corresponds to a channel in the step scan list All readings are automatically stored in the buffer Output trigger After each measurement is performed an output trigger is applied to the rear panel Trigger Link connector Trigger counter Reading Count specifies the total number of measurements to perform If another measurement is to be performed operation loops back to the control source Stepping Scanning controls SHIFT CONFIG Selects and configures internal or external scanning See Step Scan configuration for details EX TRIG Selects the External Trigger control source TRIG Satisfies event detection for the External Trigger control source STEP a
6. 1 7 4 2nd Delta Reading D e 1 4th Delta Reading e 1f Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance l 7 The following equation can be used to calculate any Delta reading X 2Y Z e 1 Delta 7 Where X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for a Delta reading n Delta Cycle Number 1 Example Calculate the 21st Delta reading X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for the 21st Delta reading n Delta Cycle Number 1 21 1 20 Therefore Delta ab eg _X 2Y Z 4 The 1 term in the Delta calculation is used for polarity reversal of every other calculated Delta reading This makes all calculated Delta readings in the test the same polarity Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com l 8 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Delta calculation example Assume you wish to measure the voltage across a 1Q DUT using a constant 10mA cur rent source and a voltmeter Ideally the measured voltage would be 10mV V I xR However due to a 10y V thermal EMF in the test leads the voltmeter actually reads 10 01mV 0 1 error due to EMF The error contributed by EMF can be eliminate by using Delta Assume the square wave output of the Model 622x is set to 10mA high and 10mA low
7. Buffer B ffer locations norosirerene aa e ia e a a E ONE E 6 3 Triggering Front panel trigger model without Stepping Scanning sssesseeesssessesseesssesee 7 3 Device action siene e r E EE A A E E S 7 5 Rear panel pinout sees cess ccesss es lease caaseddizeacavesasensieersdbeed Covseevecescauveseuanedestasareevecnan 7 7 Trigger link input pulse specifications EXT TRIG o ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 8 Trigger link output pulse specifications VMC ou cece eeeeseeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 7 8 DUT test SY SUCM iesti r a E r EENE EAEE EEE TETN 7 9 Trigger link connections sesssiicisesisiriiiiseriieiiniresiri iioii iissa 7 9 Operation model for triggering example ssesssessseseessssrssressrssessresrrsrerssesresees 7 10 DIN to BNC trigger cable sieneen nsi einasi ii o aa E EE EE 7 12 Trigger model remote operation eseseseeseseesesreressesessesrrsresesrrsesresrerenresrnseses 7 13 Limits D fanlt INIS eenean ae ei E AEAEE EAER RES EEE TER SEA 8 3 Setup to test 1O TESIStOLS 0 ceeeesccceseessceceeeesseecsseeeeeecsaeeeeessaeeseeeesaeeeseeeneeeeaes 8 7 Limits to sort 10Q resistors 1 5 and gt 5 eecceessessseesecceseeeeeeeeseeeeneeeneeees 8 8 Stepping and Scanning Front panel triggering internal scanning eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneees 9 5 Front panel triggering other step scan operations eeeseesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeees 9 5 External scanning example with Model 7001 0 ee
8. Filter control and configuration The FILT key toggles the state of the Filter When the Filter is enabled the FILT annunciator is on When disabled the FILT annunciator is off The analog and digital filters can be configured while the Filter is enabled or disabled Perform the following steps to configure the Filter 1 i 10 11 12 Select the desired function DCV1 DCV2 TEMP1 or TEMP2 Press SHIFT and then TYPE The present state of the analog filter on or off is dis played If you wish to change the state of the analog filter place the cursor on ON or OFF and press the RANGE A or key Note that the cursor is controlled by the lt q and p gt keys Press ENTER The present state of the digital filter on or off is displayed If you wish to change the state of the digital filter place the cursor on ON or OFF and press the RANGE A or key Press ENTER The present digital filter window 0 01 0 1 1 10 or NONE will be displayed Use the RANGE A or keys to display the desired window Press ENTER The present digital filter count 1 to 100 will be displayed If you wish to change the digital filter count use the cursor keys and the RANGE or Y keys to display the desired count Press ENTER The present digital filter type moving average or repeat will be displayed If you wish to change the digital filter type place the cursor on the type name and press the RANGE o
9. Reset the SENSel subsystem settings along with the trigger model each READ will cause one trigger CALL SEND rst status Set DCV1 for 100V range and DCV2 for 10Vrange CALL SEND 7 sens volt chanl rang 100 status3 CALL SEND 7 Ssens volt chan2 rang 10 status Switch to DCV2 Channel 2 volts and take reading CALL SEND 7 sens func volt status CALL SEND 7 Sens chan 2 read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER readings length 7 statuss PRINT reading Switch to DCV1 Channel 1 volts and take reading CALL SEND 7 sens func volt status CALL SEND 7 Sens chan 1 read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status PRINT reading Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com E 4 Example Programs One shot triggering Other voltmeters generally have two types of triggering one shot and continuous In one shot each activation of the selected trigger source causes one reading In continuous the voltmeter is idle until the trigger source is activated at which time it begins taking readings at a specified rate Typical trigger sources are JEEE 488 talk JEEE 488 Group Execute Trigger GET X command External trigger rear panel BNC Arming the instrument to respond to triggers is implicit in the non SCPI voltmeters Sending a command to a non SCPI voltmeter to change any o
10. 7 4 Triggering Control source and event detection The control source holds up operation until the programmed event occurs and is detected The control sources are described as follows Immediate With this control source event detection is immediately satisfied allowing operation to continue External Event detection is satisfied for any of the following three conditions e An input trigger via the Trigger Link line EXT TRIG is received e The front panel TRIG key is pressed The Model 2182 must be taken out of remote before it will respond to the TRIG key Use the LOCAL key or send LOCAL 707 over the bus e Trigger command TRG or GET received over the bus Delay A programmable delay is available after event detection It can be set manually or an auto delay can be used With auto delay the Model 2182 selects a delay based on the selected voltage range The auto delays are listed in Table 7 1 There is no auto delay for temperature measurements Auto Delay is typically used for external scanning The nominal delay will be just long enough to allow each relay to settle before making the measurement Table 7 1 Auto delay times Delay Time Range DCV1 DCV2 10mV lms 100mV lms lms 1V lms lms 10V lms lms 100V 5ms The delay function is accessed by pressing SHIFT and then DELAY The present delay setting AUTO or MANual is displayed Press the amp or W key to display the desired se
11. Description Status and Error Messages Event 610 611 612 800 802 803 805 806 807 808 900 953 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 Questionable Calibration Questionable Temperature Measurement Questionable ACAL RS 232 Framing Error detected RS 232 Overrun detected RS 232 Break detected Invalid system communication RS 232 Settings Lost RS 232 OFLO Characters Lost ASCII only with RS 232 Internal System Error DDC Uncalibrated Error DDC Status Model DDC Mode IDDC Error DDC Mode IDDCO Error Keithley 182 Serial Poll Byte Events DDC Ready DDC Reading Done DDC Buffer Half Full DDC Buffer Full DDC Reading overflow EE EE SE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE SE SE SE SE SE EE error event SE status event SYS system error event Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com B 5 B 6 Status and Error Messages Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Considerations Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com C 2 Measurement Considerations Measurement considerations Low level voltage measurements made using the Model 2182 can be adversely affected by various types of noise or other unwanted signals that can make it very difficult to
12. Model 2182 2182A Nanovoltmeter Test Equipment Pepot 1 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street elrose MA 02176 Phone 781 665 1400 oll Free 1 800 517 8431 User s Manual 2182A 900 01 Rev A June 2004 KEITHLEY A GREATER MEAS URE O F CONFIDENCE WARRANTY Keithley Instruments Inc warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 3 years from date of shipment Keithley Instruments Inc warrants the following items for 90 days from the date of shipment probes cables rechargeable batteries diskettes and documentation During the warranty period we will at our option either repair or replace any product that proves to be defective To exercise this warranty write or call your local Keithley representative or contact Keithley headquarters in Cleveland Ohio You will be given prompt assistance and return instructions Send the product transportation prepaid to the indicated service facility Repairs will be made and the product returned transportation prepaid Repaired or replaced products are warranted for the balance of the original warranty period or at least 90 days LIMITATION OF WARRANTY This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from product modification without Keithley s express written consent or misuse of any product or part This warranty also does not apply to fuses software non rechargeable batteries damage from battery leakage or
13. READ Performs an ABORt INITiate and a FETCh MEASure lt function gt Performs an ABORt CONFigure lt function gt and a READ NOTE Appendix H provides additional information on the measurement query commands This appendix describes what each command does its limitations and appropriate situations for its use COMFigure lt function gt Parameters lt function gt VOLTage DC Voltage TEMPerature Temperature Query CONFigure Query the selected function Description This command configures the instrument for subsequent measurements on the specified function Note that the input channel does not change For example if TEMP2 Channel 2 is presently selected sending CONFigure VOLT selects DCV2 Channel 2 This command places the instrument in a one shot measurement mode You can then use the READ command to trigger a measurement and acquire a reading see READ When this command is sent the Model 2182 will be configured as follows The function specified by this command is selected Input channel remains the same e All controls related to the selected function are defaulted to the RST values e Continuous initiation is disabled INITiate CONTinuous OFF The control source of the Trigger Model is set to Immediate The count values of the Trigger Model are set to one The delay of the Trigger Model is set to zero e The Model 2182 is placed in the idle state e A
14. The primary address is checked or changed from the GPIB menu which is accessed by pressing SHIFT and then GPIB Press the amp or W key to display the present address i e ADDR 07 To change the GPIB address 1 Press SHIFT and then GPIB to access the GPIB configuration menu 2 Use the amp or key to display the present address i e ADDR 07 3 Use the lt q gt A and W keys to display a valid address value and press ENTER 4 Return to the main display by pressing EXIT QuickBASIC programming Programming examples used throughout this manual presume Microsoft QuickBASIC version 4 5 or higher and a Keithley KPC 488 2 or Capital Equipment Corporation IEEE interface with CEC driver 2 11 or higher The Model 2182 must be set to address 07 for the TEEE 488 bus About program fragments Program fragments are used to demonstrate proper programming syntax Only a fragment of the whole program is used to avoid redundancy At the beginning of each program you will have to edit the following line to include the QuickBASIC libraries on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 9 Then initialize the interface card as address 21 CALL INITIALIZE 21 0 Initialize also sends out an interface clear IFC to the entire GPIB system to initialize the other devices see General bus comm
15. lt list gt numlist where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to disable for the Error Queue Description On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want disabled Disabled messages are prevented from going into the Error Queue Messages are specified by numbers see Appendix B See QUEue ENABle for examples to express a numlist Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 16 Additional SCP Commands CLEar STATus QUEue CLEar Clears all messages from Error Queue Description This command is used to clear the Error Queue of all messages SYSTem subsystem The SYSTem subsystem commands are summarized in Table 14 9 PRESet command PRESet SYSTem PRESet Return to SYSTem PRESet defaults Description This command returns the instrument to states optimized for front panel operation SYSTem PRESet defaults are listed in the SCPI tables Table 14 1 through Table 14 12 Performance commands FAZero STATe lt b gt SYSTem FAZero STATe lt b gt Control Front Autozero Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable Front Autozero 1 or ON Enable Front Autozero Description With Front Autozero enabled which is the default setting the instrument performs two A D measurement cyc
16. reading use the DATA FRESh command see the SENSe Subsystem command This command is automatically asserted when the READ or MEASure command is sent READ Description This command is typically used with the instrument in the one shot measurement mode to trigger and acquire a specified number of readings The SAMPle COUNt command is used to specify the number of readings see Trigger Subsystem Note that the readings are stored in the buffer When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order they are presented ABORt INITiate FETCh When ABORt is executed the instrument goes into the idle state if continuous initiation is disabled If continuous initiation is enabled the operation re starts at the beginning of the Trigger Model Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 13 4 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands If the instrument is in the idle state INITiate takes the instrument out of the idle state If continuous initiation is enabled INITiate CONTinuous ON then the INITiate command generates an error and ignores the command NOTE You cannot use the READ command if sample count gt 1 see Trigger subsystem and there are readings stored in the buffer error 225 out of memory Either set sample count to one or clear the buffer See Appendix C for an example program using the READ command MEAS
17. 5 For SPLC with 2 reading Digital Filter Use 4ppm of reading 2ppm of range for 1PLC with 10 reading Digital Filter 6 Channel 2 must be referenced to Channel 1 Channel 2 HI must not exceed 125 referenced to Channel 1 LO of Channel 2 range selected 7 Noise behavior using 2188 Low Thermal Short after 2 5 hour warm up 1 C Analog Filter off Observation time 10X response time or 2 minutes whichever is less 8 For Lsync On line frequency 0 1 If Lsync Off use 60dB 9 For 1kQ unbalance in LO lead AC CMRR is 70dB 10 For Low Q mode On add the following to DC noise and range accuracy at stated response time 200nV p p 25s 500nV p p 4 0s 1 2uV p p 1s and 5uV p p 85ms After 2 5 hour warm up 1 C 5PLC 2 minute observation time Channel 1 10mV range only 2 For Channel 1 or Channel 2 add 0 3 C for external reference junction Add 2 C for internal reference junction 3 Speeds are for 60Hz 50Hz operation using factory defaults operating conditions RST Autorange Off Display Off Trigger Delay 0 Analog Output off 4 Speeds include measurements and binary data transfer out the GPIB Analog Filter On 4 readings s max Auto Zero Off NPLC 0 01 LOmV range 80 readings s max a nw Sample count 1024 Auto Zero Off 8 For Lsync On reduce reading rate by 15 9 For Channel 2 Low Q mode Off reduce reading rate by 30 20 Front Auto Zero Off Auto Zero Off
18. Front and rear panel familiarization 1 7 Front panel GPIB operation 11 12 Front panel summary 1 7 Front panel trigger models 9 4 General bus commands 11 9 General information 1 3 Generating SRQ on buffer full E 5 Getting Started 1 1 GPIB bus connections 11 6 GPIB bus standards 11 6 GPIB operation and reference 11 6 Ground loops C 6 Handshake lines F 5 Heated Zener Reference 2 27 High power switches 2 25 Hold example 7 6 ice bath 2 16 2 17 Idle 7 3 IEEE command groups F 12 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information G 1 IEEE 488 Bus Overview F 1 Inspection 1 3 Interface function codes F 13 Interface selection and configuration procedures 11 4 Interfaces 11 3 Internal scanning 9 4 9 8 Internal stepping 9 9 Internal Stepping Scanning Channels and 2 9 3 IV curves 9 14 Josephson Junction Arra 2 27 Languages 11 3 Limit operations 8 3 Limits 8 1 Line power connection 1 14 Log sweep 5 24 Low power switches 2 24 Low level considerations 2 22 Low resistance measurement 2 23 LSYNC line cycle synchronization 2 8 magnetic field 5 20 5 22 C 6 Manual ranging 3 3 Maximum readings 3 3 Measurement Considerations C 1 Measurement considerations C 2 Measurement overview 2 3 Measurement Queries H 1 Measuring voltage and temperature 2 19 Meter loading C 9 Model 182 Emulation Commands D 1 Model 2107 input cable 2 12 mX b 4 6 mX b and percent 4 6 Nanovoltmeter features 1 6 Noise 2
19. While in Ratio the RA message is displayed and both the CH1 and CH2 annunciators are on NOTE Ifan overflow condition OVRFLW occurs the range that overflowed will format the display Step6 Take Ratio readings from display Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 4 Ratio and Delta Filter Rel and Ranging considerations Filter considerations As explained in Section 3 a unique Filter configuration can be established for each voltage channel However the Filter configuration for Channel 1 is applied to both channels when Ratio is enabled The Filter state and configuration for Channel 2 are ignored Channel 1 Filter has priority because it has the most sensitive measurement range 10mV and may therefore be configured to provide more filtering than Channel 2 When the FILT annunciator is on while in Ratio the Channel 1 DCV1 Filter settings are applied to both input channels When the FILT annunciator is off filtering is not used When using Filter Ratio is calculated as follows Ratio Filt V1 Filt V2 where Filt V1 is the filtered reading for Channel 1 voltage input Filt V2 is the filtered reading for Channel 2 voltage input Keep in mind that the Filter settings are applied to the input channels not on the result of Ratio The FILT key is operational while in Ratio Pressing FILT will either disable Filter for both channels
20. can also use the DEFault MINimum and MAXimum parameters for the query form These query forms are used to determine the RST default value and the upper and lower limits for the fundamental command TRIGger TIMer DEFault Queries the RST default value TRIGger TIMer MINimum Queries the lowest allowable value TRIGger TIMer MAXimum Queries the largest allowable value Case sensitivity Common commands and SCPI commands are not case sensitive You can use upper or lower case and any case combination Examples RST rst DATA data SYSTem PRESet system preset Long form and short form versions A SCPI command word can be sent in its long form or short form version The command subsystem tables in Section 14 are in the long form version However the short form version is indicated by upper case characters SYSTem PRESet long form SYST PRES short form SYSTem PRES long form and short form combination Note that each command word must be in either long form or short form For example SYSTe PRESe is illegal and will generate an error The command will not be executed Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 24 Remote Operation Short form rules Use the following rules to determine the short form version of any SCPI command If the length of the command word is four letters or less no short form version exists sauto auto These rules a
21. 17 8431 99 Washington St q pot c 4 2 Relative mX b and Percent e Relative Explains how to null an offset or establish a baseline value Includes the SCPI commands for remote operation mX b and Percent Covers these two basic math operations and includes the SCPI commands for remote operation Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Relative Relative mX b and Percent 4 3 Relative rel nulls an offset or subtracts a baseline reading from present and future readings When a rel value is established subsequent readings will be the difference between the actual input and the rel value Displayed Rel ed Reading Actual Input Rel Value Once a rel value is established for a measurement function the value is the same for all ranges For example if 5V is set as the rel value on the 10V range for DCV1 the rel value is also 5V on the 100V 1V 100mV and 10mV ranges When a rel value is larger than the selected range the display is formatted to accommodate the rel ed reading However this does not increase the maximum allowable input for that range An over range input signal will still cause the display to overflow For example on the 10V range the Model 2182 still overflows for a 12V input NOTE _ Rel ed readings are used for Ratio and Delta calculations See Section 5 for more information on using Relative with Ratio and Del
22. Idle Idle state of the 2182 0 Disable Mask Operation Event Filt Filter Settled Trig Trigger Layer Meas Measuring Cal Calibrating CONDition command CONDition STATus MEASurement CONDition Read Measurement Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition Read Questionable Condition Register STATus OPERation CONDition Read Operation Condition Register Description These query commands are used to read the contents of the condition registers Each set of event registers except the Standard Event register set has a condition register A condition register is similar to its corresponding event register except that it is a real time register that constantly updates to reflect the present operating status of the instrument See EVENt for register bit descriptions After sending one of these commands and addressing the Model 2182 to talk a decimal value is sent to the computer The binary equivalent of this decimal value indicates which bits in the register are set For example if sending stat meas cond returns a decimal value of 512 binary 0000001000000000 bit B9 of the Measurement Condition Register is set indicating that the trace buffer is full Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 14 Additional SCP Commands PRESet command PRESet STATus PRESet Return registers to default conditions Description When this command is sent
23. SEND 7 krst status Configure limit tests CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL SEND 7 calc3 SEND 7 calc3 SEND 7 calc3 SEND 7 calc3 SEND 7 calc3 SEND 7 calc3 lim upp 0 1 status lim low 0 1 status lim2 upp 1 status lim2 low 1 status lim stat on status lim2 stat on status Trigger one reading and display it CALL SEND 7 read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading PRINT reading Check result of Limit 1 test CALL SEND 7 calc3 lim fail status length 7 status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading PRINT reading length 7 status Check result of Limit 2 test CALL SEND 7 soale3 lim2 faal reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading PRINT reading length 7 status status Put 2182 in Set HI1 Set LO1 Set HI2 Set LO2 a one shot mode limit to 0 1 limit to 0 1 limit to 1 limit to 1 Enable Limit 1 test Enable Limit 2 test Trigger and request a reading Address Display Request Limit 1 Address Display Limit 1 Request Limit 2 Address Display Limit 2 2182 to talk reading on CRT result of test 2182 to talk result of test result of test 2182 to talk result of test Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington St
24. TestEquipmentDepot com 15 12 Additional SCP Commands Figure 15 7 Measurement event enable register Bit Position B15 B10 Bp B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF Event 512 256 128 32 16 8 4 2 1 Decimal Weightin 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 Value 0 1 O 1 O 1 O 1 O 1 O 1 O 1 O 1 0 1 Value 1 Measurement Event Set Events BFL Buffer Full 0 Measurement Event Cleared BHF Buffer Half Full BAV Buffer Available RAV Reading Available HL2 High Limit 2 LL2 Low Limit 2 HL1 High Limit 1 LL1 Low Limit 1 ROF Reading Overflow Figure 15 8 Questionable event enable register Bit Position B15 B10 Event Decimal Weighting Value gt 1 Operation Event Set Events ACAL ACAL Summary 0 Operation Event Cleared Cal Calibration Summary Temp Temperature Summary Value Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCPI Commands 15 13 Figure 15 9 Operation event enable register Bit Position B15 B11 B9 B8 B7 B6 B3 B1 i BO Event Idle Filt Trig Meas Cal Decimal Weighting 1024 256 32 16 1 210 28 25 24 20 Value 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 z 0 1 Value 1 Enable Operation Event Events
25. The BNC cables are labeled VMC trigger line 1 and EXT TRIG trigger line 2 Figure 7 9 shows how a Keithley Model 220 Current Source can be connected to the Trigger Link of the Model 2182 using the adapter cable When used with the STEP mode of the Model 220 you can perform synchronized source measure operations without the use of a computer Whenever the Model 220 receives a trigger from the Model 2182 it will step to the next current source value Figure 7 9 DIN to BNC trigger cable 2182 Nanovoltmeter External a a Tri gger 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable 220 Current Source Tigger Link NOTE Ifthe Model 2182 trigger line configuration has been changed from the factory setting the Model 8502 Trigger Link Adapter must be used to interface with instruments having BNC trigger connections It has two micro DIN connectors and six BNC connectors one for each trigger line Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI programming triggering Trigger model remote operation Triggering 7 13 The following paragraphs describe how the Model 2182 operates for remote operation The flowchart in Figure 7 10 summarizes operation over the bus The flowchart is called the trigger model because operation is controlled by SCPI commands from the Trigger subsystem Key SCPI commands are included in the trigger model Figure 7 10
26. The Model 2182 must be assigned to a unique address At the factory the address is set to 07 but can be set to any value from 0 to 30 However the address must not conflict with the address assigned to other instruments in the system You can use either the SCPI or 182 language to program the instrument RS 232 interface When using the RS 232 interface you must select baud rate terminator and flow control For the RS 232 interface you can only use the SCPI language to program the instrument NOTE When changing the interface GPIB to RS 232 or vice versa all data in the buffer clears Languages For the GPIB interface there are two programming languages to choose from e SCPI Language e 182 Language NOTE For the RS 232 interface only the SCPI language can be used to program the instrument When the RS 232 interface is selected it automatically defaults to SCPI SCPI language Standard Commands for Programmable Instrument SCPI is fully supported by the GPIB and RS 232 interfaces Always calibrate the Model 2182 using the SCPI language 182 Language The Model 2182 implements most commands DDCs available in the Keithley Model 182 Sensitive Digital Voltmeter The commands along with programming limitations are provided in Appendix D See the Model 182 Instruction Manual NOTE The 182 Language is intended to be used only over the IEEE 488 bus Using front panel controls in conjunction with this language may cause e
27. The set tings can be saved in the user default setup see Default settings in Section 1 LSYNC line cycle synchronization Synchronizing A D conversions with the frequency of the power line increases common mode and normal mode noise rejection When line cycle synchronization is enabled the measurement is initiated at the first positive or negative going zero crossing of the power line cycle after the trigger Figure 2 1 shows the measurement process that consists of two A D conversions If the trigger occurs during the positive cycle of the power line as shown in Figure 2 1 the first A D conversion starts with the negative going zero crossing of the power line cycle If the next trigger Trigger 2 occurs during the negative cycle then the measurement process starts with the positive going zero crossing Figure 2 1 Line cycle synchronization 1 PLC Reading Reading Trigger Done Trigger Done 1 j 2 j A D A D A D A D Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion Phase A Phase B Phase A Phase B Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 9 Perform the following steps to enable or disable line cycle synchronization 1 Press SHIFT and then LSYNC to display the present state of line synchronization OFF or ON 2 Use or key to display ON or OFF 3 Press ENTER The instrument returns to the nor
28. VOLT DC RAT ON SENS VOLT DC DELT OFF SENS HOLD STAT OFF SENS VOLT DC DELT ON SENS VOLT DC RAT OFF SENS HOLD STAT OFF SENS VOLT DC CHAN1 DFILT TCON REP MOV Valid function command words i e WOLT DC VOLT AC etc Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com G 4 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Queries Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com H 2 Measurement Queries FETCh What it does This command will simply return the latest available reading from an instrument Limitations If the instrument does not have a reading available indicated by dashes in the display sending this command will cause a 230 Data corrupt or stale error This query will not cause the box to trigger a reading nor will it wait for a result if a reading is in progress It is possible to get the same reading over and over using this query It will continue to give the same result until one of two things has happened e Anew reading has been triggered The old reading has been invalidated by changing ranges or by changing function Where appropriate Since this query does not trigger a reading and can give duplicate results there are not many
29. X is the normal display reading m and b are user entered constants for scale factor and offset Y is the displayed result To configure and control the mX b calculation perform the following steps 1 NOTE Press SHIFT and then MX B to display the present scale factor M 1 0000000 factory default Key in a scale factor value The lt q and gt keys control cursor position and the amp and W range keys increment and decrement the digit value To change range place the cursor on the multiplier and use the amp and keys m x0 001 x1 K x1000 and M x1 000 000 With the cursor on the polarity sign the amp and W keys toggle polarity Press ENTER to enter the M value and display the B value B 00 000000 m factory default Key in the offset value Press ENTER to enter the B value and display the two character UNITS designator UNITS MX factory default Use the cursor keys and the amp or W key if you wish to change the units designator Each character can be any letter in the alphabet A through Z the degrees symbol or the ohms symbol Q Press ENTER The MATH annunciator will turn on and the result of the calculation will be displayed Note that the calculation will be applied to all measurement functions To disable mX b again press SHIFT and then MX B The MATH annunciator will turn off mX b does not affect analog output Analog output has its own gain and offset settings see Section 1
30. es NEVER connect switching cards directly to AC mains When connecting sources to switching cards install protective de vices to limit fault current and voltage to the card Before operating an instrument make sure the line cord is connected to a properly grounded power receptacle Inspect the con necting cables test leads and jumpers for possible wear cracks or breaks before each use When installing equipment where access to the main power cord is restricted such as rack mounting a separate main input pow er disconnect device must be provided in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instruments while power is applied to the circuit under test ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system and discharge any capacitors before connecting or disconnecting ca 5 03 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com bles or jumpers installing or removing switching cards or making internal changes such as installing or removing jumpers Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth ground Al ways make measurements with dry hands while standing on a dry insulated surface capable of withstanding the voltage being measured The instrument and accessories must be used in accordance with its specificat
31. range a 10 window means that the filter window is 1 V For temperature the filter window is expressed as a percent of the maximum temperature reading The maximum temperature depends on which thermocouple is being used For example for a Type J thermocouple the maximum reading is 760 C a 10 window means that the filter window is 76 C Filter type There are two digital filter types moving and repeating The moving average filter uses a first in first out stack When the stack becomes full the measurement conversions are averaged yielding a reading For each subsequent conversion placed in the stack the oldest conversion is discarded and the stack is re averaged yielding a new reading This process is depicted in Figure 3 2A For the repeating filter the stack is filled and the conversions are averaged to yield a reading The stack is then cleared and process starts over see Figure 3 2B Choose this filter for scanning so readings from other channels are not averaged with the present channel NOTES The repeating filter cannot be used with Delta measurements If the repeating filter is selected when Delta is enabled the instrument will default to the moving filter Delta measurements are covered in Section 5 The moving filter cannot be used when stepping or scanning If the moving filter is selected when a step or scan is enabled the instrument will default to the repeating filter Stepping and scanning are covered in Section
32. request RQS bit set Bit 7 Operation Summary OSB A set bit indicates that an enabled operation event has occurred The event can be identified by reading the Operation Event Status Register using the STATus OPERation query command see Section 15 for details Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Common Commands 12 15 Figure 12 4 Status byte register Bit Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Event MSB P ee 1 Decimal Weighting 20 Value 0 1 Value 1 Event Bit Set Events OSB Operation Summary Bit 0 Event Bit Cleared MSS Master Summary Status RQS Request Service ESB Event Summary Bit MAV Message Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit TRG Trigger Send bus trigger to 2182 Description Use the TRG command to issue a GPIB trigger to the Model 2182 It has the same effect as a group execute trigger GET Use the TRG command as an event to control operation The Model 2182 reacts to this trigger if BUS is the programmed control source The control source is programmed from the TRIGger subsystem see Section 14 TST2 Self Test Query Run self test and read result Description Use this query command to perform a checksum test on ROM The command places the coded result 0 or 1 in the Output Queue When the Model 2182 is address
33. shows the pinout for the connector If your computer uses a DB 25 connector for the RS 232 interface you will need a cable or adapter with a DB 25 connector on one end and a DB 9 connector on the other wired straight through not null modem Table 11 3 provides pinout identification for the 9 pin DB 9 or 25 pin DB 25 serial port connector on the computer PC Figure 11 10 RS 232 interface connector 54321 Gay 9876 RS232 Rear Panel Connector Table 11 2 RS 232 connector pinout Pin Number Description No connection TXD transmit data RXD receive data No connection GND signal ground No connection RTS ready to send CTS clear to send No connections CIADKWAwWHH Ke RTS and CTS are not used Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 30 Remote Operation Table 11 3 PC serial port pinout DB 9 DB 25 Signal Pin Number Pin Number DCD data carrier detect 1 8 RXD receive data 2 3 TXD transmit data 3 2 DTR data terminal ready 4 20 GND signal ground 5 7 DSR data set ready 6 6 RTS request to send 7 4 CTS clear to send 8 5 RI ring indicator 9 22 Error messages See Appendix B for RS 232 error messages Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 Common Commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington St
34. the OPC bit sets when the TRG command is finished Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Common Commands 12 9 Program example The first group of commands send the OPC command after the INITiate command and verifies that the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register does not set while the instrument continues to make measurements not in idle The second group of commands returns the Model 2182 to the idle state and verifies that the OPC bit did set SYST PRES INIT CONT OFF Return 2182 to default setup Disables continuous initiation ABORt Aborts operation Places 2182 in idle INIT IMM Initiate one trigger cycle OPC Sends the OPC command ESR Reads the Standard Event Status Register After addressing the Model 2182 to talk the returned value of 0 denotes that the bit bit 0 is not set indicating that the INITiate operation is not complete ABORt Aborts operation Places 2182 in idle ESR Reads the Standard Event Status Register After addressing the Model 2182 to talk the returned value of 1 denotes that the bit bit 1 is set indicating that the INITiate operation is now complete SYST PRES Returns 2182 to default setup NOTE The following commands take a long time to process and may benefit from using OPC or OPC RST and SYST PRES RCL and SAV CALC2 IMM and CALC2 IMM Only when performing
35. 2 Buffer Buffer operations Explains how to store and recall readings including buffer statistics minimum maximum peak to peak average and standard deviation SCPI programming Covers the SCPI commands used to control buffer operations Buffer operations The Model 2182 has a buffer to store from two to 1024 readings and units It also stores the channel number for step scan readings and overflow readings In addition recalled data includes statistical information minimum maximum peak to peak average and standard deviation NOTE _ Statistics are not calculated when an overflow reading has been stored in the buffer The buffer fills with the specified number of readings and stops Readings are placed in the buffer after any math operations are performed Math operations include Relative Ratio or Delta and mX b or Percent Buffered data is overwritten each time the storage operation is selected The data is volatile it is not saved through a power cycle NOTE Measurements performed during stepping or scanning are automatically stored in the buffer There is no need to configure and enable the buffer Stepping and scanning is covered in Section 9 NOTE When changing the interface GPIB to RS 232 or vice versa all data in the buffer clears Store Perform the following steps to store readings 1 Set up the instrument for the desired configuration 2 Press the STORE key 3 Use the cursor keys q and
36. 21 Applies to measurements of room temperature resistances lt 10Q Isource range lt 20uA 22 Display off delay 1ms Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com RKN 6 08 04 RevA Page 3 of 3 Status and Error Messages Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com B 2 Status and Error Messages Table B 1 Status and error messages Number Description Event 440 Query unterminated after indefinite response EE 430 Query deadlocked EE 420 Query unterminated EE 410 Query interrupted EE 363 Input buffer overrun SYS 350 Queue overflow SYS 330 Self test failed EE 314 Save recall memory lost EE 315 Configuration memory lost EE 260 Expression error EE 241 Hardware missing EE 230 Data corrupt or stale EE 225 Out of memory EE 224 Illegal parameter value EE 223 Too much data EE 222 Parameter data out of range EE 221 Settings conflict EE 220 Parameter error EE 215 Arm deadlock EE 214 Trigger deadlock EE 213 Init ignored EE 212 Arm ignored EE 211 Trigger ignored EE 210 Trigger error EE 202 Settings lost due to rtl EE 201 Invalid while in local EE 200 Execution error EE 178 Expression data not allowed EE 171 Invalid expression EE 170 Expression error EE 168 Block data not allowed EE 161 Invalid block data EE 160 Block data error EE 158 String data not allowed EE 154 St
37. 2mA set by the user A Stop710mA 10mA Step OmA LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO lt gt q gt i4 gt i4 gt q gt One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle r Sweep Delay Sweep Delay i Sweep Delay Sweep Delay i Sweep Delay B Logarithmic sweep pulse train 1 to 10mA using 5 logarithmic Logrithmic cale Log Step is calculated and set by the 622x A 10mA Stop 10mA 5 6234mA Log Stepf 3 1623mA Log Step 1 7783mA LO9 step Log Step Start Low Oma LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO lt gt gt lt pi lt pict gt One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle Sweep Delay i Sweep Delay i Sweep Delay i Sweep Delay Sweep Delay C Custom sweep pulse train 1mA 2mA 4mA 8mA and 16mA 5 points Linear Scale i 16mA 16mA t 8mA 4mA 1mA EmA Low OmA LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO lt gt 4 gt lt pi lt pit gt One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle i Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay i Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com I 14 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Differential Conduct
38. 8 Figure 15 9 Figure 15 10 C Figure C 1 Figure C 2 Figure C 3 Figure C 4 Figure C 5 F Figure F 1 Figure F 2 Figure F 3 Figure I 1 Figure I 2 Figure I 3 Figure I 4 Figure I 5 Figure I 6 Figure I 7 Common Commands Standard event enable register ee eee eseeseeseeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeceeeeaeseeeeaeeneeeaes 12 5 Standard event status register 0 eee eee eeeeeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeceeseaeeeeeeaeseaeeaes 12 7 Service request enable register 0 eee eeceeecseeeseeeeeeseseeeeaeeseeeaeeseeeaeeneeeasees 12 13 Stat s byte TE SISTER ccieis scasiedsinssnsecsssssenevebas ba E ES 12 15 Additional SCPI Commands ASCI data fOmMat secsec ia aE R EREA ea EEE AR E NEEE ESA 15 4 IEE754 single precision data format 32 data bits eseeeeeeeeeeeseereererrerrerersee 15 5 IEEE754 double precision data format 64 data bits 0sseseeseeseeeseeeseseseseeee 15 5 Measurement event register sisnormrrsrcssirriririeik eiiie ieii 15 8 Questionable event register c s csccccseeissessseseseusesoenecssuarsonecsnssesseessasseaestenasees 15 9 Operation event register oo eee eee ries iit enu Kan Ee aE aoea NEI iSS 15 10 Measurement event enable register 0 0 ee eeseesneeeseceseeeeeeeseeceseeeneeseaeeeseeesaes 15 12 Questionable event enable register eee eeeeeeseeeneceseeeeeeceseeceseceeeceaeeeseeesaes 15 12 Operation event enable register 0 lee eee eseeeeeeseceeeeaeeseeeaeseeeeseeneeeeeeaeesees 15 13 IKE Y PIeSS CODES s
39. 9 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 3 10 Range Digits Rate and Filter Figure 3 2 Moving and repeating filters Conversion 10 Conversion 11 Conversion 9 10 8 9 7 8 6 Reading 7 Reading Reading 2 5 1 e 6 2 3 e 4 e 5 3 4 2 3 Conversion 1 Conversion 2 Conversion A Type Moving Average Readings 10 Conversion 10 Conversion 20 Conversion 9 19 8 18 7 17 R 6 gt Reading 16 _ Reading Reading e 5 1 15 2 3 e 4 e 14 3 13 2 12 Conversion 1 Conversion 11 Conversion B Type Repeating Readings 10 Digital filter example Filter Count 10 Filter Window 0 01 of range Filter Type Moving Ten readings fill the stack to yield a filtered reading Now assume the next reading which is the 11 is outside the window A reading will be processed displayed however the stack will be loaded with that same reading Each subsequent valid reading will then displace one of the loaded readings in the stack The FILT annunciator will flash until 10 new readings fill the stack NOTE _ Bit 8 of the Operation Event Status Register sets when the filter window has properly settled See Status structure in Section I1 for details Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Range Digits Rate and Filter 3 11
40. ACAL procedure for details Whenever the LEMO connector of the Model 2107 Input Cable or customized cable is disconnected from the input of the Model 2182 for a long period of time the input connectors will have to be cleaned to remove oxidation see Cleaning input connectors in Section 1 Do not use both channels to measure temperature The electrical connection between the two thermocouples will cause erratic temperature readings Clean copper to copper connections minimize thermal EMFs However when measuring very low voltages there may still be enough thermal EMFs to corrupt the measurement In this case use the Relative feature of the Model 2182 to null out that offset See Nulling thermal EMFs which follows the basic measurement procedure Connect test circuit to Model 2182 As explained in Connections connect the test circuit to the input of the Model 2182 Figure 2 4 through Figure 2 9 show connections for voltage and temperature measurements Step 2 Configure temperature if applicable If temperature measurements are going to be performed configure temperature as previously explained in Temperature configuration Step 3 Measure Channel 1 If Channel 1 is connected to measure voltage press DCV1 If connected to measure temperature press TEMP1 Observe the reading on the display The CH1 annunciator indicates that Channel 1 is selected Step 4 Measure Channel 2 if applicable NOTE
41. An X_OFF will cause the Model 2182 to stop outputting characters until it sees an X_ON Incoming commands are processed after the lt CR gt character is received from the controller NOTE For RS 232 operation OPC or OPC should be used with slow responding commands A list of the slowest responding commands and details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12 If NONE is the selected flow control then there will be no signal handshaking between the controller and the Model 2182 Data will be lost if transmitted before the receiving device is ready Terminator The Model 2182 can be configured to terminate each program message that it transmits to the controller with any of the following combinations of lt CR gt and lt LF gt e LF line feed e CR carriage return e LFCR line feed carriage return e CRLF carriage return line feed Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 29 RS 232 connections The RS 232 serial port can be connected to the serial port of a controller i e personal computer using a straight through RS 232 cable terminated with DB 9 connectors Do not use a null modem cable The serial port uses the transmit TXD receive RXD and signal ground GND lines of the RS 232 standard It does not use the hardware handshaking lines CTS and RTS Figure 11 10 shows the rear panel connector for the RS 232 interface and Table 11 2
42. CH1 Rdg_Neg 2 2 repeat Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 17 A loop program can be written to extract the data as follows This is for Channel 2 Data Let NumRdgsPerStep 4 1 Ch2 and 3 Chl readings stored in the buffer 2400 current level Let CalcRdgs 6 Total number of positive or negative current levels out of the 2400 Let k 1 For j 1 to CalcRdgs CH2 Rdg j Buffer Rdg k Buffer Rdg k NumRdgsPerStep CH2 Rdg j CH2 Rdg k 2 k k NumRdgsPerStep 2 Next j This for For Channel 1 Data Let NumRdgsPerStep 4 Let CalcRdgs 6 Let k 1 For j 1 to CalcRdgs Let CH1 Rdg _pos 0 Let CH1 Rdg _neg 0 For m 1 to NumRdgsPerStep 1 CH1 Rdg _pos CH1 Rdg _pos Buffer Rdg k m CH1 Rdg _neg CH1 Rdg _neg Buffer Rdg k m NumRdgsPerStep Next m CH1 Rdg j CH1 Rdg _pos CH1 Rdg _neg NumRdgsPerStep 1 2 Next j An example program using QBASIC was written that sets up an Array for all the data out of the 2182 buffer parses the comma separated data into the array and calculates the DC current reversal data for both Channel 1 and Channel 2 CONST Addr 7 Represents the address of the 2182 CONST NumRdgsPerStep 4 Represents the total number of CH1 amp CH2 readings at each positive or negative current step CONST CalcReadings 6 Represents nu
43. Channel 2 inputs must be referenced to Channel 1 LO If Channel 2 is connected to measure voltage press DCV2 If connected to measure temperature press TEMP2 Observe the reading on the display The CH2 annunciator indicates that Channel 2 is selected Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 20 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Nulling thermal EMFs The following procedure nulls out thermal EMFs using the Relative feature of the Model 2182 For more information on thermal EMFs see Low level considerations Thermal EMFs Details on Relative are provided in Section 4 1 Connect the test circuit but leave the source voltage or current disconnected or in stand by 2 Select the appropriate voltage function DCV1 or DCV2 3 If not using AUTO range select the lowest possible measurement range to display the voltage offset 4 On the Model 2182 press the REL key to zero the display 5 If applicable repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other channel 6 Connect the source Subsequent readings will not include the thermal EMFs that were nulled out SCPI programming voltage and temperature measurements Table 2 3 SCPI commands voltage and temperature measurements Commands Description Default SENSe FUNCtion lt name gt Select function VOLTage or TEMPerature VOLT CHANnel lt chan gt Select measurement channel 0 1 or 2
44. Holds reading when the specified number of samples is within the selected tolerance Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started 1 9 Bottom Row Un shifted STEP Steps through channels sends a trigger after each channel SCAN Scans through channels sends a trigger after last channel SAVE Saves present configuration for power on user default RESTR Restores factory or user default configuration DIGITS Changes number of digits of reading resolution RATE Changes reading rate number of power line cycles PLC EXIT Cancels selection moves back to measurement display ENTER Accepts selection moves to next choice or back to measurement display Shifted CONFIG Configures a scan type timer channel count and reading count HALT Turns off step scan operation GPIB Enables disables GPIB sets address and selects language RS232 Enables disables RS 232 interface selects baud rate flow control and terminator CAL Accesses calibration TEST Tests display annunciators and front panel keys 3 Range keys A Selects the next higher voltage measurement range vy Selects the next lower voltage measurement range AUTO Enables disables autorange Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 10 Getting Started 4 Display annunciators asterisk lt gt more speaker AUTO BUFFER CH1 CH
45. Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 25 Figure 5 11 SourceMeter output 30 point custom sweep 2 50uA P20 P22 P24 P26 P28 2 20uA P10 P12 P14 P16 P18 Hopa PO P2 P4 P6 P8 10uA Pl P3 P5 P7 P9 20uA PIi R13 P15 RIZ P19 50uA P21 P23 P25 P27 P29 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 26 Ratio and Delta Trigger link connections External triggering is used to synchronize source measure operations among the instruments The SourceMeter must trigger both Model 2182s to achieve simultaneous measurements In turn only one of the Model 2182s must trigger the SourceMeter to output the next source value The trigger link connections required for this application are shown in Figure 5 12 Notice that the output trigger VMC required from the Model 2182s is provided by unit 1 VMC from unit 2 must not be used Figure 5 12 Trigger link connections using two Model 2182s SourceMeter 2182 1 2182 2 Rear Panel Rear Panel Rear Panel Trig Link 8501 8503 Trigger Link DIN to BNC Cable x Trigger Cables gt VMC not used Adapter FRIG 8502 Trigger Link Adapter Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Buffer Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 6
46. OFF V STATe Query state of Limit 2 test vV FAIL Return result of Limit 2 test 0 pass or 1 fail Vv CLEar Clear test results V IMMediate Clear limit test results vV AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable clearing of limit test results ON vV when a new trigger model cycle starts AUTO Query state of auto clear vV IMMediate Recalculate limit tests V Table 14 2 CALibration command summary user accessible Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI CALibration See Note UNPRotected Calibration accessible to operator ACALibration ACAL procedure Sec 2 INITiate Prepares 2182 for ACAL STEP1 Performs a full ACAL 100V and 10mV STEP2 Performs a limited ACAL 10mV only DONE Exit ACAL mode TEMPerature Queries the internal temperature at the time of last ACAL If present internal temperature differs from the last ACAL temperature by more than 1 C perform another ACAL Note The above table only provides the commands to perform ACAL which is a procedure to be performed by the operator The formal calibration is to be performed by qualified service personnel and is provided in the Model 2182 Service Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI Reference Tables 14 5 Table 14 3 DISPlay command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI DISPlay Sec 15 ENABle lt b gt Turn fr
47. OPC command is sent the Operation Complete bit bit BO of the Standard Event Status Register will set immediately after the last pending command is completed If the corresponding bit bit BO in the Standard Event Enable Register and Bit 5 Event Summary Bit of the Service Request Enable Register is set the RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Status bit in the Status Byte Register will set When used with the immediate initiation command INITiate the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register will not set until the Model 2182 goes back into the idle state The INIT command operation is not considered finished until the Model 2182 goes back into the idle state See the description for WAI for more information on command execution When used with the TRG command the OPC bit will not set until the operations associated with the TRG command and the initiate command are finished The TRG command is considered to be finished when the Device Action completes or when operation stops a control source to wait for an event see Trigger model in Section 7 To use the OPC exclusively with the TRG command first force the completion of the initiate command so that only the TRG command is pending Do this by sending the ABORt command to place the instrument in idle which by definition completes the initiate command Since continuous initiation is on operation continues into the Trigger Model After sending the TRG command
48. Status Register sets Since both of these events are unmasked enabled the occurrence of any of them causes the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register to set Read the Standard Event Status Register using the ESE query command Figure 12 1 Standard event enable register Bit Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Event PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC oa 128 64 32 16 8 4 1 Decimal Weighting 7 06 l ay 3 a2 20 Value 0 1 O 1 O 1 O11 0 1 O11 0 1 Note Bits B8 through B15 are not shown since they are not used Value 1 Event Bit Set Ev 1 0 ent Bit Cleared Events PON Power On URQ User Request CME Command Error EXE Execution Error DDE Device Dependent Error QYE Query Error OPC Operation Complete Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 6 Common Commands ESR Event Status Register Query Read register and clear it Description Use this command to acquire the value in decimal of the Standard Event Register see Figure 12 2 The binary equivalent of the returned decimal value determines which bits in the register are set The register is cleared on power up or when CLS is sent A set bit in this register indicates that a particular event has occurred For example for an acquired decimal value of 48 the binary equivalent is 00110
49. Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 4 Voltage and Temperature Measurements NOTE The Model 2182 can also measure its internal temperature Whenever the internal temperature changes more than I degree an ACAL must be performed to maintain specified accuracy See Performance considerations ACAL procedure in this section for details In order to make accurate temperature measurements the thermocouple connections reference junction have to be maintained at a known temperature You have the option to use the internal reference junction or an external simulated reference junction These reference junctions are discussed as follows Internal Reference Junction The internal reference junction of the Model 2182 is the input connector A temperature sensor is located inside the unit adjacent to the input connector The sensor is measured continuously to maintain accuracy Thermocouple connections reference junction have to be made at the input connector of the Model 2182 To utilize the internal reference junction the thermocouple wires must be soldered directly to a LEMO connector that mates to the input connector A disadvantage of using the internal reference junction is the connection requirements You cannot use the supplied input cable as is You will have to modify the cable or use a separate LEMO connector Model 2182 KIT Simulated Reference Junction An external apparatus such as an ice bath ca
50. TRACe command summary 14 12 Trigger command summary 14 13 Trigger model 7 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Trigger model remote operation 7 13 AY Trigger model operation 7 15 trigger synchronization 5 14 Triggering 7 1 Triggering commands 7 16 Typical command sequences F 11 Voltage and temperature connections 2 16 Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 1 Voltage measurements 2 3 Voltage only connections 2 14 Voltmeter complete 7 8 Unaddress commands F 9 UNIT command summary 14 14 Warm up 2 5 Warranty information 1 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Service Form Model No Serial No Date Company List all control settings describe problem and check boxes that apply to problem Q Intermittent Q Analog output follows display Q Particular range or function bad specify L IEEE failure Q Obvious problem on power up L Batteries and fuses are OK Q Front panel operational U All ranges or functions are bad Q Checked all cables Display or output check one Q Drifts Q Unable to zero Q Unstable Q Overload Q Will not read applied input Q Calibration only Q Certificate of calibration required L Data required attach any additional sheets as necessary Show a block diagram of your measurement including all instruments connected whether power is turned o
51. TRIG key Press the LOCAL key or send LOCAL 7 over the bus to remove the instrument from the remote mode e TIMer Event detection is immediately satisfied on the initial pass through the loop Each subsequent detection is satisfied when the programmed timer interval 0 to 999999 999 sec elapses The timer source is only available during step scan operation The timer resets to its initial state when the instrument goes into the normal mode of operation or into the idle state e EXTernal Event detection is satisfied when an input trigger via the TRIGGER LINK connector is received by the Model 2182 e BUS Event detection is satisfied when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received by the Model 2182 Delay and device action These blocks of the trigger model operate the same for both front panel and GPIB operation See the front panel Trigger model located at the beginning of this section for operating information on these trigger model blocks Also see Reading hold autosettle for details on Hold Counters Programmable counters are used to repeat operations within the trigger model For example if performing a 10 channel scan the sample counter would be set to 10 Operation will continue until all 10 channels are scanned and measured If you wanted to repeat the scan three times you would set the trigger counter to three For a sample count value gt 1 the sample readings will automatically be stored in the buffe
52. The present flow control setting is displayed 4 To change flow control A Place the cursor on the present flow control selection B Press the amp or W key to toggle the selection C Press ENTER The present terminator is displayed 5 To change the terminator A Place the cursor on the present terminator selection B Press the amp or key to display the desired terminator C Press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal display NOTE Only the SCPI language can be used with the RS 232 interface The instrument defaults to the SCPI language when the RS 232 interface is selected enabled Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 6 Remote Operation GPIB operation and reference GPIB bus standards The GPIB bus is the IEEE 488 instrumentation data bus with hardware and programming standards originally adopted by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers in 1975 The Model 2182 conforms to these standards TEEE 488 1987 1 JTEEE 488 1987 2 This standard defines a syntax for sending data to and from instruments how an instrument interprets this data what registers should exist to record the state of the instrument and a group of common commands e SCPI 1991 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This standard defines a command language protocol It goes one step farther than TEEE 488 1987 2 and defines a standar
53. User Request URQ A set bit indicates that the LOCAL key on the Model 2182 front panel was pressed Bit B7 Power ON PON A set bit indicates that the Model 2182 has been turned off and turned back on since the last time this register has been read Figure 12 2 Standard event status register Bit Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Decimal Weighting 128 64 32 16 8 4 27 2 2 24 23 22 Value O 1 O 1 O 1 0 1 O 1 Of Note Bits B8 through B15 are not shown since they are not used ent Bit Set Events PON Power On ent Bit Cleared URQ User Request CME Command Error EXE Execution Error DDE Device Dependent Error QYE Query Error OPC Operation Complete Value 1 Ev 0 Ev IDN Identification Query Read the identification code Description The identification code includes the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels and is sent in the following format KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC MODEL 2182 xxxxxxx yyyyy zzzzz Where XXxxxxx is the serial number yyyyy zzzzz is the firmware revision levels of the digital board ROM and display board ROM Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 8 Common Commands OPC Operation Complete Set the OPC bit in the standard event register after all pending commands are complete Description After the
54. Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 11 Programming examples ACAL Autozero and LSYNC Program Example 1 This program fragment performs low level ACAL NOTE After sending the following commands the DONE and INIT commands will not execute until calibration is completed CALL SEND 7 cal unpr acal init status Prepares 2182 for ACAL CALL SEND 7 calz unpr acal step2 status Performs low level ACAL CALL SEND 7 cal unpr acal done status Exits ACAL mode CALL SEND 7 init cont on status 1 Starts continuous 1 triggering Program Example 2 This program fragment disables autozero CALL SEND 7 syst azer off status3 Disables autozero Program Example 3 This program fragment enables line cycle synchronization CALL SEND 7 syst lsync on status3 Enables LSYNC Program Example 4 This program fragment enables low charge injection for Channel 2 CALL SEND 7 sens volt chan2 lqm on status3 Enables low charge injection Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 12 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Connections WARNING A hazardous voltage condition exists at or above 42V peak To prevent electric shock that could result in injury or death NEVER make or break connections while hazardous voltage is present CAUTION Exceeding the following limits may cause instrument damage not c
55. WARM UP 2 5 hours to rated accuracy DIMENSIONS Rack Mounting 89mm high x 213mm wide x 370mm deep 3 5in x 8 375in x 14 563in Bench Configuration with handles and feet 104mm high x 238mm wide x 370mm deep 4 125 in x 9 375 in x 14 563 in SHIPPING WEIGHT 5kg 11 Ibs ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED 2107 4 Low Thermal Input Cable with spade lugs 1 2m 4 ft User manual service manual contact cleaner line cord alligator clips ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE 2107 30 Low Thermal Input Cable with spade lugs 9 1m 30 ft 2182 KIT Low Thermal Connector with strain relief 2188 Low Thermal Calibration Shorting Plug 2187 4 Input Cable with safety banana plugs 4288 1 Single Fixed Rack Mount Kit 4288 2 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 7007 1 Shielded GPIB Cable 1m 3 2 ft 7007 2 Shielded GPIB Cable 2m 6 5 ft 7009 5 Shielded RS 232 Cable 1 5m 5 ft 8501 1 Trigger Link Cable 1m 3 2 ft 8501 2 Trigger Link Cable 2m 6 5 ft 8502 Trigger Link Adapter to 6 female BNC connectors 8503 Trigger Link Cable to 2 male BNC connectors Notes 1 Relative to calibration accuracy 2 With Analog Filter on add 20ppm of reading to listed specification 3 When properly zeroed using REL function If REL is not used add 100nV to the range accuracy 4 Specifications include the use of ACAL function If ACAL is not used add 9ppm of reading C from Tc to the listed specification Tea is the internal temperature stored during ACAL
56. Z2 value Enable reading relative using value le 9 to 120 Z3 Enable reading relative use present value Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Model 182 Emulation Commands D 5 NOTES 1 A Commands The maximum number of characters for the Al command string is 12 The A2 and A3 commands are not supported 2 C Commands Calibration commands are not supported by the 182 language You must use the SCPI language to calibrate the Model 2182 over the bus 3 G Commands The G4 through G7 commands are not supported by the 182 language The Model 182 does not use time stamp 4 H Commands The H1 command is not supported by the 182 language 5 I Commands The minimum buffer size for the Model 2182 is 2 while the minimum buffer size for the Model 182 is 1 Therefore to set minimum buffer size 11 0 is valid for the Model 182 and I1 2 is valid for the Model 2182 The I2 command circular buffer is not supported 6 J Commands For the Model 2182 J1 uses the last reading as the Rel value whereas the J1 command for the Model 182 uses the next reading as the Rel value The J3 command simply enables analog output relative and uses the present Rel value 7 S Commands The S3 command has been added to include a 1 second integration period 8 T Commands The front panel TRIG key is always operational
57. a mask for the Status Summary Message bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register When masked a set summary bit in the Status Byte Register cannot set bit B6 MSS RQS of the Status Byte Register Conversely when unmasked a set summary bit in the Status Byte Register sets bit B6 A Status Summary Message bit in the Status Byte Register is masked when the corresponding bit in the Service Request Enable Register is cleared 0 When the masked summary bit in the Status Byte Register sets it is ANDed with the corresponding cleared bit in the Service Request Enable Register The logic 616 output of the AND gate is applied to the input of the OR gate and thus sets the MSS RQS bit in the Status Byte Register The individual bits of the Service Request Enable Register can be set or cleared by using the SRE lt NRf gt common command To read the Service Request Enable Register use the SRE query command The Service Request Enable Register clears when power is cycled or a parameter n value of zero is sent with the SRE command SRE 0 Serial poll and SRQ Any enabled event summary bit that goes from 0 to 1 will set RQS and generate a service request SRQ In your test program you can periodically read the Status Byte Register to check if a service request SRQ has occurred and what caused it If an SRQ occurs the program can for example branch to an appropriate subroutine that will service the request Typically serv
58. a single measurement function DCV1 DCV2 TEMP1 or TEMP2 or by selecting Delta NOTES When Ratio is selected one of the channel annunciators CH1 or CH2 will turn on briefly This indicates the channel that can be controlled by the manual range key After that both the CH1 and CH2 annunciators will turn on See Ranging considerations for details If an overflow condition OVRFLW occurs the range that overflowed will format the display Ratio readings can be stored in the buffer See Section 6 for details on using the buffer Reading HOLD cannot be used with Ratio Selecting Ratio or Delta disables HOLD LSYNC line cycle integration must be enabled when RATIO is selected LSYNC turns on automatically when RATIO is selected and turns off automatically when exiting RATIO Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 3 Step 1 Connect voltages to be measured to the Model 2182 Details on connecting the Model 2182 to the voltages to be measured are provided in Section 2 see Connections WARNING A hazardous voltage condition exists at or above 42V peak To prevent electric shock that could result in injury or death NEVER make or break connections while hazardous voltage is present CAUTION Exceeding the following limits may cause instrument damage not covered by the warranty Channel 1 HI and LO terminals have a m
59. affected by RST CALL SEND 7 Stat pres cls status CALL SEND 7 Stat meas enab 512 status enable BFL CALL SEND 7 sre 1 status enable MSB CALL SEND 7 trac feed cont next status Start everything CALL SEND 7 init statuss WaitSRQ IF NOT srq THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SPOLL 7 poll status IF poll AND 64 0 THEN GOTO WaitSRQ After the program has detected an asserted SRQ line it serial polls the Model 2182 to determine if it is the device requesting service This is necessary for two reasons e Serial polling the Model 2182 causes it to stop asserting the SRQ line e In test systems that have more than one IEEE 488 instrument programmed to assert SRQ your program must determine which instrument is actually requesting service Once an event register has caused a service request it cannot cause another service request until you clear it by reading it in this case using STATus MEASurement EVENt or by sending the CLS command Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Example Programs Storing readings in buffer The reading buffer in the Model 2182 is flexible and capable It has three controls which are found in the TRACe subsystem There are commands to control The size of the buffer in readings TRACe POINts lt NRf gt e Where the data is coming from before or after the CALCulate math post processing TRACe
60. all bits of the following registers are cleared to zero 0 e Questionable Event Enable Register e Measurement Event Enable Register e Operation Event Enable Register NOTE Registers not included in the above list are not affected by this command QUEue commands NEXT STATus QUEue NEXT Read Error Queue Description As error and status messages occur they are placed into the Error Queue This query command is used to read those messages The Error Queue is a first in first out FIFO register Each time you read the queue the oldest message is read and that message is then removed from the queue The queue will hold up to ten messages If the queue becomes full the 350 Queue Overflow message will occupy the last memory location in the register On power up the Error Queue is empty When the Error Queue is empty the 0 No error message is placed in the Error Queue The messages in the queue are preceded by a number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages The messages are listed in Appendix B After this command is sent and the Model 2182 is addressed to talk the oldest message in the queue is sent to the computer NOTE The STATus QUEue NEXT query command performs the same function as the iSYSTem ERRor query command see System subsystem CLEar STATus QUEue CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This ac
61. and Offset drop out of the equation Analog Output Rdg Rng Table 10 1 shows analog output examples with Gain set to 1 and Offset set to 0 Table 10 1 Analog output examples Analog Output Reading Range Voltage 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 1V 10V 0 1V 12V 10 1 2V 50mV 100mV_ 0 5V lmV 1V ImV Gain 1 Offset 0 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 10 4 Analog Output Temperature The analog output voltage for temperature measurements depends on thermocouple type and the selected units C F or K The 1 2V analog output is scaled to the maximum positive temperature reading For example the measurement range for the Type J thermocouple is 200 C to 760 C For a 760 C reading the analog output voltage will be 1 2V and for a 200 C reading the analog output voltage will be 0 316V The measurement ranges in C for the various thermocouple types are listed in the specifications see Appendix A With Gain set to 1 and Offset set to 0 analog output voltage for temperature measurements is calculated as follows Analog Output 1 2 x Rdg Rng Rng is a magnitude Therefore it is always a positive value Example Calculations Type J 100 C Reading Type J 100 C Reading Analog Output 1 2 x 100 760 Analog Output 1 2 x 100 760 158mV 158mV When using Gain and Offset the calculation is expan
62. and Percent These calculations provide mathematical manipulation of readings Relative Null offsets or establish baseline values Buffer Store up to 1024 readings in the internal buffer Limits Set high and low reading limits to test devices Internal Scanning Scan the two input channels of the Model 2182 External Scanning Scan the channels or matrix points of Keithley Model 7001 7002 switching cards Setup Storage Two instrument setups user and factory defaults can be saved and recalled Analog Output With analog output gain set to one a full range input will result in a 1V analog output Remote Interface The Model 2182 can be controlled using the IEEE 488 interface GPIB or the RS 232 interface GPIB Programming Language When using the GPIB the instrument can be programmed using the SCPI or Model 182 DDCs programming language Closed cover Calibration The Model 2182 can be calibrated from either the front panel or the GPIB Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started 1 7 Front and rear panel familiarization Front panel summary The front panel of the Model 2182 is shown in Figure 1 1 This figure includes important abbreviated information that should be reviewed before operating the instrument Figure 1 1 Model 2182 front panel KEITHLEY CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 2182 NANOVOLTMETER 120V MAX
63. aprisse si e a EE R E E EAEE E REA 3 3 Maximum readings siririca piiri eik aidia e 3 3 Manual ram Gin 8 sssrinin peer teredir egoa SEEE rE Era SEE eas EE 3 3 A t fa ging wos tics ehitsceis cpeideeweeieneidl geen cdeeaea svete adeedvibesed aap lesediesodaangencs 3 4 SCPI programming LANGE y 2csecaestsaacsscesenseeussosaeehsawecncsvanasenaqstapedeiseaevseieneetens 3 4 DIS 1S oati ieee iis eee nie EE IEE EAA Aoeisd wean E ENEE eared 3 5 SCPI programing digits vecciecesciassiecesstsssnisieogecrenssenasecpansanetsduessiecsenaacsnensdis 3 5 Eie E E E E E E 3 6 SCPI programming Late ccc cssceonsaccsaatsseatensasesissoes aer ar a a 3 7 daUe a E A E E sobsdectessuusise e 3 8 Analos TUTE cesaisicdascessetesesvteasteaesieiardsecdersnsbaasseageeansectaneceas shee wasiseouebsueactagecaay 3 8 Digital Titer nares iner olde goees AER EENE EREET 3 8 SCPI programming filter ss c ccccecseccessssscadsssisassetersabsauevessodueewcnsssoaetsneatensyoayisde 3 12 Relative mX b and Percent REIAtVE aier tenaaan e E AE a AR E EEEa 4 3 RELE EY aeae a E A E E saat 4 3 SCPI programming relative sosisini sioiias ieii iieiea 4 4 mX b and percent P eeseessecseeseeseeeseeseeseessesscesoesseeseesscssesssessesscssoesseesessessesseesse 4 6 ina DAG AoE E E E O 4 6 Percent Mo siscesvevessccstescescosivssvaeseosnevsdecsedeseseceesestensesnsessbasotovesssusseyne sedseseecuceessss 4 7 SCPI programming mX b and percent s essssssssseeseseesessrstsresr
64. are used to send the uniline commands ATN Attention The ATN state determines how information on the data bus is to be interpreted IFC Interface Clear The IFC line controls clearing of instruments from the bus REN Remote Enable The REN line is used to place the instrument on the bus in the remote mode Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 Bus Overview F 5 EOI End or Identify The EOI line is used to mark the end of a multi byte data transfer sequence SRQ Service Request The SRQ line is used by devices when they require service from the controller Handshake lines The bus handshake lines operate in an interlocked sequence This method ensures reliable data transmission regardless of the transfer rate Generally data transfer will occur at a rate determined by the slowest active device on the bus One of the three handshake lines is controlled by the source the talker sending information while the remaining two lines are controlled by accepting devices the listener or listeners receiving the information The three handshake lines are DAV DATA VALID The source controls the state of the DAV line to indicate to any listening devices whether or not data bus information is valid NRFD Not Ready For Data The acceptor controls the state of NRFD It is used to signal to the transmitting device to hold off the byte
65. assembly and rotate it to the proper position When the selector is installed into the fuse holder assembly the correct line voltage appears inverted in the window 4 Install the fuse holder assembly into the power module by pushing it in until it locks in place Table 1 1 Fuse ratings Line Voltage Fuse Rating Keithley P N 100 120V 220 240V 0 25A slow blow 5x20mm 0 125A slow blow 5x20mm FU 96 4 FU 91 Power up sequence On power up the Model 2182 performs self tests on its EPROM and RAM and momentarily lights all digit segments and annunciators If a failure is detected the instrument momentarily displays an error message and the ERR annunciator turns on Error messages are listed in Appendix B NOTE Ifa problem develops while the instrument is under warranty return it to Keithley Instruments Inc for repair If the instrument passes the self tests the firmware revision levels are displayed For example REV A01 A02 where AOI is the main board ROM revision A02 is the display board ROM revision After the power up sequence the instrument begins its normal display of readings Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 16 Getting Started Line frequency Display On power up the Model 2182 detects the line power frequency and automatically selects the proper line frequency setting The line frequency
66. cases where this command should be used The DATA FRESh query see page H 4 is often a better choice If this query is used the following conditions should be met e A reading has been triggered either by free running INIT CONT ON and TRIG SOUR IMM by some event such as a bus trigger TRG or by an external trigger TRIG SOUR EXT It is confirmed that the reading is completed either by the setting of the RAV bit in the status model or by allowing sufficient time to pass for the reading to complete READ What it does This command performs three actions It will reset the trigger model to the idle layer equivalent to the ABORt command take the trigger model out of idle equivalent to the INIT command and return a reading equivalent to a FETCh query This command will always return a new reading since aborting the trigger model will invalidate any old readings and trigger a new one This query will wait for a new reading to become available before the instrument sends a result back Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Queries H 3 Limitations This command won t work if the trigger source is set for BUS or EXTERNAL This will cause a 214 Trigger deadlock error Under this condition one should use a FETCh query or a DATA FRESh query see page H 4 If the trigger model is continuousl
67. com SCPI Reference Tables 14 3 Table 14 1 CALCulate command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI CALCulate 1 Path to configure and control KMATh calculations Sec 4 V FORMat lt name gt Select math format NONE MXB or PERCent NONE Vv FORMat Query math format Vv KMATh Configure math calculations MMFactor lt NRf gt Set m for mX b calculation 100e6 to 100e6 1 MMFactor Query m factor MBFactor lt NRf gt Set b for mX b calculation 100e6 to 100e6 0 MBFactor Query b factor MUNits lt name gt Specify units for mX b result up to 2 characters MX A through Z V degrees symbol P ohms Q symbol MUNits Query units PERCent lt NRf gt Set target value for PERcent math calculation 1 ACQuire Use input signal as target value PERCent Query target value for PERcent math calculation STATe lt b gt Enable or disable KMATh calculation OFF vV STATe Query state of KMATh calculation Vv DATA Path to acquire calculation result V LATest Return last calculation result v FRESh Trigger a reading and return the calculation result vV CALCulate2 Path to configure and control math calculations on Sec 6 V buffer data FORMat lt name gt Select math calculation MEAN SDEViation NONE Vv MAXimum MINimum or NONE FOR Mat Query math calculation Vv STATe lt b gt Enable or disable math calculation OFF V STATe Query state of
68. com D Model 182 Emulation Commands E Example Programs Program examples mossen iie iiia iei Ei E 2 Changing function and range cesceesccceseeeseeeeeceeeeeceneeeneceaeeseeesaeeneeeeeaeees E 2 One Shot trig gerig ceseseivstccccescsesseveceeuecssecceecheveseestsUsesucessdsccucdesstccstuvaseedaceeees E 4 Generating SRQ on buffer full seeesesssessseeseseesersrsenseuresessenesseeseneesensreresesss E 5 Storing readings in buffer siessen ousensia E 6 Taking readings using the READ commando eee eseeeereeeeeeeeeeeeaeenes E 7 Controlling the Model 2182 via the RS 232 COM2 port sesser E 8 F IEEE 488 Bus Overview TPO GUC HOT ess ss cove sects esta deccweszevacccedees deta videa vedeainess desaccehsaiteanaetes cotees eevee TEE F 2 Bus description cessive icstetasvs Sash bd aetekevetieehitelieeedl av ies ees Dente acs ee F 2 B s LAGS 5 esr eee va cccseevacs E E E A EE AEA EE E F 4 Data NES roerei ee E A OEE O N N TERE F 4 Bus management lines sssssessesessessssssssesstsseesstsstesstsstsssrsresstesteseesereseeseesseesees F 4 Handshake lines sss cresenco eiiiai oiea rE i O EE aus REE i F 5 BUS COMMMANGS sies eee eean ee e eee E EEE E E EEE REA E SR aeS F 6 Uniline commands inisieer ee eiieeii oa EE E EN Et S ETETE F 7 Universal multiline commands 0 0 cee ceecceeseeseeceseeeseeceseeeeeeceaeeeseeceaeeseaeeeaeensas F 8 Addressed multiline commands ssssssseesseseeessesseessessssstsstsssssressessreseesereseesens F 9 Ad
69. controllers system controller and basic controller Both are able to control other instruments but only the system controller has the absolute authority in the system In a system with more than one controller only one controller may be active at any given time Certain protocol is used to pass control from one controller to another The IEEE 488 bus is limited to 15 devices including the controller Thus any number of talkers and listeners up to that limit may be present on the bus at one time Although several devices may be commanded to listen simultaneously the bus can have only one active talker or communications would be scrambled Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com F 4 IEEE 488 Bus Overview A device is placed in the talk or listen state by sending an appropriate talk or listen command These talk and listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address The primary address may have any value between 0 and 31 and is generally set by rear panel DIP switches or programmed in from the front panel of the instrument The actual listen address value sent out over the bus is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 For example if the primary address is 7 the actual listen address is 27 27 7 20 In a similar manner the talk address is obtained by ORing the primary address with 40 With the present example the talk address derived from a pr
70. copper 2107 wire connection 2107 wire connection Input Cable one of two Input Cable one of three red HI 0 CH 1 Reap Loo black gt HI i i green CH 2 DUT DCV2 LO T White 2182 Test Circuit 2182 Test Circuit A Channel 1 Measurements B Channel 2 Measurements Dual Channel Measurement Connections The dual channel feature of the Model 2182 allows you to make comparison measurements within a test circuit Figure 2 5A shows typical connections to make comparison measurements of two devices in a test circuit For this measurement configuration there is no voltage differential between the two measurement channels Channel 2 HI is connected directly to Channel 1 LO Figure 2 5B shows a measurement configuration that has a voltage differential between two channels The differential is the 2V drop across R Channel 1 measures voltage across DUT 1 and Channel 2 measures voltage across DUT 2 Internally the A D converter references Channel 2 measurements to Channel 1 LO For example if 1V is being input to Channel 2 and there is a 2V differential between the two channels 3V will be applied to the A D converter Therefore if Channel 2 is on the 1V range the 3V applied to the A D converter will cause it to overflow The 1V measurement on Channel 2 can only be performed on the 10V range Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Vo
71. damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the war ranty Instrumentation and accessories shall not be connected to humans Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables To maintain protection from electric shock and fire replacement components in mains circuits including the power transformer test leads and input jacks must be purchased from Keithley Instruments Standard fuses with applicable national safety ap provals may be used if the rating and type are the same Other components that are not safety related may be purchased from other suppliers as long as they are equivalent to the original component Note that selected parts should be purchased only through Keithley Instruments to maintain accuracy and functionality of the product If you are unsure about the applicability of a replacement component call a Keithley Instruments office for information To clean an instrument use a damp cloth or mild water based cleaner Clean the exterior of the instrument only Do not apply cleaner directly to the instrument or allow liquids to enter or spill on the instrument Products that consist of a circuit board with no case or chassis e g data acquisition board for installation into a computer should never require cleaning if handled accord ing to instructions If the board becomes contaminated and operation is affected the board should be returned to the factory for proper cleaning servicing T
72. details on Model 182 operation refer to the Model 182 Instruction Manual Since the architecture of the Model 2182 differs from that of the Model 182 some commands are different and cannot be used Be sure to refer to the notes at the end of the table for information on command restrictions CAUTION The 182 language is intended to be used only over the IEEE 488 bus Using front panel controls in conjunction with this language may cause erratic operation In this case results cannot be guaranteed Table D 1 Model 182 device dependent command summary Mode Command Description Note Display ASCII String AO Restore display to normal 1 Al string Display string up to 12 characters Display Resolution BO 5 2 digit resolution Bl 6 2 digit resolution B2 3 2 digit resolution B3 4 2 digit resolution Calibration None C Calibration commands not supported 2 Filter Damping DO Configure filter damping off same as P2 D1 Configure filter damping on same as P3 Reading Source FO Latest reading from A D converter Fl One reading from buffer F2 All readings in buffer F3 Maximum value in buffer F4 Minimum value in buffer Reading Format GO Reading only 3 Gl Reading with prefix G2 Reading with buffer location G3 Reading with buffer location and prefix Immediate Trigger HO Initiate manual trigger 4 Buffer Configuration IO Disable buffer 5 Il1 value Buffer on value buffer size Analog Output JO Disable analog output relative 6 Relative J1 Enable
73. due to electric shock 4 Turn on the instrument by pressing the front panel power switch to the on 1 position Figure 1 3 Power module Model 2182 Window Fuse Holder Assembly Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Setting line voltage and replacing fuse A rear panel fuse located next to the AC receptacle protects the power line input of the Getting Started 1 15 instrument If the line voltage setting needs to be changed or the line fuse needs to be replaced perform the following steps WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the AC line and other equipment before changing the line voltage setting or replacing the fuse 1 Place the tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the power module by the fuse holder assembly see Figure 1 3 Gently push in and move to the left Release pressure on the assembly and its internal spring will push it out of the power module 2 Remove the fuse and replace it with the type listed in Table 1 1 CAUTION For continued protection against fire or instrument damage only replace the fuse with the type and rating listed If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse See the Model 2182 Service Manual for troubleshooting information 3 Ifconfiguring the instrument for a different line voltage remove the line voltage selector from the
74. fast Delta measurements 2x speed disable Front Autozero SHIFT gt CONFIG gt FRONT AUTOZERO N Press EX TRIG to place the instrument in the external trigger mode This will halt measurements If a longer settling time is required before performing each measurement set a manual delay from the Model 2182 Press SHIFT and then DELAY to select and set delay NOTE Do not set a delay on the SourceMeter as this may adversely affect trigger synchronization between the SourceMeter and the Model 2182 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 13 Step 8 Turn on the SourceMeter output and reset the trigger model A Turn on the output by pressing the OUTPUT ON OFF key ARM annunciator turns on B Reset the trigger model as follows 1 Press CONFIG and then TRIG to access the trigger configuration menu 2 Select HALT to place the SourceMeter in the idle state ARM annunciator turns off 3 Press EXIT to return to the normal display Step9 Set up the Model 2182 to store readings in the buffer optional On the Model 2182 press STORE and set the number of Delta readings to store in the buffer Press ENTER to enable the buffer Step 10 Start the sweep from the SourceMeter A To arm the sweep press SWEEP B To start the sweep press TRIG At the end of each 2 point sweep a Delta reading will be calculated and displayed and s
75. heating and eliminate the effects of thermal EMFs Assume the Model 6221 is configured to output 10mA and OmA pulses Due to a 10u V thermal EMF in the test leads the following Model 2182A measurement conversions A Ds are made for the first Pulse Delta cycle A D A 0 01mV A D B 10 01mV A D C 0 01mV The first Pulse Delta reading using the 3 point measurement technique is calculated as follows 2B A C PulseDelta 1 _ 2 10 01 0 01 0 01 3 20mV 2 10mV The above 3 point measurement technique effectively eliminated the 10uV thermal EMF from the Pulse Delta reading 2 point measurement technique Assume for the above example that DUT heating causes the A D measurement at point C to be 1 01mV Using the 3 point measurement technique Pulse Delta by calculation would instead be 9 5mV This results in 5 mea surement error due to heating The affects of heating can be eliminated by not performing the measurement at point C low pulse For this 2 point measurement technique Pulse Delta is calculated as follows 2B 2A PulseDelta 5 1 _ 2 10 01 2 0 01 2 _ 20mV 2 10mV Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance I 11 Measurement units The fundamental Pulse Delta measurement explained on the previous page is in volts The reading can instead be c
76. included in the program message If a colon were included the path pointer would reset to the root level and expect a root command Since enab is not a root command an error would occur Command path rules Each new program message must begin with the root command unless it is optional e g SSENSe If the root is optional simply treat a command word on the next level as the root The colon at the beginning of a program message is optional and need not be used Stat pres Sstat pres When the path pointer detects a colon it moves down to the next command level An exception is when the path pointer detects a semicolon which is used to separate commands within the program message When the path pointer detects a colon that immediately follows a semicolon it resets back to the root level The path pointer can only move down It cannot be moved up a level Executing a command at a higher level requires that you start over at the root command Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 26 Remote Operation Using common commands and SCPI commands in the same message Both common commands and SCPI commands can be used in the same message as long as they are separated by semicolons A common command can be executed at any command level and will not affect the path pointer stat oper enab lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt Program
77. instrument setups assume factory defaults Note that Channel 1 of the Model 2182 must be used for external scanning 1 oe On the Model 7001 Switch System enter a scan list of channels 1 to 8 on card 1 Also on the Model 7001 configure the instrument for Trigger Link triggers and one scan of eight channels On the Model 2182 configure an external scan of the first eight channels Set the Model 2182 for external triggers by pressing EX TRIG Press STEP or SCAN on the Model 2182 The asterisk and STEP or SCAN annunciator will light Press STEP on the Model 7001 to start channel closures After the scan you can recall eight readings from the Model 2182 buffer Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 11 Figure 9 3 External scanning example with Model 7001 Model 7001 Model 2182 from reset setup from factory setup Q SCAN CHANNELS 1 1 1 8 CONFIGURE SCAN CHAN CONTROL CHANNEL SPACING TRIGLINK ASYNCHRONOUS CHAN COUNT 8 SCAN CONTROL SCAN COUNT 1 suierconric TYPE EXT MIN CHAN 001 MAX CHAN 008 TIMER OFF RDG CNT 0008 ENTER Y ex TRIG Y STEP or SCAN Y STEP y RECALL 8 readings 4 b a v EXIT Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEqu
78. lt name gt NORMal Normal byte order for binary formats SWAPped Reverse byte order for binary formats Description This command is used to control the byte order for the IEEE754 binary formats For normal byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4 Single precision Byte 1 Byte 2 ae Byte 8 Double precision For reverse byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Single precision Byte 8 Byte 7 i Byte 1 Double precision The 0 Header is not affected by this command The Header is always sent at the beginning of the data string for each measurement conversion The ASCII data format can only be sent in the normal byte order The SWAPped selection is ignored when the ASCII format is selected ELEMents command ELEMents lt item list gt FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt Specify elements to include in data string Parameters lt item list gt READing Includes reading in data string CHANnel Includes channel number UNITs Includes units NOTE Each item in the list must be separated by a comma Description This command is used to specify the elements to be included in the data string for each measurement conversion You can specify from one to all three elements Each element in the list must be separated by a comma These elements shown in Figure 15 1 are explained in the following paragraphs READing Instrume
79. male DB 9 connector on one end and a female DB 9 connector on the other end It is wired as a straight through not null modem cable Models 8501 1 and 8501 2 Trigger Link Cables Connect the Model 2182 to other instruments with Trigger Link connectors e g Model 7001 Switch System The Model 8501 1 is 1m long the Model 8501 2 is 2m long Model 8502 Trigger Link Adapter Lets you connect any of the six Trigger Link lines of the Model 2182 to instruments that use the standard BNC trigger connectors Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable Lets you connect Trigger Link lines one Voltmeter Complete and two External Trigger of the Model 2182 to instruments that use BNC trigger connectors The Model 8503 is 1m long Silver solder 2182 325A Use this Keithley part number to order a 20 foot length of silver solder Also included is an MSDS sheet listing the solder chemical contents Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started 1 5 Rack mount kits Model 4288 1 Single Fixed Rack Mount Kit Mounts a single Model 2182 in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 2 Side by Side Rack Mount Kit Mounts two instruments Models 182 428 486 487 2000 2001 2002 2010 2182 2400 2410 2420 6517 7001 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 4 Side by Side Rack Mount Kit Mounts a Model 2182 and a 5 25 inch instrument Models 195A 19
80. math calculation vV DATA Read result of Calc2 vV IMMediate Recalculate using raw input data in buffer vV IMMediate Recalculate and return result of Calc2 V CALCulate3 Path to configure and control limit testing Sec 8 V LIMit 1 Limit 1 Testing V UPPer Configure upper limit vV DATA lt n gt Specify limit 100e6 to 100e6 1 V DATA Query upper limit V LOWer Configure lower limit V DATA lt n gt Specify limit 100e6 to 100e6 1 V DATA Query lower limit vV STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 1 test OFF vV STATe Query state of Limit 1 test vV FAIL Return result of Limit 1 test 0 pass or 1 fail vV CLEar Clear test results V Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 4 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14 1 CALCulate command summary cont Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI IMMediate Clear limit test results vV AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable clearing of limit test results ON V when a new trigger model cycle starts AUTO Query state of auto clear vV LIMit2 Limit 2 Testing vV UPPer Configure upper limit V DATA lt n gt Specify limit 100e6 to 100e6 2 vV DATA Query upper limit V LOWer Configure lower limit V DATA lt n gt Specify limit 100e6 to 100e6 2 V DATA Query lower limit v STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 2 test
81. message terminator PMT Each program message must be terminated with an LF line feed EOI end or identify or an LF EOI The bus will hang if your computer does not provide this termination The following example shows how a program message must be terminated srout scan 1 5 lt PMT gt Command execution rules e Commands execute in the order that they are presented in the program message An invalid command generates an error and of course is not executed Valid commands that precede an invalid command in a multiple command program message are executed Valid commands that follow an invalid command in a multiple command program message are ignored Response messages A response message is the message sent by the instrument to the computer in response to a query command program message Sending a response message After sending a query command the response message is placed in the Output Queue When the Model 2182 is addressed to talk the response message is sent from the Output Queue to the computer Multiple response messages If you send more than one query command in the same program message see Multiple command messages the multiple response messages for all the queries is sent to the computer when the Model 2182 is addressed to talk The responses are sent in the order that the query commands were sent and are separated by semicolons Items within the same query are separated by commas The
82. network can then be calibrated by adjusting the network pot until a reading of 0 10000 is displayed Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 19 For even greater precision the Relative feature of the Model 2182 can be used to null out thermal EMFs which can corrupt low voltage measurements Use Rel as follows 1 While displaying the Ratio result disconnect the current source from the network Press the REL key on the Model 2182 The voltages at each input which are thermal EMBs are nulled out 3 Reconnect the current source and take the result of Ratio from the display When using Rel Ratio is calculated as follows Filt V1 V1 Rel Ratio Fir V2 V2 Rel The above calculation includes Channel 1 Filter If Filter is not used remove the Filt component from the calculation Testing superconductor materials A superconductor sample is typically tested by either varying the current through it or varying the magnetic field that surrounds it NOTE The following applications use H magnetic field as one of the test parameters The applications can easily be modified to substitute temperature T for H as a test parameter When varying the magnetic field H the current 1 that flows through the DUT is fixed When varying the current I through the superconductor material DUT the magnetic field H that surrounds it is held constant
83. obtain accurate voltage readings Some of the phenomena that can cause unwanted noise include thermoelectric effects thermocouple action source resistance noise magnetic fields and radio frequency interference The following paragraphs discuss the most important of these effects and ways to minimize them NOTE For comprehensive information on low level measurements see the Low Level Measurements handbook which is available from Keithley Thermoelectric potentials Thermoelectric potentials thermal EMFs are small electric potentials generated by differences in temperature at the junction of dissimilar metals The following paragraphs discuss how such thermals are generated and ways to minimize their effects Thermoelectric coefficients As shown in Table C 1 the magnitude of thermal EMFs generated depends on the particular materials involved Best results are obtained with clean copper to copper connections as indicated in the table Table C 1 Table C 2Material thermoelectric coefficients Material Thermoelectric Potential Copper Copper 0 2nV C Copper Silver 0 3nV C Copper Gold 0 3nV C Copper Cadmium Tin 0 3nV C Copper Lead Tin 1 3p V C Copper Kovar 40u V C Copper Silicon 400u V C Copper Copper Oxide 10004 V C Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Considerations C 3 Thermoelectric generation Figure C 1 sho
84. occurs the setup memory defaults to the SYSTem PRESet values NOTE For RS 232 operation and in some cases GPIB operation OPC or OPC should be used with RCL which is a slow responding command Details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 12 Common Commands RST Reset Return 2182 to RST defaults Description When the RST command is sent the Model 2182 performs the following operations 1 Returns the Model 2182 to the RST default conditions see SCPI tables 2 Cancels all pending commands 3 Cancels response to any previously received OPC and OPC commands NOTE For RS 232 operation and in some cases GPIB operation OPC or OPC should be used with RST which is a slow responding command Details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12 SAV Save Save present setup in memory Parameters lt NRf gt 0 Description Use the SAVE command to save the present instrument setup configuration in memory for later recall Any control affected by RST can be saved by the SAV command The RCL command is used to restore the instrument to the saved setup configuration Only one setup configuration can be saved and recalled NOTE For RS 232 operation and in some cases GPIB operation OPC or OPC should be used with SAV which is a slow responding command Details on OPC and
85. of the Model 2182 The commands in this subsystem are summarized in Table 14 8 NOTE The status structure of Model 2182 is explained in Section 12 EVENt command EVENt STATus MEASurement EVENt Read Measurement Event Register STATus OPERation EVENt Read Operation Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read Questionable Event Register Description These query commands are used to read the event registers After sending one of these commands and addressing the Model 2182 to talk a decimal value is sent to the computer The binary equivalent of this value determines which bits in the appropriate register are set The event registers are shown in Figure 15 4 Figure 15 5 and Figure 15 6 Note that reading an event register clears the bits in that register For example assume that reading the Measurement Event Register results in an acquired decimal value of 544 The binary equivalent is 0000001000100000 For this binary value bits B5 and B9 of the Measurement Event Register are set Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 8 Additional SCPI Commands Measurement Event Register Bit BO Reading Overflow ROF Set bit indicates that the reading exceeds the measure ment range of the instrument Bit B1 Low Limit1 LL1 Set bit indicates that the reading is less than the Low Limit 1 setting Bit B2 High Limit1 HL1 Set bit indica
86. on the state of Autozero For details see Autozeroing modes in Section 2 SCPI programming rate Table 3 3 SCPI commands rate Commands Description Default SENSe SENSe Subsystem VOLTage DCV1 and DCV2 NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in PLCs 0 01 to 60 60Hz 5 0 01 to 50 S0Hz APERture lt n gt Specify integration rate in seconds 166 67psec to 1 sec 60Hz 83 33msec 200usec to 1 sec 50Hz TEMPerature TEMP and TEMP2 NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in PLCs 0 01 to 60 60Hz 3 0 01 to 50 50Hz APERture lt n gt Specify integration rate in seconds 166 67usec to 1 sec 60Hz 83 33msec 200usec to 1 sec 50Hz Programming example rate The following program fragment sets the voltage reading rate to 2 PLC and the temperature reading rate to 5 PLC CALL SEND 7 sens volt nplc 2 status Set volts for 2 PIC CALL SEND 7 sens temp nplc 5 status Set temp for 5 PLC Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 3 8 Range Digits Rate and Filter Filter The Model 2182 has an analog filter and a digital filter When Filter is enabled by pressing the FILT key FILT annunciator on it assumes the combination of analog and digital filter configuration for the present measurement function DCV1 DCV2 TEMP TEMP2 Filter state enabled or disabled and configuration is saved by each fun
87. output OUTPUT REL Selects the value of input that represents OV at output The reference value can be either programmed value or the value of the previous input TRIGGERING AND MEMORY WINDOW FILTER SENSITIVITY 0 01 0 1 1 10 or full scale range none READING HOLD SENSITIVITY 0 01 0 1 1 or 10 of reading TRIGGER DELAY 0 to 99 hours 1ms step size EXTERNAL TRIGGER DELAY 2ms lt 1 ms jitter with auto zero off trigger delay 0 MEMORY SIZE 1024 readings MATH FUNCTIONS Rel Min Max Average Std Dev Peak to Peak of stored reading Limit Test and mX b with user defined units displayed REMOTE INTERFACE Keithley 182 emulation GPIB IEEE 488 2 and RS 232C SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS POWER SUPPLY 100V 120V 220V 240V LINE FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz and 400Hz automatically sensed at power up POWER CONSUMPTION 22VA OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Specified for 0 to 50 C Specified to 80 RH at 35 C MAGNETIC FIELD DENSITY 10mV range 4 0s response noise tested to 500 gauss STORAGE ENVIRONMENT 40 to 70 C WARRANTY 3 years SAFETY Complies with European Union Directive 73 23 EEC low voltage directive meets EN61010 1 safety standard Installation category I EMC Complies with European Union Directive 89 336 EEC CE marking requirement FCC part 15 class B CISPR 11 IEC 801 2 IEC 801 3 IEC 801 4 VIBRATION MIL PRF 28800E Type III Class 5
88. p gt and the RANGE and keys to set the number of readings to store 2 to 1024 4 Press ENTER to enable the buffer If in the immediate trigger mode the storage process will start immediately If in the external trigger mode each input trigger or press of TRIG key will store a reading NOTE The asterisk annunciator turns on to indicate that the data storage operation is enabled It will turn off when the storage process is finished buffer full Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Buffer 6 3 Recall Perform the following steps to view stored readings and buffer statistics 1 Press RECALL The BUFFER annunciator turns on to indicate that stored readings are being displayed The arrow annunciator lt gt also turns on to indicate that additional data is available for viewing 2 As shown in Figure 6 1 use the RANGE and keys and the cursor lt q and gt keys to navigate through the reading numbers reading values and buffer statistics For any of the buffer statistics maximum minimum peak to peak average standard deviation the STAT annunciator is on 3 To return to the normal display press EXIT Figure 6 1 Buffer locations RDG NO 10 Reading Value RDG NO 9 Reading Value RDG NO 8 Reading Value RDG NO 7 Reading Value RDG NO 6 Reading Value RDG NO 5 Reading Value RDG NO 4 Reading Value a RDG NO 3 Reading Value RDG NO 2
89. problems arising from normal wear or failure to follow instructions THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES NEITHER KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ITS INSTRUMENTS AND SOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SUCH EXCLUDED DAM AGES SHALL INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO COSTS OF REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION LOSSES SUSTAINED AS THE RESULT OF INJURY TO ANY PERSON OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY KEITHLEY A GREATER MEASURE OF CONFIDENCE Keithley Instruments Inc Corporate Headquarters 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 www keithley com Belgium Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 www keithley nl China Beijing 8610 82251886 Fax 8610 82251892 www keithley com cn Finland Helsinki 09 5306 6560 Fax 09 5306 6565 www keithley com France Saint Aubin 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26 wwwkeithley fr Germany Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 www keithley de Great Britain Theale 0118 929 7500 Fax 0118 929 7519 www keithley co uk India Banga
90. setting can be checked using the following command SYSTem LFRequency The response message will be 50 or 60 The value 50 indicates that the line frequency is set for 50Hz or 400Hz while 60 indicates that it is set for 60Hz The display of the Model 2182 is primarily used to display readings along with the units and type of measurement Annunciators are located at the top bottom left and right of the reading or display message The annunciators indicate various states of operation See Front panel sum mary presented earlier in this section for a complete listing of display annunciators NOTE The Display and Keys Test allows you to test display digit segments and annunciators and check the functionality of front panel keys These tests are accessed by pressing SHIFT and then TEST Refer to the Model 2182 Service Manual for details Status and error messages Status and error messages are displayed momentarily During operation and programming you will encounter a number of front panel messages Typical messages are either of status or error variety as listed in Appendix B Default settings There are two default setup configurations factory and user As shipped from the factory the Model 2182 powers up to the factory default settings listed in Table 1 2 The Model 2182 can instead be set to power up to a user default setup The power on default setup will be the last configuration you saved The SAVE key saves the prese
91. shown in Figure 5 3 Also connect a trigger link cable Model 8501 from the Model 2182 to the SourceMeter NOTE This procedure assumes that the Model 2182 is using the factory default Trigger Link line configuration Line 1 is VMC output Line 2 is EXT TRIG input Step 2 Return the SourceMeter to BENCH defaults BENCH defaults are restored from the Main Menu which is accessed by pressing MENU MAIN MENU gt SAVESETUP gt GLOBAL gt RESET gt BENCH Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 11 Figure 5 3 Delta measurement connections 8501 Trigger Link Cable SourceMeter Step 3 Configure the trigger model of the SourceMeter The menu structure to configure triggers is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then TRIG Configure the trigger model as follows Arm Layer Arm In Event Arm Out TLink Line Arm Out Events Arm Count Trig Layer Trigger In Trigger In Source Trig In TLink Line Event Detect Bypass Trigger In Events Trigger Out Trig Out TLink Line Trigger Out Events Delay Trig Count IMMEDIATE 3 OFF INFINITE TRIGGER LINK 1 NEVER SOURCE ON DELAY OFF MEAS OFF 2 SOURCE ON DELAY OFF MEAS OFF 000 0000 s 0002 trigger count must equal the number of sweep points Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 12 Ratio and Delta Step 4 Set up t
92. soldered directly to LEMO connector one of two Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 17 Figure 2 9 shows the same test except that a simulated reference junction ice bath is used Figure 2 9 Connections voltage and temperature simulated reference Cable to copper 2107 wire connection Input Cable one of two Thermocouple Test Circuit Ice Bath Cable to thermocouple wire connection one of two Cleaning test circuit connectors Wherever possible copper to copper connections should be used throughout your test circuit s to minimize thermal EMFs However exposed copper is susceptible to oxidation which could corrupt the measurement Make sure that the copper contact surfaces are free of oxidation before making the connection DeoxIT can be used to clean copper connectors A small bottle of DeoxIT is supplied with the Model 2182 The Model 2107 Input Cable is terminated with copper lugs and the connection terminals of a LEMO connector are copper Perform the following steps to clean the copper connectors used in your test circuit 1 Using a lint free foam swab or other applicator soak up a small amount of DeoxIT 2 Apply the DeoxIT sparingly to connector contact Only a thin coating is required NOTE After cleaning make your test circuit connections in a timely manner
93. the beeper use the amp or to key to display OUTSIDE or INSIDE B To disable the beeper use the amp or W to key to display NEVER 3 Press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal display state However limit testing is enabled 4 Ifyou wish to disable limit testing press ON OFF Limit testing is covered in Section 8 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Triggering 7 7 External triggering The EX TRIG key selects triggering from two external sources trigger link and the TRIG key When EX TRIG is pressed the TRIG annunciator lights and dashes are displayed to indicate the instrument is waiting for an external trigger From the front panel press the TRIG key to trigger a single reading Pressing the EX TRIG key again toggles back to continuous triggers The Model 2182 uses two lines of the Trigger Link rear panel connector as External Trigger EXT TRIG input and Voltmeter Complete VMC output The EXT TRIG line allows the Model 2182 to be triggered by other instruments The VMC line allows the Model 2182 to trigger other instruments At the factory line 1 is configured as VMC and line 2 as EXT TRIG Changing this configuration is described in the Model 2182 Service Manual A connector pinout is shown in Figure 7 3 Figure 7 3 Rear panel pinout Rear Panel Pinout 38 7 K6 GY 4G 29 Pin 2 Pin 1 External Voltmeter Trigger Complet
94. to 10 Enable analog output Enable analog output rel Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 Remote Operation Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 2 Remote Operation e Selecting and configuring an interface Explains how to select and configure an interface GPIB or RS 2372 GPIB operation and reference Covers the following GPIB topics GPIB Bus Standards GPIB Bus Connections e Primary Address Selection e QuickBASIC Programming e General Bus Commands Front Panel GPIB Operation e Status Structure e Programming Syntax e RS 232 interface reference Provides basic reference information for the RS 232 interface and explains how to make connections to the computer Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 3 Selecting and configuring an interface Interfaces The Model 2182 Nanovoltmeter supports two built in remote interfaces e GPIB Interface e RS 232 Interface You can use only one interface at a time At the factory the GPIB bus is selected You can select the interface only from the front panel The interface selection is stored in non volatile memory it does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset GPIB interface The GPIB is the IEEE 488 interface
95. 0 Voltage and Temperature Measurements SCPI programming ACAL Front Autozero Autozero LSYNC and Low Charge Injection Table 2 2 SCPI commands ACAL Front Autozero Autozero LSYNC and Low Charge Injection Commands Description Default For ACAL CALibration CALibration Subsystem UNPRotected ACALibration ACAL INITiate Prepare 2182 for ACAL STEP1 Perform full ACAL 100V and 10mV STEP2 Perform low level ACAL 10mV only DONE Exit ACAL see Note TEMPerature Read the internal temperature in C at the time of the last ACAL SENSe SENSe Subsystem TEMPerature RTEMperature Measure the present internal temperature in C For Front Autozero SYSTem SYSTem Subsystem FAZero state lt b gt Enable or disable Front Autozero ON For Autozero SYSTem SYSTem Subsystem AZERo state lt b gt Enable or disable Autozero ON For LYSNC SYSTem SYSTem Subsystem LSYNc state lt b gt Enable or disable line cycle synchronization OFF For Low Charge Injection SENSe VOLTage SENSe Subsystem CHANnel2 LQMode lt b gt Enable or disable Low Charge Injection Mode for OFF Channel 2 see Pumpout current low charge injection mode for details Note After sending DONE the 2182 goes into the idle state An INITiate command is needed to trigger readings see Program Example 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com
96. 0 for details mX b Relative The mX b function can be used to manually establish a relative rel value To do this set the scale factor M to 1 and set the offset B to the rel value Each subsequent reading will be the difference between the actual input and the rel value offset See Relative for more information Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Relative mX b and Percent 4 7 Percent This math function determines percent deviation from a specified reference value The percent calculation is performed as follows Input Reference Percent x 100 Reference where Input is the normal display reading Reference is the user entered constant Percent is the displayed result To configure and control the percent calculation perform the following steps 1 Press SHIFT and then to display the present reference value REF 1 000000 factory default 2 Key ina reference value The lt q and gt keys control cursor position and the amp and W range keys increment and decrement the digit value To change range place the cursor on the multiplier and use the amp and keys m x0 001 x1 K x1000 and M x1 000 000 With the cursor on the polarity sign the amp and W keys toggle polarity 3 Press ENTER The MATH annunciator will turn on and the result of the calculation will be displayed Note that the calculation wil
97. 000 From this binary value bits B4 and B5 of the Standard Event Status Register are set These bits indicate that a device dependent error and command error have occurred The bits of the Standard Event Status Register are described as follows Bit BO Operation Complete A set bit indicates that all pending selected device operations are completed and the Model 2182 is ready to accept new commands This bit only sets in response to the OPC query command Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Query Error QYE A set bit indicates that you attempted to read data from an empty Output Queue Bit B3 Device Dependent Error DDE A set bit indicates that an instrument operation did not execute properly due to some internal condition Bit B4 Execution Error EXE A set bit indicates that the Model 2182 detected an error while trying to execute a command Bit B5 Command Error CME A set bit indicates that a command error has occurred Command errors include JEEE 488 2 syntax error Model 2182 received a message that does not follow the defined syntax of the IEEE 488 2 standard e Semantic error Model 2182 received a command that was misspelled or received an optional IEEE 488 2 command that is not implemented The instrument received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a program message Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Common Commands 12 7 Bit B6
98. 1 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Analog Output 10 3 Overview The ANALOG OUTPUT provides a scaled non inverting voltage output up to 1 2V It is typically used to drive a chart recorder The Analog Output voltage is calculated as follows Analog Output Gain x Rdg Rng Offset where Gain is the user entered gain factor Rdg is the reading on the Model 2182 Rng is the measurement range Offset is the user entered offset value NOTE Gain and offset for Analog Output are not related to gain and offset for the mX b calculation see Section 4 Gain provides amplification for small analog output voltage signals while offset allows you to adjust the analog output to keep it between 1 2V maximum output or reference the voltage output to a specific value such as zero For example assume you are measuring 100mV on the 1V range With gain set to 1 the analog output would be 100mV You can increase analog output sensitivity by setting gain to 10 This increases the analog output to 1V You can then set Offset to 1V to reference the 1 V analog output to zero The Analog Output calculation looks like this Analog Output 10 x 100mV 1V 1V 0V NOTE Analog Output Rel can be used to automatically reference the analog output voltage to zero See Analog output rel The factory default for Gain is and the factory default for Offset is 0 Therefore when using the factory defaults Gain
99. 1 If on DCV2 when Ratio is enabled the state if the REL annunciator will indicate the state of Rel for DC V2 The REL key is operational while in Ratio Pressing REL will either disable Rel for both channels or enable Rel for both channels REL annunciator turns on When Rel is enabled the instrument acquires the input signal from each of the two channels as Rel values Each Rel value is then applied to the respective channel Keep in mind that the Rel operations are performed on the input channels not on the result of Ratio Ranging considerations As explained in Section 3 a separate range setting fixed or AUTO can be used for each voltage channel When Ratio is enabled the range setting for each channel is retained For example Channel 1 could be set for autoranging and Channel 2 could be fixed on the 10V range Range control The manual range keys can only control one of the two channels If the instrument is on DCV1 TEMP1 or TEMP2 when Ratio is enabled the manual range keys will control Channel 1 DCV1 The manual range keys will have no effect on Channel 2 DC V2 If on DCV2 Channel 2 when Ratio is enabled range control will apply to Channel 2 DCV2 The manual range keys will have no effect on Channel 1 DCV1 NOTES When Ratio is selected the range control channel will be displayed while the CH1 CH2 message is being displayed When a range key is pressed the channel number annunciator for the range
100. 1 15 Power p SEQUENCE cetec ccciekiiacdsscessnsieaicesegsiacaped ouster eavencs Panebasiaadasness casos leaasees 1 15 Line frequency sciorr oerion i ean sends EE EREEREER E 1 16 Display senesan neies ree Ea AEA AE E EER Ea Ea 1 16 Status and error MESSAGES sosscssrsiresessesrisesriseirieosiseosiseocisisdistsresrsss essere 1 16 Default SettitigS sssini irinin annaa EERE EE E EEAS NE A Er 1 16 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Measurement OvervieW scrisse sern oiee e E a aE E ENEE ROET 2 3 Voltage measurements eeseesesesesessesssesrstrrsresesrestestetesteetnrestesreresrerenteseneeent 2 3 Temperature measurements ssesessesseeesseetrstersterestertrtestestesesteseeresteseneeseneeee 2 3 Performance considerations esseesesseesssesseserrestrsrerrsrsrestesrnsesrretesestnsesrestereseenerersne 2 5 WaMu Sesdeessecschlaicsvscetaccevcacevscectesadtecducetanes Syedeueecvins sanveesetelactatcns IO 2 5 ACAL calibration cccccccccccsssccceesssscceccesssseeeccesssceeecceecsssseeecesssseeeeeeesseaeees 2 5 AULOZELOINE Modes sise a n civeeapes E R ARA 2 6 LSYNC line cycle synchronization sssesessesessesessesrrsesressssesreseeresreseneesereesss 2 8 Pumpout current low charge injection mode eee eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 9 SCPI programming ACAL Front Autozero Autozero LSYNC and Low Charge Inject oniveciess cssecsetesscscests ccevecccsessih esse cece tunesd coeee svesuepbistalveuness 2 10 Oaia ein CO EEE E
101. 176 TestEquipmentDepot com Digits Range Digits Rate and Filter 3 5 The DIGITS key sets display resolution for the Model 2182 Display resolution for voltage readings can be set from 34 to 7 digits For temperature readings resolution can be set from 4 to 7 digits You can have a separate digits setting for voltage and temperature functions The digits setting for a voltage function applies to the other voltage function For example if you set DCV1 for 5 digits DCV2 will also be set for 5 digits Similarly the digits setting for a temperature function applies to the other temperature function Setting TEMP for 6 digits also sets TEMP2 for 6 digits Digits has no effect on the remote reading format The number of displayed digits does not affect accuracy or speed Those parameters are controlled by the RATE setting Perform the following steps to set display resolution 1 Select the desired function 2 Press the DIGITS key until the desired number of digits is displayed SCPI programming digits Table 3 2 SPCI commands digits Commands Description Default SENSe SENSe Subsystem VOLTage DCVI1 and DCV2 DIGits lt n gt Specify display resolution 4 to 8 8 TEMPerature TEMP and TEMP2 DIGits lt n gt Specify display resolution 4 to 7 6 Programming example digits The following program fragment selects 3 4 digit resolution for voltage readings and 5 4 digit resolution f
102. 176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 2 Ratio and Delta NOTE When using the Model 2182 2182A with the Model 6220 or 6221 Current Source enhanced Delta and Differential Conductance measurements can be performed When using the Model 2182A with the Model 6220 Current Source Pulsed Delta measurements can be performed See Section I for details on enhanced Delta Pulsed Delta and Differential Con ductance Ratio Covers the Ratio calculation and the effects of Filter Rel and Ranging Delta Explains how to perform Delta measurements which are used to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs in the test leads Features the use of a Keithley SourceMeter with the Model 2182 to perform Delta measurements Includes the effects of Filter on Delta measurements SCPI programming Covers the SCPI commands used to control Ratio and Delta and includes programming examples e Applications Provides applications that use Ratio and Delta Ratio Ratio V1 V2 displays the proportional relationship between the two voltage input channels DCV1 and DCV2 Ratio is calculated as follows Ratio V1 V2 Where V1 is the voltage reading for Channel 1 DCV1 V2 is the voltage reading for Channel 2 DCV2 Basic procedure Ratio is selected by pressing the V1 V2 key The CH1 CH2 message appears briefly before displaying the result of the calculation The RA message is displayed while in Ratio Ratio is disabled by selecting
103. 182 is optimized to provide low noise readings when measurement speed is set from 1 to 5 PLC At 1 PLC current can be reversed after 100msec At 5 PLC current can be reversed after 333msec At these reading rates noise induced by the power line should be insignificant Filtering can be used to reduce peak to peak reading variations For more information on Filter in regard to Delta measurements see Filter considerations in this section The following example shows how a bipolar current source and Delta can be used to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs In Figure 5 1A a constant 1mA is being sourced to a 0 102 DUT Under ideal conditions the Model 2182 would measure 100uV across the DUT 1mA x 0 1 100uV However connection points and temperature fluctuations may generate thermal EMFs in the test leads Note that the thermal EMFs drift with temperature Figure 5 1 shows 10uV of thermal EMF Vruerm Therefore the Model 2182 will measure 110uV instead of 100pV V282 Vruerm Vpur 10nV 100uV 110pV Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 7 Figure 5 1 Test circuit using constant current source Vout 100uV Voig2 10uV 100uV 110uV A Positive Current Source VTHERM Vout 100uV Vo1g2 10uV 100uV 90uV B Negative Current Source Figure 5 1B shows what happens when the current is reversed The measuremen
104. 182 oo ee eeeeseeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeaeees 12 15 TST Self Test Query Run self test and read result 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeee 12 15 WAI Wait to Continue Prevent execution of commands until previous commands are completed 0 0 ee ee eeeeeseeeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeeneeeaeees 12 16 13 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands CONFI sre lt PUMCHON gt sissies riii ini ne aa 13 2 FETON get codes Sead aeaaaee a e a aaa a Ea e aaa o e aeaeaie 13 3 READ niere eaaa Ge ane eid ees 13 3 IME ASUre lt CUNCHONS 2 ci ssiess ccc cescasai iceasctsuetaseasdaissodahsetesd essceaceaceadeagecanseataseee 13 4 14 SCPI Reference Tables Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 Additional SCPI Commands DISPlay Subsystem jonesii inso inoia or E RER E E RNE Ri 15 3 TEX T COMM ANS secs che cis seene E a 15 3 FORMat subsystem orriotan ia A i ai 15 4 DATA COMMANG erer aE AAA 15 4 BORDer Command sionin EE EES ees 15 6 SELEMents command sassen E E E ERE 15 6 STATUS SUBSYStOMD s ssaki aeae EE e a a R 15 7 GEVEN command isseire rererere AE AEREE ENESTE SERS 15 7 sENABle command sirrinin EEE ee 15 11 CONDition command ss ssrsesrieciisieniecirceressesderikoe tirer s E ira or EE reaS aa 15 13 PRESet command srest EEE NEE 15 14 QUE c commands ou eeeesceessccessneeessseeceeseecesseeeesseeeessaeeceeaeeessseeeesseeesenes 15 14 SYS Tem subsystem icincirinseeiee ieii ES tee EEEN Ti a aE 15 16 PRESet com
105. 2 CH1 and CH2 ERR FAST FILT HOLD LSTN MATH MED REAR REL REM SCAN SHIFT SLOW SRQ STAT STEP TALK TIMER TRIG 5 Input connector CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 6 Handle Readings being stored in buffer Indicates additional selections are available Beeper on for limit testing Autorange enabled Recalling readings stored in buffer Channel 1 input displayed Channel 2 input displayed Ratio V1 V2 reading displayed Questionable reading or invalid cal step Fast 0 1 PLC reading rate selected Filter enabled Instrument in hold mode Instrument addressed to listen over GPIB mX b or Percent calculation enabled Medium 1 PLC reading rate selected Indicates that Analog Output is on Relative enabled for present measurement function Instrument in GPIB remote mode Scan mode selected Accessing a shifted key Slow 5 PLC reading rate selected Service request over GPIB Displaying buffer statistics Step mode selected Instrument addressed to talk over GPIB bus Timer controlled scans in use External triggering front panel bus or trigger link selected Measure voltage or temperature Volts Ranges 10mV 100mV 1V 10V and 100V Measure voltage or temperature Volts Ranges 100mV 1V and 10V Pull out and rotate to desired position Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started 1 11 Rear panel summary The
106. 2182 to talk PRINT reading Display all buffer readings on CRT Calculate Mean of Buffer Readings CALL SEND 7 calc2 form mean status Select mean calculation CALL SEND 7 calc2 stat on status Enable mean calculation CALL SEND 7 calc2 imm status Perform calculation and request result reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading lengths 7 status Address 2182 to talk PRINT reading Display all buffer readings on CRT Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Triggering Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 7 2 Triggering Trigger model Explains the various components of the front panel trigger model which controls the triggering operations of the instrument e Reading hold Explains the Reading Hold feature which is used to screen out readings that are not within a specified reading window External triggering Explains external triggering which allows the Model 2182 to trigger other instruments and be triggered by other instruments e SCPI programming Covers remote operation for triggering including the GPIB trigger model and the SCPI commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Triggering 7 3 Trigger model NOTE Additional information on measu
107. 22 One shot reading DC volts bus trigger auto ranging H 5 One shot reading DC volts no trigger fastest rate H 5 One shot reading external trigger auto delay enabled H 5 One shot triggering E 4 Options and accessories 1 4 Other Stepping Scanning operations 9 6 OUTPut command summary 14 6 Output trigger 7 5 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Percent 4 7 Performance commands 15 16 Performance considerations 2 5 Power Up 1 14 Power up sequence 1 15 Primary address selection 11 8 Program examples E 2 Pulse Delta I 3 Fixed output I 11 Measurement units I 11 Pumpout current low charge injection mode 2 9 QuickBASIC programming 11 8 Rack mount kits 1 5 Radio frequency interference C 6 Range 3 3 Range Digits Rate and Filter 3 1 Rate 3 6 Ratio 5 2 Ratio and Delta 5 1 Ratio programming example 5 16 Reading hold autosettle 7 6 Rear panel summary 1 11 Recall 6 3 REL Key 4 3 Relative 4 3 Relative mX b and Percent 4 1 Remote Operation 11 1 ROUTe command summary 14 6 RS 232 connections 11 29 RS 232 interface reference 11 27 Safety symbols and terms 1 3 SCPI commands F 10 SCPI programming ACAL Front Autozero Autozero LSYNC and Low Charge Injection 2 10 SCPI programming analog output 10 6 SCPI programming buffer 6 5 SCPI programming digits 3 5 SCPI programming filter 3 12 SCPI programming limits 8 5
108. 28 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Range Digits Rate and Filter Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 3 2 Range Digits Rate and Filter e Range Provides details on measurement range selection for DCV1 and DCV2 Includes the SCPI commands for remote operation e Digits Provides details on selecting display resolution for voltage and temperature measurements Includes the SCPI commands for remote operation e Rate Provides details on reading rate selection Includes the SCPI commands for remote operation e Filter Provides details on Filter configuration and control Includes the SCPI commands for remote operation Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Range Digits Rate and Filter 3 3 Range The selected range affects both accuracy of the voltage measurement as well as the maximum voltage that can be measured The DCV1 function has five measurement ranges 10mV 100mV 1V 10V and 100V The DCV2 function has three measurement ranges 100mV 1V and 10V The range setting fixed or AUTO is remembered by each voltage function NOTE The available voltage ranges for Ratio V1 V2 depend on which channel is presently selected when Ratio is enabled If Channel 1 is presently
109. 31 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Specifications Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2182A Nanovoltmeter Specifications VOLTS SPECIFICATIONS 20 OVER RANGE CONDITIONS 1PLC with 10 reading digital filter or SPLC with 2 reading digital filter ACCURACY ppm of reading ppm of range ppm parts per million e g 10ppm 0 001 TEMPERATURE CHANNEL 1 24 Hour 90 Day 1 Year 2 Year COEFFICIENT RANGE RESOLUTION INPUT RESISTANCE Tear t1 C Toar 5 C Tear 5 C Tear 5 C 0 18 C amp 28 50 C 10 000000 mv 1nV gt 10 GQ 20 4 40 4 50 4 60 4 1 0 5 C 100 00000 mV 10 nV gt 10 GQ 10 3 2543 30 4 4045 1 0 2 C 1 0000000 V 100 nV gt 10 GQ 742 18 2 2542 3243 a 0 1 C 10 000000 V 1 uV gt 10 GQ 2 1 18 2 25 2 32 3 a 0 1 C 100 00000 V 10 nV 10 MQ 1 10 3 2543 3544 5245 1 0 5 C CHANNEL 2 100 00000 mV 10 nV gt 10 GQ 10 6 25 6 30 7 40 7 d prc 1 0000000 V 100 nV gt 10 GQ 7 2 18 2 25 2 32 3 1 0 5 C 10 000000 V 1 uV gt 10 GQ 2 1 18 2 25 2 32 3 1 0 5 C CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 RATIO Ratio accuracy tchannel 2 reading accuracy channel 1 range channel 1 reading accuracy channel 2 range channel 2 reading DELTA hardware triggered coordination with 24XX series or 622X series current sources for low noise R measurement accuracy accuracy of selected Channel range plus accuracy of I source rang
110. 4 Measuring Meas Set bit indicates that the instrument is performing a measurement Bit B5 Trigger Layer Trig Set bit indicates that the instrument is waiting in the Trigger Layer of the Trigger Model Bits B6 and B7 Not used Bit B8 Filter Settled Filt Set bit indicates that the filter has settled Bit B9 Not used Bit B10 Idle Set bit indicates that the instrument is in the idle state Bits B11 through B15 Not used Figure 15 6 Operation event register Bit Position B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B1 BO Event Tai Idle Decimal 1024 Weighting 210 Value st 0 1 1 ag 0 1 0 1 0 1 Value 1 Operation Event Set Events Idle Idle state of the 2182 0 Operation Event Cleared Filt Filter Settled Trig Trigger Layer Meas Measuring Cal Calibrating Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCP Commands 15 11 ENABle command ENABle lt NRf gt STATus MEASurement ENABle lt NRf gt Program Measurement Event Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt NRf gt Program Questionable Event Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle lt NRf gt Program Operation Event Enable Register Parameters lt NRf 0 Clear register lt NRf gt 128 Set bit B7 1 Set bit BO 256 Set bit B8 2 Set bit Bl 512 Set bit B9 4 Set bit B2 1024 Set bit B10 16 Set bit
111. 45Hz to 66Hz or 360Hz to 440Hz Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started 1 13 Cleaning input connectors The two channel LEMO connector on the front panel is used to connect the Model 2182 to external test circuits This connector mates to the LEMO connector on the Model 2107 input cable or to the LEMO connector that is included with the Model 2182 KIT The contacts of the LEMO connectors are made of copper These copper to copper connections minimize thermal EMFs However exposed copper is susceptible to oxidation which could cause measurement errors A small bottle of DeoxIT is supplied with the Model 2182 This fluid is used to remove oxidation from copper Before connecting a LEMO connector to the LEMO input connector on the instrument clean the copper contacts of the connectors as follows 1 Turn off the Model 2182 and at the rear panel disconnect the line cord and any other cables or wires connected to the instrument 2 Stand the Model 2182 on end such that the front panel is facing up 3 Apply one drop of DeoxIT to each of the four contacts of the LEMO input connector on the Model 2182 You can use a clean wire such as a resistor lead to carry a drop of the solution from the bottle of DeoxIT to the connector 4 Wipe off any excess DeoxIT using a clean cloth 5 To clean the contacts of the mating LEMO connector connect and disconnect it to t
112. 6 220 224 230 263 595 614 617 705 740 775 etc side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Carrying case Model 1050 Padded Carrying Case A carrying case for a Model 2182 Includes handles and shoulder strap Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 6 Getting Started Nanovoltmeter features The Model 2182 is a 7 4 digit high performance digital nanovoltmeter It has two input channels to measure voltage and temperature The measurement capabilities of the Model 2182 are explained in Section 2 of this manual see Measurement overview Features of the Model 2182 Nanovoltmeter include Ratio Provides comparison readings between two voltage inputs Ratio performs V1 V2 Delta Provides average difference of Channel 1 inputs Delta performs V1t1 V1t2 2 Enhanced Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance The following tests can be performed when using a Model 2182 2182A with a Model 6220 or 6221 Current Source Delta Uses a square wave output and a 3 point measurement algorithm to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs Pulse Delta 6221 and 2182A only Provides a pulse output and a 3 point or 2 point measurement algorithm for testing of temperature sensitive Device Under Test DUT Differential Conductance Uses a differential current output and a 3 point moving average algorithm to perform differential measurements mX b
113. 67ms 1 60 One 50Hz power line cylce 20ms 1 50 5 With Interval set to 5 PLC power line cycles 60Hz One Pulse Delta cycle 83 33ms 5 60 50Hz One Pulse Delta cycle 100ms 5 50 6 Interval can be set from 5 to 999999 PLC default is 5 PLC The three available sweeps include 1 staircase sweep 2 logarithmic sweep and 3 cus tom sweep Examples of these Sweep outputs are shown in Figure I 6 Staircase sweep Figure I 6A shows an example of a staircase Sweep output The sweep is configured to start high pulses at 2mA and staircase to 10mA in 2mA steps The low pulse level for this sweep is OmA Logarithmic sweep Figure I 6B shows an example of a logarithmic Sweep output The sweep is configured to output five high pulses points The first high pulse starts at 1mA and logarithmically steps to 10mA The low pulse level for this sweep is OmA Custom sweep Figure I 6C shows an example of a custom Sweep output The sweep is configured to output five high pulses points The level for each high pulse is specified by the user The high pulse levels for this output are mA 2mA 4mA 8mA and 16mA The low pulse level for this sweep is OMA Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance I 13 Figure I 6 Pulse sweep output examples A Staircase sweep pulse train 2 to 10mA in 2mA steps Linear Scale Step
114. 7 sens temp rjun rsel sim 0 status Set reference to 70 C CALL SEND 7 sens temp TC K status Set for type K thermocouple CALL SEND 7 unit temp F status Read in F Measure voltage on Channel 1 CALL SEND 7 sens chan 1 status Select Channel 1 CALL SEND 7 sens func volt status Select DCV1 CALL SEND 7 sens data fres status Request a fresh reading reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status Address 2182 to talk PRINT reading Display reading on CRT Measure temperature on Channel 2 CALL SEND 7 sens chan 2 status Select Channel 2 CALL SEND 7 sens func temp status Select TEMP2 CALL SEND 7 sens data fres status Request a fresh reading reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status Address 2182 to talk PRINT reading Display reading on CRT Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 22 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Low level considerations For sensitive measurements external considerations beyond the Model 2182 affect accuracy Effects not noticeable when working with higher voltages are significant in nanovolt signals The Model 2182 reads only the signal received at its input therefore it is important that this signal be properly transmitted from the source T
115. 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 3 Step Scan overview The Model 2182 can step or scan its two input channels or be used with external scanner cards installed in switching mainframes such as Models 707 7001 and 7002 The following paragraphs summarize the various aspects of stepping scanning using the Model 2182 NOTE Step and Scan operations are illustrated by trigger models see Front panel trigger models in this section Internal Stepping Scanning Channels 1 and 2 When stepping or scanning the two input channels of the Model 2182 Channel 2 is selected measured first and then Channel is selected measured For every step scan cycle Channel 2 is measured once and Channel 1 can be measured from 1 to 1023 times Measured readings are automatically stored in the buffer External Stepping Scanning When using external switching cards the switching mainframe controls the opening and closing of individual channels Up to 800 external channels can be stepped scanned and measured by Channel 1 of the Model 2182 Channel 2 cannot be used for external stepping or scanning Measured readings are automatically stored in the buffer To synchronize Model 2182 measurements with external channel closures connect the Trigger Link lines of the nanovoltmeter and switching mainframe Refer to Section 7 Triggering for details and an example on using external trigger
116. 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 8 8 Limits Figure 8 3 Limits to sort 10Q resistors 1 5 and gt 5 Beep Beep Beep No Beep low pitch normal pitch low pitch No Beep 9 5mV 9 9mMV 0 10 1mV 10 5mV LO2 LOI HI1 HI2 Limit 1 1 Limit 2 5 Beeper Mode INSIDE Front panel operation For front panel operation the INSIDE beeper mode must be used A normal pitch beep and the message IN indicates that the resistor is within the 1 tolerance limit see Figure 8 3 This 1 resistor belongs in Bin 1 A low pitch beep and the HI or LO message indicates that the resistor is gt 1 tolerance but lt 5 tolerance This 5 resistor belongs in Bin 2 For resistors gt 5 no beep will sound Place these resistors in Bin 3 Remote operation For remote operation make sure both Limit 1 and Limit 2 are enabled The following table evaluates the three possible pass fail combinations for this application Limit 1 Limit 2 Resistor Bin Result Result Tolerance Assignment Pass Pass 1 1 Fail Pass 5 2 Fail Fail gt 5 3 Keep in mind that a fail condition must be reset before testing the next resistor Fail can be reset manually or automatically see CLEar command in Table 8 1 Nulling thermal EMFs To maximize handling speed quick disconnect test clips are typically used for the resistor connections Unfortunately these c
117. 9 SYSTem command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI SYSTem Sec 15 PRESet Return to SYSTem PRESet defaults FAZero Path to control Front Autozero STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Front Autozero ON STATe Query state of Front Autozero AZERo Path to control Autozero STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Autozero ON STATe Query state of Autozero LSYNc Path to control line cycle synchronization STATe lt b gt Enable or disable line cycle synchronization OFF STATe Query state of line cycle synchronization LFRequency Query the power line frequency setting 50 50 or 400Hz 60 60Hz POSetup lt name gt Select power on setup RST PRESet or SAVO POSetup Query power on setup VERSion Query SCPI revision level vV ERRor Query system error queue see Note CLEar Clear messages from error queue KCLick lt b gt Enable or disable key click feature ON KCLick Query key click status BEEPer Path to control beeper vV STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper for limit tests ON vV STATe Query state of beeper vV KEY lt NRf gt Simulate key press vV KEY Query the last pressed key vV Note Clearing the Error Queue Power up and CLS clears the Error Queue RST SYSTem PRESet and STATus PRE Set have no effect on the Error Queue Table 14 10 TRACe command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI TRACel DATA Us
118. 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com List of Tables 1 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 2 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 4 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 5 Table 5 1 6 Table 6 1 7 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 8 Table 8 1 9 Table 9 1 Getting Started F s tating Si 2c35 esse cheseasces sdendecevcaceescaetesassaceunetenes E EE ATE 1 15 Factory GOLAaults careieni meeer eaaa aae a eniai eooo 1 17 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Measurement channels cesccsscceseeceseeeseeceeeesaeeeaeeseaeceseeececsaceeeeseaeeesaeeeaeensas 2 3 SCPI commands ACAL Front Autozero Autozero LSYNC and Low Charge Injection eceecescesseeseceseeesaeceaceseaeceseeeseeceaeeeseeseateseeeeeaeens 2 10 SCPI commands voltage and temperature measurements cece 2 20 Range Digits Rate and Filter SPCI commands Tan Be sc scccscssesscaciesteassepeeeceedechauesaepvenbhecubdeoneveesseasegesteeceaueenes 3 4 SPCI commands digits saschsiescssecasccsensscanst ousssnesvanasoasestebavenseasagatonesteastooayMeawennes 3 5 SCPI commands Tate s tscccscccasecssteecsesceceavbocesbeestuencbadvienees cibeessensdestacteenipueaneeves 3 7 SCPI commands filter sic cc cistecessasesasisecasceenetuvenedeageeiessdcensaaccansossnabssagteonstarapess 3 12 Rela
119. A Step 10A Stop 50A Delta dl 20uA v 50pA Step 40pA unin Sweep with OpA Delta dl Sweep with 20pA Delta dl Step Y SOWA Step Step Y Start OpA Step 10UA 20pA dV Calculations The following equations are used by the 622x to calculate differential voltage dV dV Calc ADRdgc OULU LLL LY time A A D Rdg B lt dV Calc 1 Ato C i lt dV Calc 4 D to F gt lt dV Calc 2 B to D gt dV Calc 5 E to G dV Calc 3 C to E dV Calc 6 F to H gt To calculate dV points A through H are 2182 2182A voltage measurements A D readings A B 2 C B 2 dV 1 2 o 1 dV 2 Wecyel D C 2 e 1 dV 3 _ C D 2 E D 21 e 1 2 dG and dR Calculations With dl known dl Delta and dV calculated the 622x can then calculate 2 dv 4 dv 5 dv 6 differential conductance dG or differential resistance dR With G units selected readings are calculated as follows dG dl dV With R units selected readings are calculated as follows dR dV dl Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com D E 2 F E 2 i 2 E F 2 G F 2 2 2 1 8 e 1 4 KF GV 2 H Gy2 1 5 l 15 I 16 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Differential Co
120. A 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Example Programs E 5 Generating SRQ on buffer full When your program must wait until the Model 2182 has completed an operation it is more efficient to program the Model 2182 to assert the IEEE 488 SRQ line when it is finished rather than repeatedly serial polling the instrument An IEEE 488 controller will typically address the instrument to talk and then unaddress it each time it performs a serial poll Repeated polling of the Model 2182 will generally reduce its overall reading throughput Therefore use the srq function call The Model 2182 provides a status bit for almost every operation it performs It can be programmed to assert the IEEE 488 SRQ line whenever a status bit becomes true or false The TEEE 488 controller your computer can examine the state of the SRQ line without performing a serial poll thereby detecting when the Model 2182 has completed its task without interrupting it in the process The following example program segment sets up the Model 2182 to assert SRQ when the reading buffer has completely filled and then arms the reading buffer initiates readings and waits for the Model 2182 to indicate that the buffer is full This is not a complete program The commands to configure the trigger model and the reading buffer see the next example are not shown The example shown here can be modified for any event in the Model 2182 status reporting system Reset STATus subsystem not
121. B4 16384 Set bit B14 32 Set bit BS 65535 Set all bits 64 Set bit B6 Description These commands are used to set the contents of the event enable registers see Figure 15 7 Figure 15 8 and Figure 15 9 An ENABle command is sent with the decimal equivalent of the binary value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the appropriate register Each event enable register is used as a mask for events see EVENt for descriptions of events When a bit in an event enable register is cleared 0 the corresponding bit in the event register is masked and thus cannot set the corresponding summary bit of the next register set in the status structure Conversely when a bit in an event enable register is set 1 the correspond ing bit in the event register is unmasked When the unmasked bit in the event register sets the summary bit of the next register set in the status structure will set The decimal weighting of the bits for each event enable register are included in Figure 15 7 Figure 15 8 and Figure 15 9 The sum of the decimal weights of the bits that you wish to set is sent as the parameter lt NRf gt for the appropriate ENABle command For example to set the BFL and RAV bits of the Measurement Event Enable Register send the following command stat meas enab 544 where BFL bit B9 Decimal 512 RAV bit B5 Decimal 32 lt NRf gt 544 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176
122. D Conversion Viti V1t2 Viti 2182 VMC oo ae Y Delta reading available on second VMC When the TRIG key on the SourceMeter is pressed it starts the sweep outputs 1mA and triggers the Model 2182 to start a Delta measurement After the delay period the Model 2182 performs an A D conversion for the V1t1 phase of the Delta measurement and then triggers the SourceMeter to output the second point of the sweep 1mA At this point the Model 2182 does not wait for the return trigger from the SourceMeter to perform the V1t2 phase of the Delta measurement That second trigger from the SourceMeter is ignored After the A D conversion for the V1t2 phase the Delta reading is calculated and displayed If programmed for another sweep the trigger from the Model 2182 to the SourceMeter will again start the sweep to perform another Delta measurement Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 15 Filter considerations The filter configuration for DCV1 is applied separately to each measurement phase V1t1 and V1t2 of the Delta process NOTE The repeating filter cannot be used for Delta measurements When Delta is selected the Filter will automatically switch to the moving filter if the repeating filter was enabled Moving filter After filtering yields a reading for V1t1 an output trigger is sent After filtering yields a reading for V1t2 another output
123. DCV1 for 0 1 PLC fast DCV2 will also be set for 0 1 PLC fast Similarly the rate setting for a temperature function applies to the other temperature function Setting TEMP for 5 PLC slow also sets TEMP2 for 5 PLC slow Front panel RATE selections are explained as follows e 0 1 PLC Selects the fastest front panel integration time Select 0 1 PLC fast if speed is of primary importance at the expense of increased reading noise e 1 PLC Selects a medium integration time Select 1 PLC medium when a compromise between noise performance and speed is acceptable e 5 PLC Selects the slowest front panel integration time Selecting 5 PLC slow provides better noise performance at the expense of speed Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Range Digits Rate and Filter 3 7 NOTE For remote operation the integration time can be set from 0 01 PLC to 60 PLC 50 PLC for 50Hz line power Integration time can instead be set as an aperture time from 166 67usec 200usec for 50Hz to 1 second Perform the following steps to set the integration rate 1 Select the desired function 2 Press the RATE key until the desired number of power line cycles PLC is displayed The appropriate annunciator will turn on FAST MED or SLOW NOTE Pressing the front panel RATE key will enable Autozero if it was off For remote programming the rate commands have no effect
124. Delta Pulse Delta Pulse Delta Reading Reading Reading 1st 2nd Nth 62xx l Source 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A A D A D A D A D A D A D A Cc D F X Z l Low Low High Low Low High Low i Low High Low i ree JTL ai mie oes i preo AL i i ist Pulse Delta 2nd Pulse Delta Nth Pulse Delta Interval Interval Interval 2Y X Z 1st Pulse Delta Reading 2 c Nth Pulse Delta Reading 2E F X Y and Z are the A Ds for the first low high and a Aus 2 Dx 2 second low pulses for the Pulse Delta cycle Where 2nd Pulse Delta Reading In cases where the high pulse will cause heating of the DUT the measurement at the sec ond low pulse could be adversely affected by the heat caused by the high pulse In that case the measurement at the second low pulse can be disabled This does not change the overall timing of the pulse output Eliminating the second low pulse measurement changes the basic calculation to the following Pulse Delta 2Y 2X 2 Where Y is the measurement at the high pulse X is the measurement at the first low pulse Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com I 10 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Pulse Delta calculation example 3 point measurement technique Assume you want to measure the voltage across a low power 1Q DUT The Pulse Delta process will reduce DUT
125. EAA EA staid alnereseetsacens 7 3 Control source and event detection 0 eee seeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeceeaeeseeeaeseeesaeenaes 7 4 De E sacdercveeealsaacecanssevagessen pueeddaaisdueessdhdsestegivSeeks leeagvuens 7 4 DGVICC ACTION psie apei eiT debeseciee E Soe saath E aT a araa Nik 7 5 Outp t TOG BCR sesccrssessesencertaisrssseses cacenasseaca cen sitpasevnes ENNE E NE EEEa Sa 7 5 Reading hold autosettle sosscsiseinnscnecirciinii r n R ii ii 7 6 Hold CXaMPle sinnsear ogeinesa ira a aea ERA ina ara E E ae EENE EEEa 7 6 Extetnal triggering sooren ninie An KNEE Ea EANN setae 7 7 Extemal tiger cece cveidssecavcssaseniedassaseascenssssvsdenas danqavenectagussseadesghbonsedcussbagstteadenpes 7 8 Voltmeter Complete wv css ccesetisccssestee sense veediepevaeesasersciceechbeedbenstesnaleaebeteeerss 7 8 External triggering example i cc cccsissesacsepastcneseepcssecesianesdigessnecseosioansseansoeoueedoes 7 9 External triggering with BNC connections 200 0 cece eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeaees 7 12 SCPI programming triggering oo seeseeseeecceseeeeseentcoeseneceeceeeseeseeesereaeeneesaees 7 13 Trigger model remote Operation 00 eee eee eeeceeesseeeseeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeatens 7 13 Trigger model Operation ee ee cc eeeeseeeeeeseceeceseceeeeseeseeeaeseeeeaeesaeeseeeaeeneeeatens 7 15 Triggering commands vcc cise deceecs Sees seadsestcececevsuds caneecistscuetessseedieueanieeueeeiiens 7 16 Programming example sseccsciccssccasgisenssces ses sesecea
126. ENTER to return to the normal display state Stepping Scanning examples Internal scanning Settings Control Source Immediate timer off Delay Auto Channel 1 Count 4 Reading Count 10 Overview With Channel 1 count set to 4 each scan cycle will measure Channel 2 once and Channel 1 four times for a total of five measurements This sets the Sample Counter in Figure 9 1 to 5 The Reading Count 10 indicates that the five measurement scan will be performed twice This sets the Trigger Counter to 2 A total of 10 measurements will be performed All ten readings will be stored in the buffer Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 9 Operation When the SCAN key is pressed operation proceeds to Device Action where a measurement on Channel 2 is performed The sample counter is decremented to 4 causing operation to loop back to Device Action for a measurement on Channel 1 Operation loops back to Device Action three more times to complete the scan cycle After the scan cycle the trigger counter is decremented to and an output trigger is sent Operation loops back to the control source where it immediately falls through and repeats the five measurement scan An output trigger is again sent and the instrument then goes into the idle state Internal stepping Settings Control Source Immediate timer off Delay Auto Channel 1 Cou
127. Enable buffer SM RST defaults SM Select trigger link SM Enable source bypass SM Output trigger after source SM Trig count 6 SM Source current SM Measure voltage SM Fast measurements SM Current list values SM Turn output on SM Enable list mode SM Start sweep Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 18 Ratio and Delta Applications Calibrating resistor network dividers Ratio can be used to calibrate resistor network dividers The 1 10 divider network in Figure 5 5 is made up of nominal resistances of 1kQ and 10kQ The 1k resistance is the result of the parallel combination of the 2kQ pot and the 2k resistor The pot provides fine tuning of the network Figure 5 5 Calibrating 1 10 divider ImA sie Model 220 Current Source The Keithley Model 220 is used to source a constant current of mA Channel 1 which is used to measure the 1k resistance component of the network should be set to the 1V range 1k 2 x ImA 1V or autorange Channel 2 which is used to measure the 10k resistance component should be set to the 10V range or autorange When Ratio is enabled the Model 2182 will display the result of V1 1V divided by V2 10V _ FiltVl V __ Ratio Fit V2 10V 0 1 The above calculation includes Channel 1 Filter If Filter is not used remove the Filt component from the calculation The
128. FEED SENSel store unprocessed readings TRACe FEED CALCulatel store math processed readings e Select buffer control mode TRACe FEED CONTrol NEVer immediately stop storing readings TRACe FEED CONTrol NEXT start now stop when buffer is full The following example program sets up the Model 2182 to take 20 readings as fast as it can into the buffer and then reads the data back after the buffer has filled Example program to demonstrate the reading buffer For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer S INCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls and put trigger model in IDLE state CALL SEND 7 rst status Reset STATus subsystem not affected by RST CALL SEND 7 Stat pres cls status CALL SEND 7 Stat meas enab 512 status enable BFL CALL SEND 7 sre 1 status enable MSB CALL SEND 7 trig coun 20 status TRACe subsystem is not affected by RST CALL SEND 7 trac poin 20 status CALL SEND 7 trac feed sensl feed cont next status Start everything CALL SEND 7 init statuss Initialize reading while the 2182 is busy taking readings reading SPACES 4000 WaitSRQ IF NOT srq THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SPOLL 7 poll status IF poll AND 64 0 THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SEND 7 Stat meas status CALL ENTER S length 16 status
129. Finland Helsinki e 09 5306 6560 Fax 09 5306 6565 e www keithley com Korea Seoul 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 www keithley com France Saint Aubin 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26 www keithley fr Netherlands Gorinchem 0183 635333 Fax 0183 630821 www keithley nl Germany Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 www keithley de Singapore Singapore 65 6747 9077 Fax 65 6747 2991 www keithley com Great Britain Theale 0118 929 7500 Fax 0118 929 7519 www keithley co uk Sweden Solna 08 509 04 600 Fax 08 655 26 10 www keithley com India Bangalore 91 80 2212 8027 Fax 91 80 2212 8005 www keithley com Taiwan Hsinchu 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 www keithley com tw Copyright 2003 Keithley Instruments Inc Printed in the U S A 3 04 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com
130. For the following two applications the Model 2182 is used to measure voltage and a Keithley SourceMeter Model 2400 2410 or 2420 is used to source a known current s Therefore whether varying the magnetic field or varying the current the actual resistance of the DUT can be calculated using Ohm s Law R V I Thermal EMFs Test leads that connect the Model 2182 to the superconductor sample DUT in a cryostat are typically 30 feet or longer The test lead connections and the wide temperature range from OK at the DUT to the ambient temperature of the lab create substantial thermal EMFs in the test leads The effects of these thermal EMFs must be canceled to achieve accurate voltage measurements To cancel the effects of thermal EMFs the DC current reversal measurement technique must be used This measurement technique requires a source that can provide a bipolar output When using a SourceMeter a custom sweep can be configured to provide a bipolar output By enabling Delta measurements on the Model 2182 the effects of thermal EMFs in the test leads will automatically be canceled during the source measure process For details on the DC current reversal technique see Delta Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 20 Ratio and Delta Superconductor Application 1 fixed current A typical test on a superconductor sample DUT is to vary the magnetic fie
131. I can be particularly troublesome at low signal levels but it can also affect measurements at high levels if the fields are of sufficient magnitude RFI can be caused by steady state sources such as radio or TV signals or some types of electronic equipment microprocessors high speed digital circuits etc or it can result from impulse sources as in the case of arcing in high voltage environments In either case the effect on the measurement can be considerable if enough of the unwanted signal is present RFI can be minimized in several ways The most obvious method is to keep the Model 2182 voltage source and signal leads as far away from the RFI source as possible Additional shielding of the instrument signal leads sources and other measuring instruments will often reduce RFI to an acceptable level In extreme cases a specially constructed screen room may be required to sufficiently attenuate the troublesome signal The Model 2182 digital filter may help to reduce RFI effects in some situations In some cases additional external filtering may also be required Keep in mind however that filtering may have detrimental effects such as increased settling time on the desired signal Ground loops When two or more instruments are connected together care must be taken to avoid unwanted signals caused by ground loops Ground loops usually occur when sensitive instrumentation is connected to other instrumentation with more than one signal r
132. IFC line true for a minimum of 100 Program Fragment CALL INITIALIZE 21 0 Initialize GPIB system sends IFC and set interface card address to 21 LLO local lockout Use the LLO command to prevent local operation of the instrument After the unit receives LLO all its front panel controls except the POWER are inoperative In this state pressing LOCAL will not restore control to the front panel The GTL command restores control to the front panel Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 11 Program Fragment CALL TRANSMIT UNL LISTEN 7 LLO status Lock out front panel CALL TRANSMIT UNL LISTEN 7 GTL status Lock out front panel GTL go to local Use the GTL command to put a remote mode instrument into local mode The GTL command also restores front panel key operation Program Fragment CALL TRANSMIT MTA LISTEN 7 REN status Place 2182 in remote CALL TRANSMIT UNL LISTEN 7 GTL status Place 2182 in local mode DCL device clear Use the DCL command to clear the GPIB interface and return it to a known state Note that the DCL command is not an addressed command so all instruments equipped to implement DCL will do so simultaneously When the Model 2182 receives a DCL command it clears the Input Buffer and Output Queue cancels deferred commands and clears any command that prevents t
133. MTA My Talk Address Assigns the computer as the talker The General Bus Commands are explained as follows REN remote enable The remote enable command is sent to the Model 2182 by the controller to set up the instrument for remote operation Generally the instrument should be placed in the remote mode before you attempt to program it over the bus Simply setting REN true does not actually place the instrument in the remote state You must address the instrument to listen after setting REN true before it goes into remote Note that the instrument does not have to be in remote to be a talker Program Fragment CALL TRANSMIT MTA LISTEN 7 REN status Place Model 2182 in remote turn on REM annunciator Note that all front panel controls except for LOCAL and POWER are inoperative while the instrument is in remote You can restore normal front panel operation by pressing the LOCAL key IFC interface clear The IFC command is sent by the controller to place all instruments on the bus in the local talker listener idle states The initialize routine CALL INITIALIZE uses this command internally The Model 2182 responds to the IFC command by canceling front panel TALK or LSTN lights if the instrument was previously placed in one of those states Note that this command does not affect the status of the instrument settings data and event registers are not changed To send the IFC command the controller must set the
134. Model 2182 will automatically go to Channel I when Delta is selected Delta readings can be stored in the buffer See Section 6 for details on using the buffer Delta cannot be selected if stepping or scanning Reading HOLD cannot be used with Delta Delta measurements by the Model 2182 require the use of an alternating polarity source The source must have external triggering capabilities that are compatible with the external triggering capabilities of the Model 2182 The following procedure shows how to use a Keithley SourceMeter with the Model 2182 to perform Delta measurements Delta measurement procedure using a SourceMeter A Keithley SourceMeter Model 2400 2410 or 2420 can be used as a bipolar source by configuring it to perform a custom sweep In general a custom sweep is made up of number of specified source points To provide current reversal the positive current value s are assigned to the even numbered points and the negative current value s are assigned to the odd numbered points For details on custom sweep see the User s Manual for the SourceMeter Applications that use Delta measurements require either a fixed current or a growing amplitude current When a fixed current is required the SourceMeter can be configured to output a bipolar 2 point custom sweep That sweep can be run a specified number of times or it can run continuously For example if a fixed current of 1mA is required for the test the two bipol
135. NT 1 SAMP COUN CHAN1 LPAS STAT OFF CHAN1 DFIL STAT OFF DC NPLC 0 01 CHAN1 RANG 10 DC DIG 4 READ 1 100 PRINT 1 TRIG DEL 0 PRINT 1 TRIG SOUR PRINT 1 DISP ENAB PRINT 1 INIT SLEEP 1 PRINT 1 FETCH LINE INPUT 1 RDS PRINT RDS PRINT 1 DISP ENAB PRINT 1 SYST AZER Clean up and quit finish CLOSE 1 CLEAR END IMM OFF ON STAT ON Analog filter off Digital filter off NPLC 0 1 10V range 4 digit Reading only Trig count 1 Sample count 100 No trigger delay Immediate trigger No display Send init Wait one second Read query Get data Display data Turn on display Auto zero on Close file Interface clear Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 Bus Overview Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com F 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Introduction The IEEE 488 bus is a communication system between two or more electronic devices A device can be either an instrument or a computer When a computer is used on the bus it serves as a supervisor of the communication exchange between all the devices and is known as the controller Supervision by the controller consists of determining which device will talk and which device will listen As a talker a device will output information and as a listener a device will receive informat
136. OPC are provided in Section 12 SRE lt NRf gt Service Request Enable Program service request enable register SRE Service Request Enable Query Read service request enable register Parameters lt NR O Clears enable register 1 Set MSB bit Bit 0 4 Set EAV bit Bit 2 8 Set QSB bit Bit 3 16 Set MAV bit Bit 4 32 Set ESB Bit 5 128 Set OSB Bit 7 255 Set all bits Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Common Commands 12 13 Description Use the SRE command to program the Service Request Enable Register Send this command with the decimal equivalent of the binary value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the register This register is cleared on power up This enable register is used along with the Status Byte Register to generate service requests SRQ With a bit in the Service Request Enable Register set an SRQ occurs when the corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register is set by an appropriate event For more information on register structure see the information presented earlier in this section The Service Request Enable Register is shown in Figure 12 3 Notice that the decimal weight of each bit is included in the illustration The sum of the decimal weights of the bits that you wish to set is the value that is sent with the SRE command For example to set the ESB and MAV bits of the Service Request Enable Register sen
137. Overview NOTE With the use ofa bi polar current source the Model 2182 can perform basic Delta measurements See Section 5 of this manual for details on basic Delta measure ments This appendix summarizes the enhanced Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance measurement processes that can be performed with the use of the Keithley Model 622x Current Source It does NOT provide the procedures to con figure and perform these measurements Detailed information on all aspects of Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Con ductance operation are provided in the Model 622x Reference Manual Section 5 An abbreviated version of this information is provided in the Model 622x User s Manual Section 5 You can use supplied example software that is available on the Keithley website www keithley com as a learning tool to configure and run Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance With the use of any PC simple mouse clicks on a virtual front panel of the Model 622x are used to control operation For details see Using the example software in Section 10 of the Model 622x Reference Manual Keithley instrumentation requirements Keithley instrumentation requirements for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conduc tance are as follows Models 6220 and 2182 Delta and Differential Conductance measurements Models 6220 and 2182A Delta and Differential Conductance measurements Models 6221 and 2182 Delta and Differ
138. PEAK TO PEAK SOURCE RESISTANCE NOISE ANALOG FILTER DIGITAL FILTER oQ 6nV Off 100 1009 8nV Off 100 1kQ 15 nV Off 100 10kQ 35 nV Off 100 100 kQ 100 nV On 100 1 MQ 350 nV On 100 RKN 6 08 04 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Rev A Page of 3 2182A Nanovoltmeter Specifications Temperature Thermocouples DISPLAYED IN C F OR K ACCURACY BASED ON ITS 90 EXCLUSIVE OF ACCURACY 90 Day 1 Year 23 5 C Relative to Simulated TYPE RANGE RESOLUTION Reference Junction J 200 to 760 C 0 001 C 0 2 C K 200 to 1372 C 0 001 C 0 2 C N 200 to 1300 C 0 001 C 0 2 C a 200 to 400 C 0 001 C 0 2 C E 200 to 1000 C 0 001 C 0 2 C R 0 to 1768 C 0 1 C 0 2 C S 0 to 1768 C 0 1 C 0 2 C B 350 to 1820 C 0 1 C 0 2 C OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS 60HZ 50HZ OPERATION FUNCTION DIGITS READINGS s PLCs DCV Channel 1 15 3 1 2 5 Channel 2 Te 6 1 7 5 Thermocouple 6 5819 18 5 5 1 6 5 18 19 20 45 7 2 1 5 5109 80 20 9 0 1 45161719 115 28 0 0 01 Channel 1 Channel 2 TS 1 5 1 2 5 Ratio 75 2 3 1 7 5 Delta with 24XX 6 518 8 5 5 5 1 Scan 6 51820 20 7 2 1 E A 30 20 9 0 1 4 517 41 28 0 0 01 Delta with 622X 6 5 47 40 1 SYSTEM SPEEDS RANGE CHANGE TIME lt 40 ms lt 50 ms FUNCTION CHANGE TIME lt 45 ms lt 55 ms AUTORANGE TIME lt 60 ms lt 70 ms ASCII READING TO RS 232 19 2K Baud 40
139. Reading Value RANGE RDG NO 1 Reading Value RANGE STD DEV Standard Deviation Value v Average Average Value Peak toPeak Peak to Peak Value Min At XX Minimum Value Max At XX Maximum Value CED Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 6 4 Buffer Buffer statistics NOTE MIN and MAX provides the minimum and maximum readings stored in the buffer It also indicates the buffer location of these readings The Peak to Peak reading is the absolute value of the difference between the MAX and MIN readings It is calculated as follows Peak to Peak IMAX MINI Average is the mean of the buffer readings Mean is calculated as follows where Xj is a stored reading nis the number of stored readings The STD DEV value is the standard deviation of the buffered readings The equation used to calculate the standard deviation is n 2 I 2 DA y jfi l Ds i l n 1 where Xj is a stored reading n is the number of stored readings The Model 2182 uses IEEE 754 floating point format for math calculations Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Buffer SCPI programming buffer Buffer commands are summarized in Table 6 1 TRACe subsystem commands are used to store and recall readings in the buffer and CALCulate2 commands are used to obtain statistics from the buffer data Add
140. Rees H 3 Wat it COGS arire coaeeconsoavccvese EE N ETAT EEEE E H 3 LimitattonS sereis ranir E aR EENE E EEEE AESi H 3 WHE Appropri t ssnsti sdesascoveag ana aN AE ENRERE a TTEA H 3 ESENSe 1 DATA FRESH siioni iea ees H 4 What 1 COGS soies ieaoo E enn REESE E ENNEA OE EA OES RiR H 4 Limitations sssccidecees less sdeuedbuvessdceueieetagl sadivedsoneteatec eectedeesscaurevuseusntetadecsecenteeds H 4 Wen Appropriate ss sssccssslavseassdieeasieiecsoseeanceseiasdeuadecuasscassiouvueduaatessiinecessvedeateas H 4 ESENSe 1 DATA LAT st iiciin ieena H 4 What 1 COGS orree es rrien a E R RE RERS H 4 Limitations oriei ee E NEEE AEAEE AERE H 4 When appropriate 5 iiss scciescceptessscesateddetetascevarcersievnsecetetandendeesserersesesderensvevccaderas H 4 Examples ieir o nar REN EEEE AE EEEE N AEE H 5 One shot reading DC volts no trigger fastest rate eseese H 5 One shot reading DC volts bus trigger auto ranging seeseeeeeeerereerereresee H 5 One shot reading external trigger auto delay enabled o on H 5 l Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance OYETVIE W eina E E EA A S OE I 2 Keithley instrumentation requirements sseessesseessesesseeeesesessersrssessssnsresssersst I 2 Op ration OVerVieW sieren enrian eot sne N U E EEEE EEEE REIES I 3 Test system configurations ssssssesessssssssssessesetsetsstesttssesserseesstsstesesereseseesseeseeseet I 5 Delta measurement process si vseeccivsisestdcevsisesssteesti a i
141. SCPI programming mX b and percent 4 8 SCPI programming range 3 4 SCPI programming rate 3 7 SCPI programming ratio and delta 5 16 SCPI programming relative 4 4 SCPI programming stepping and scanning 9 12 SCPI programming triggering 7 13 SCPI programming voltage and temperature measurements 2 20 SCPI Reference Tables 14 1 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 13 1 Selecting and configuring an interface 11 3 Selecting Delta 5 9 Sending and receiving data 11 27 SENSe command summary 14 7 Setting limit values 8 4 Setting line voltage and replacing fuse 1 15 Shielding C 8 Sorting resistors 8 7 Source resistance noise C 4 SourceMeter 5 10 5 14 9 14 Specifications A 1 Speed vs noise characteristics 3 6 Standard cell comparisons 2 26 Status and Error Messages B 1 Status and error messages 1 16 STATus command summary 14 11 Status structure 11 13 STATus subsystem 15 7 Step Scan configuration 9 7 Step Scan overview 9 3 Stepping and Scanning 9 1 Stepping Scanning controls 9 6 Stepping Scanning examples 9 8 Store 6 2 Storing readings in buffer E 6 SYSTem command summary 14 12 Taking readings using the READ command E 7 Temperature configuration 2 18 Temperature configuration menu 2 18 Temperature only connections 2 15 Test systems I 5 Testing superconductor materials 5 19 Testing switch contacts 2 24 Thermal EMFs 2 22 Thermoelectric generation C 3 Thermoelectric potentials C 2
142. T 2 12 Connection techmiques secrecion nirani oE AEE E E TSS 2 12 Voltage only connections 00 0 eee eeececeseeeseeceeeeseeceaeeseeeceseeeeeceaceeeeseaeessaeeeaeens 2 14 Temperature only connections 0 0 elec ceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeseceeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeeeatens 2 15 Voltage and temperature connections eseseeseseesessesessesrrseerrstesesrestereseseneee 2 16 Cleaning test circuit Connectors oo le eee eeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeseseatens 2 17 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Temperature configuration oo eee eeessecseceseseceeseceeessesseeeseeeaeeseeeaesseesaseeeeaseneeegs 2 18 Measuring voltage and temperature oo eee eee eeeceeeseeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeeeasenseess 2 19 SCPI programming voltage and temperature measurements 00000 2 20 Low level considerations s sc cscececivesscndscdecessegesessseaisbesaseonsrapenetaabsauetsneesenaveaseion 2 22 Thermal EMES seanina a N E N ER enue 2 22 INOIS C2 csssiscsi2s sctacencscess E E A EE 2 22 Applications messinesi vers cedeseec beads iE EN aE A E A IN E REENE ai 2 23 Low resistance measurements eseseeesesrssesreetesreresrerrstesreresrerterestrsesrrsresesees 2 23 Standard cell comparisons 00 ees eeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeseeececaeseeecseeeaesseeeaeseeeeaeenaees 2 26 Heated Zener Reference and Josephson Junction Array comparisons 2 27 Range Digits Rate and Filter RANGE
143. Trigger model remote operation ABOrt RCL 0 START O gt SYST PRES RST Idle and Initiate No Yes INIT IMM or JINIT CONT ON Trigger Signal Another 7y Control Source Event Detection Trigger Source Immediate Trigger Source External Trigger Source Timer Trigger Source Manual Trigger Source BUS c __ Trigger Delay lt n gt Trigger Delay AUTO lt b gt Delay Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Trigger 2 Trigger Count lt n gt Infinite Output Trigger Device Action Another Sample 2 Sample Count lt n gt 7 14 Triggering Idle and initiate The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever operation is at the top of the trigger model As shown in Figure 7 10 initiation needs to be satisfied to take the instrument out of idle While in the idle state the instrument cannot perform any measure or step scan operations The following commands will return operation to the top of the trigger model idle at the START point of the trigger model e ABORt e RCLO e SYSTem PREset e RST What happens next depends on the state of initiation If continuous initiation is already enabled the instrument will leave the idle state SYSTem PRESet enables continuous init
144. Value Can consist of an NRf number or one of the following name parameters DEFault MINimum or MAXimum When the DEFault parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the RST default value When the MINimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the lowest allowable value When the MAXimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the largest allowable value TRIGger TIMer 0 1 Sets timer to 100 msec TRIGger TIMer DEFault Sets timer to 0 1 sec TRIGger TIMer MINimum Sets timer to 1 msec TRIGger TIMer MAXimum Sets timer to 999999 999 sec List Specifies one or more switching channels ROUTe SCAN 1 10 Specify external scan list 1 10 e Angle Brackets lt gt Used to denote a parameter type Do not include the brackets in the program message SENSe HOLD STATe lt b gt The lt b gt indicates that a Boolean type parameter is required Thus to enable the Hold feature you must send the command with the ON or 1 parameter as follows SENSe HOLD STATe ON or 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 23 Query commands The Query command requests the presently programmed status It is identified by the question mark at the end of the fundamental form of the command Most commands have a query form TRIGger TIMer Queries the timer interval Most commands that require a numeric parameter lt n gt
145. acter Excess message characters results in an error STATe lt b gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT STATe lt b gt Control on off message Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable text message 1 or ON Enable text message Description This command enables and disables the text message mode When enabled a defined message is displayed When disabled the message is removed from the display A user defined text message remains displayed only as long as the instrument is in remote Taking the instrument out of remote by pressing the LOCAL key or sending GTL cancels the message and disables the text message mode Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 4 Additional SCPI Commands FORMat subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to select the data format for transferring instrument readings over the bus The BORDer command and DATA command only affect readings transferred from the buffer i e SENSE DATA or CALC DATA are always sent in ASCII These commands are summarized in Table 14 4 DATA command DATA lt type gt FORMat DATA lt type gt Specify data format Parameters lt type gt ASCii ASCII format SREal TEEE754 single precision format DREal TEEE754 double precision format Description This command is used to select the data format for transferring readings over the bus For every reading conversion the data string sent over the bus contains
146. adings k Chan2 Chan2 2 DataCH2 j STR Chan2 CHlpos 0 CHineg 0 FOR i Stepping and Scanning Reading k NumRdgsPerStep 1 TO NumRdgsPerStep 1 CHlpos CHlpos Reading k i CHineg NEXT i Chanl DataCH1 j STRS Chan1 k k NumRdgsPerStep 2 NEXT j Printing results to a file OPEN chanl xls FOR OUTPUT AS 1 OPEN chan2 xls FOR OUTPUT AS 2 FOR i 1 TO CalcReadings NEXT i CLOSE 1 CLOSE 2 CHlpos CHlneg NumRdgsPerStep 1 CHlneg Reading k i NumRdgsPerStep 2 this will place current working this will place current working chanl xls in your directory chan2 xls in your directory PRINT 2 DataCH2 i PRINT 1 DataCH1 i close the chanl xls file close the chan2 xls file Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 19 9 20 Stepping and Scanning Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 10 Analog Output Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 10 2 Analog Output e Overview Covers the capabilities of the Analog Output e Operation Explains how to configure and control the Analog Output e SCPI programming Covers the SCPI commands associated with the Analog Output Test Equipment Depot 800 517 843
147. an external trigger B Pressing STEP on the Model 7001 7002 takes it out of the idle state and places operation at point B in the flowchart C For the first pass through the model the scanner does not wait at point B for a trigger Instead it closes the first channel D After the relay settles the Model 7001 7002 outputs a Channel Ready pulse Since the instrument is programmed to scan eight channels operation loops back up to point B where it waits for an input trigger E amp F Model 2182 operation is at point A waiting for a trigger The output Channel Ready pulse from the Model 7001 7002 triggers the nanovoltmeter to measure DUT 1 point E After the measurement is complete the Model 2182 outputs a completion pulse point F and then loops back to point A where it waits for another input trigger The trigger applied to the Model 7001 7002 from the Model 2182 closes the next channel in the scan This triggers the nanovoltmeter to measure the next DUT The process continues until all eight channels are scanned and measured Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 7 12 Triggering External triggering with BNC connections An adapter cable is available to connect the micro DIN Trigger Link of the Model 2182 to instruments with BNC trigger connections The Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable has a micro DIN connector at one end and two BNC connectors at the other end
148. analog output relative using last reading as Rel value J2 value Enable analog output relative using value 1e 9 to 120 J3 Enable analog output relative EOI Bus Hold off KO Enable EOI enable bus hold off on X K1 Disable EOI enable bus hold off on X Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Model 182 Emulation Commands D 3 Table D 1 Model 182 device dependent command summary cont d Mode Command Description Note K2 Enable EOI disable bus hold off on X K3 Disable EOI disable bus hold off on X Save Recall Setup LO Save current setup as power on L1 Recall factory default setup L2 Recall power on setup SRQ Mask MO Disable SRQ M1 Reading done M2 Buffer half full M4 Buffer full M8 Reading overflow M16 Ready for command M32 Error M128 Ready for trigger Enable Disable NO Enable Filter Filter NI Disable Filter Analog Filter 00 Configure analog filter off Configuration Ol Configure analog filter on Digital Filter PO Configure digital filter off Configuration Pl Configure fast response P2 Configure medium response P3 Configure slow response Trigger Interval Qvalue Interval value in msec 10 to 999999msec Range RO Enable auto range RI 10mV range R2 100mV range R3 1V range R4 10V range R5 100V range R6 NO OP no operation R7 NO OP R8 Disable auto range Integration Period SO Line cycle integration period 7 S1 3msec integra
149. ance process Differential measurements can be used to study the individual slopes of an I V or V I curve By applying a known differential current dI to a device differential voltage dV measurements can be performed With dI and dV known differential conductance dG and differential resistance dR can be calculated This differential measurement process is shown in Figure I 7 The Model 622x is config ured to output a stepped sweep with a specified Delta which is the differential current dI As shown in the illustration Delta is added to and subtracted from each subsequent step in the sweep The solid line in Figure I 7 is the actual output of the Model 622x As shown each differential voltage calculation dV Calc uses the three previous Model 2182 2182A A D measurement conversions Keep in mind that dI Delta is the same for all calculated points With dI known and dV calculated the Model 622x can also calculate display and store the differential conductance dG or differential resistance dR for each calculated point Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Figure I 7 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Differential Conductance measurement process A 70HA 60pA A D Rdg 2182 2182A voltage measurement conversion dV Calc Calculate differential voltage dV using last three A D Rdgs A Step Stop Start OW
150. and error messages Number Description Event 308 Buffer available SE 309 Buffer half full SE 310 Buffer full SE Calibration messages 400 10m vdc zero error EE 401 1 vdc zero error EE 402 10 vdc zero error EE 403 100 vdc zero error EE 404 10 vdc full scale error EE 405 10 vdc full scale error EE 406 100 vdc full scale error EE 408 10 vdc ch2 high zero error EE 409 10 vdc ch2 low zero error EE 410 B_7_div100 ACAL error EE 411 B_0_div100 ACAL error EE 412 B_7_1 ACAL error EE 413 B_0_1 ACAL error EE 414 B_1_1 ACAL error EE 415 B_1_10 ACAL error EE 416 B_0_10 ACAL error EE 417 B_P1_10 ACAL error EE 418 B_P1_100 ACAL error EE 419 B_0_10 ACAL error EE 420 Analog output zero error EE 421 Analog positive gain error EE 422 Analog negative gain error EE 423 B_0_100 ACAL error EE 430 Precal selection error EE 432 ACAL Temperature Error EE 438 Date of calibration not set EE 439 Next date of calibration not set EE 440 Gain aperture correction error EE 449 10 vdc ch2 Low Q zero error EE 500 Calibration data invalid EE 510 Reading buffer data lost EE 511 GPIB address lost EE 512 Power on state lost EE 514 DC calibration data lost EE 515 Calibration dates lost EE 516 Linearity precal lost EE 522 GPIB communication language lost EE Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Number
151. and the following Model 2182 2182A measurement conversions A Ds are made for the first Delta cycle A D A 10 01mV A D B 9 99mV A D C 10 01mV The first Delta reading is calculated as follows Delta eee iy _ j0oimy 2999m 10 01m a 4 E om 4 10mV The 10mV Delta reading effectively cancelled the 101 V EMF to provide a more accurate measurement Measurement units The fundamental measurement for Delta is voltage Volts V However the voltage read ing can converted into a conductance Siemens S resistance Ohms W or power Watts W reading by the Model 622x Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance l 9 Pulse Delta process Pulse Delta measurements For Pulse Delta the Model 6221 outputs current pulses Current pulses that have a short pulse width are ideal to test a low power DUT that is heat sensitive By default Pulse Delta uses a 3 point repeating average algorithm to calculate readings Each Pulse Delta reading is calculated using A D measurements for a low pulse a high pulse and another low pulse The Model 6221 outputs the pulses and the Model 2182A performs the A D measurements As shown in Figure I 4 every three pulses yields a single Pulse Delta voltage reading Figure I 4 Pulse Delta 3 point measurement technique 2182A 2182A 2182A A D A D A D B E Y I Hight Pulse
152. ands IFC interface clear A typical program fragment includes a CALL SEND command and a CALL ENTER command The CALL SEND command sends a program message command string to the Model 2182 If the program message includes a query command then the CALL ENTER command is required to get the response message from the Model 2182 The CALL ENTER command addresses the Model 2182 to talk The following example program fragment demonstrates how CALL SEND and CALL ENTER commands are used Note that the commands assume address 07 which is the factory set address of the Model 2182 CALL SEND 7 rst status CALL SEND 7 read status To display the response message on the CRT the computer has to read the message and then print it to the computer display as follows reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status PRINT reading The following programming example shows how all the above statements are used together SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqgb bi Include QuickBASIC libraries CALL INITIALIZE 21 0 Initialize card as address 21 CALL SEND 7 rst status Restore 2182 to RST defaults CALL SEND 7 read status Trigger and request a reading reading SPACES 80 Allocate room for data CALL ENTER reading length 7 status Address 2182 to talk PRINT reading Display reading on CRT General bus commands Commands and associated statements General
153. ar sweep points for the custom sweep would be 1mA and ImA Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 10 Ratio and Delta When a growing amplitude current is required the custom sweep can be configured to include all the current values required for the test For example assume the test requires two Delta measurements at each of three current levels 1mA 2mA and 5mA That test would require the following 12 point custom sweep to produce the six Delta measurements P0000 1mA P0001 1mA P0002 1mA P0003 1mA P0004 2mA P0005 2mA P0006 2mA P0007 2mA P0008 5mA P0009 5mA P0010 5mA P0011 5mA The following procedure uses the SourceMeter as a bipolar fixed amplitude current source It outputs a 2 point custom sweep to provide current reversal that is required for Delta measurements by the Model 2182 NOTES When using the Model 2182 to perform Delta measurements RATE must be set to 1 PLC or 5 PLC to optimize measurement performance At 1 PLC or 5 PLC Delta measurements will cancel thermal EMFs to a lt SOnV level The SourceMeter SPEED must be set to FAST 0 01 PLC Using a slower speed will result in trigger synchronization problems with the Model 2182 The following procedure assumes SourceMeter firmware version C11 or later Step 1 Connect the Delta measurement test circuit Connect the SourceMeter and Model 2182 to the DUT as
154. arrow key 31 RATE key 16 TEMP2 key 32 EXIT key Description This command is used to simulate front panel key presses For example to select RATIO you can send the following command to simulate pressing the RATIO key isyst key 4 The parameter listing provides the key press code in numeric order Figure 15 10 also illustrates the key press codes The queue for the KEY query command can only hold one key press When KEY is sent over the bus and the Model 2182 is addressed to talk the key press code number for the last key pressed either physically or with KEY is sent to the computer NOTE _ SYST KEY should not be used to put the Model 2182 into the local mode use GTL instead Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCP Commands 15 21 Figure 15 10 Key press codes KEITHILEY et E e 120V MAX TYPE OUTPUT AcuT TCHUPL SHIFT R LEDA DELAY _HOLD BUFFER LIMITS LOCAL X TRIG TRIG TORE RECA VALUE ON OF VALUE ON OFF 12V MAX POWER GPIB__RS232 O Ga O I dD STEP SCAN SA ial RI mi Di R 1 ye ENTER 350V PEAK ANY TERMINAL TO CHASSIS 17 26 19 28 21 30 23 32 15 13 18 27 20 29 22 31 24 14 12 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 22 Additional SCP Commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 84
155. as a path The second level is made up of another path 0PERation and a command PRESet The third path is made up of one command for the OPERation path The three commands in this structure can be executed by sending three separate program messages as follows stat oper enab lt NRf gt stat oper enab stat pres In each of the above program messages the path pointer starts at the root command stat and moves down the command levels until the command is executed Multiple command messages You can send multiple command messages in the same program message as long as they are separated by semicolons The following is an example showing two commands in one program message stat oper stat oper enab lt NRf gt When the above is sent the first command word is recognized as the root command stat When the next colon is detected the path pointer moves down to the next command level and executes the command When the path pointer sees the colon after the semicolon it resets back to the root level and starts over Commands that are on the same command level can be executed without having to retype the entire command path Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt enab After the first command enab is executed the path pointer is at the third command level in the structure Since enab is also on the third level it can be entered without repeating the entire path name Notice that the leading colon for enab is not
156. asure count vV DELay lt n gt Set trigger delay 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 vV AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto delay ON V AUTO Query state of auto delay V DELay Query delay value V TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval for TIMer control source 0 to 0 1 Vv 999999 999 sec TIMer Query timer interval Vv SAMPle Sample Counter COUNt lt n gt Specify sample count 1 to 1024 1 COUNt Query sample count Notes 1 Defaults for continuous initiation SYSTem PRESet enables continuous initiation RST disables continuous initiation 2 Defaults for Trigger Count SYSTem PRESet sets count to INF infinite RST sets count to 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 14 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14 12 UNIT command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI UNIT TEMPerature lt name gt Select temperature units C F or K Cc Vv TEMPerature Query temperature units vV Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 Additional SCPI Commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 2 Additional SCPI Commands e DISPlay subsystem Covers the SCPI commands that are used to control the display e FORMat subsystem Covers the SCPI commands to configure th
157. ate cursor position The cursor can be on a menu item name i e UNITS blinking or on an menu item option i e C blinking Cursor position is controlled by the lt q and gt keys With the cursor on a menu item name you can use the amp or key to scroll through the other menu items Pressing ENTER will select the displayed option and move on to the next menu item or exit if at end of menu With the cursor on a menu item option you can use the amp or W key to display one of the other options for that menu item Pressing ENTER will select the displayed option and move on to the next menu item or exit if at end of menu An exception is the SIM menu item After selecting SIM you will be prompted to enter the simulated temperature Use the arrow keys to display the value and press ENTER Pressing EXIT leaves the menu and returns to the normal display state Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 19 Measuring voltage and temperature NOTES The following procedure assumes factory default conditions see Table 1 2 in Step 1 Section 1 Details on using other settings and front panel operations are provided in Section 3 through Section 8 of this manual Any time the internal temperature of the Model 2182 changes by 1 C or more the 10mV and 100V ranges will need to be calibrated see Performance considerations
158. aximum measurement capability of 120V peak These inputs are protected to 150V peak to any terminal or 350V peak to chassis Channel 2 HI and LO terminals have a maximum measurement capability of 12V peak to Channel 1 LO Channel 2 HI is protected to 150V peak to any terminal Channel 2 LO is protected to 70V peak to Channel 1 LO Both inputs are protected to 350V peak to chassis Step 2 Configure Channel 1 and Channel 2 for voltage measurements Configure each channel DCV1 and DCV2 for the desired voltage measurement Unique settings for each channel include Range Filter and Rel Step 3 Verify on scale readings for DCV1 and DCV2 Verify that DCV1 and DCV2 are displaying on scale readings If an OVRFLW message is displayed for any channel select a higher range until an on scale reading is displayed or press AUTO to enable autoranging Step 4 Select the range control channel If you want the manual range keys to control Channel 1 ranges select press DCV1 just before going into Ratio If you want the manual range keys to control Channel 2 ranges select DCV2 just before going into Ratio For more information see Ranging considerations for Ratio NOTE After Ratio is enabled next step pressing the AUTO range key will either enable autorange for both channels or disable autorange for both channels Step5 Enable Ratio To enable Ratio press the V1 V2 key The CH1 CH2 message will be displayed briefly
159. before us ing the product Refer to the manual for complete product specifications If the product is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the product may be impaired The types of product users are Responsible body is the individual or group responsible for the use and maintenance of equipment for ensuring that the equip ment is operated within its specifications and operating limits and for ensuring that operators are adequately trained Operators use the product for its intended function They must be trained in electrical safety procedures and proper use of the instrument They must be protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits Maintenance personnel perform routine procedures on the product to keep it operating properly for example setting the line voltage or replacing consumable materials Maintenance procedures are described in the manual The procedures explicitly state if the operator may perform them Otherwise they should be performed only by service personnel Service personnel are trained to work on live circuits and perform safe installations and repairs of products Only properly trained service personnel may perform installation and service procedures Keithley products are designed for use with electrical signals that are rated Measurement Category I and Measurement Category II as described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 60664 Most measu
160. can hold up to ten messages Each time you read the queue the oldest message is read and that message is then removed from the queue If the queue becomes full the 350 Queue Overflow message occupies the last memory location in the register On power up the queue is empty When the Error Queue is empty the 0 No error message is placed in the Error Queue The messages in the queue are preceded by a number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages Appendix B lists the messages NOTE The SYSTem ERRor query command performs the same function as the iSTATus QUEue query command see STATus subsystem CLEar command CLEar SYSTem CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This action command is used to clear the Error Queue of messages Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 20 Additional SCP Commands KEY lt NRf gt command KEY SYSTem KEY lt NRf gt Simulate key press Parameters lt NRf 1 SHIFT key lt NRf gt 17 LOCAL key 2 DCV key 18 EX TRIG key 3 DCV2 key 19 TRIG key 4 RATIO key 20 STORE key 5 ACAL key 21 RECALL key 6 FILT key 22 VALUE key 7 RELkey 23 ON OFF key 8 TEMP key 24 left arrow key 9o a 25 10 26 STEP key 11 up arrow key 27 SCAN key 12 AUTO key 28 SAVE 13 down arrow key 29 RESTORE key 14 ENTER key 30 DIGITS key 15 right
161. ccessible 14 4 Carrying case 1 5 Changing function and range E 2 Cleaning input connectors 1 13 Cleaning test circuit connectors 2 17 Command codes F 10 Common Commands 12 1 Common commands F 10 Configure and control analog output 10 5 Connection techniques 2 12 Connections 2 12 Contact information 1 3 Control source and event detection 7 4 Controlling the Model 2182 via the RS 232 COM2 port E 8 Cryostat 5 20 5 23 Custom sweep 5 9 5 21 5 25 Data lines F 4 DC current reversal measurement technique 5 21 5 23 DC current reversal measurement technique 5 19 DC current reversal technique 2 24 5 6 5 8 9 14 Default settings 1 16 Delay 7 4 Delta 5 6 I 3 I 6 Measurement units I 8 Delta measurement procedure using a SourceMeter 5 9 Delta programming example 5 17 Device action 7 5 Differential Conductance I 3 Average Voltage I 18 Calculations I 16 Measurement units I 17 Power I 18 Digital filter 3 8 Digits 3 5 Display 1 16 DISPlay commannd summary 14 5 DISPlay subsystem 15 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Enabling limits 8 4 Example Programs E 1 External Stepping Scanning 9 3 External trigger 7 8 External triggering 7 7 External triggering example 7 9 External triggering with BNC connections 7 12 Filter 3 8 Filter considerations 5 15 Filter Rel and Ranging considerations 5 4 FORMat command summary 14 5 FORMat subsystem 15 4
162. ckup in virtually any low level measurement situation Otherwise interference from such noise sources as line frequency and RF fields can seriously corrupt measurements rendering experimental data virtually useless In order to minimize noise a closed metal shield surrounding the source may be necessary as shown in the example of Figure C 4 This shield should be connected to input LO in most cases although better noise performance may result with the shield connected to chassis ground in some situations WARNING Do not float input LO more than 30V rms 424V peak above earth ground with an exposed shield connected to input LO To avoid a possible shock hazard surround the LO shield with a second safety shield that is insulated from the inner shield Connect this safety shield to safety earth ground using 18 AWG minimum wire before use Figure C 4 Shielding example 2182 Noise Shield Safety Shield Connect noise shield to LO Connect safety shield to a known safety earth ground using 18 AWG wire or higher WARNING Safety shield required when floating noise shield gt 30V rms above chassis ground Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Considerations C 9 Meter loading Loading of the voltage source by the Model 2182 becomes a consideration for high source resistance values As the source resistance increases the error caused by mete
163. commands are those commands such as DCL that have the same general meaning regardless of the instrument Table 11 1 lists the general bus commands along with the programming statement for each command Table 11 1 General bus commands and associated statements Command _ Programming Statement Effect On Model 2182 REN REN Goes into remote when next addressed to listen IFC CALL INITIALIZE Reset interface all devices go into talker and listener idle states LLO LLO LOCAL key locked out GTL GTL Cancel remote restore front panel operation for the 2182 DCL DCL Return all devices to known conditions SDC SDC Returns Model 2182 to known conditions GET GET Initiates a trigger SPE SPD SPOLL Serial Polls the Model 2182 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 10 Remote Operation Transmit A transmit routine is used to send General Bus Commands It contains a series of GPIB commands to be carried out In addition to the commands listed in Table 11 1 there are other commands used in the transmit command string Some of the more frequently used ones are explained as follows refer to the User s Manual for the interface card for details on all the commands UNL Unlisten Disables any listeners that may exist UNT Untalk Disables the current talker if any LISTEN 7 Listen Assigns the device at address 7 2182 to be a listener
164. controlled channel remains on The other channel annunciator turns off for a brief moment The state on or off of the AUTO range annunciator indicates the state enabled or disabled of autorange for the voltage channel that is under range control With Ratio already enabled pressing the AUTO range key will either disable autorange for both channels or enable autorange for both channels AUTO annunciator turns on Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 6 Ratio and Delta Delta Delta provides the measurements and calculation for the DC current reversal technique to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs in the test leads Each Delta reading is calculated from two voltage measurements on Channel 1 one on the positive phase of an alternating current source and one on the negative phase Basic Delta Calculation Delta Vitl V1t2 2 where V 1t1 is the voltage measurement on the positive phase of the current source V 1t2 is the voltage measurement on the negative phase of the current source Delta Calculation using Filter and Rel Delta FiltV1t1 V Rely where e Filt Vitl and Filt V1t2 are filtered voltage measurements on the positive and negative phases of the current source The FILT annunciator will be on when Filter is enabled e Rel V1 is the Rel value established for DCV 1 The REL annunciator will be on when Rel is enabled The Model 2
165. ction Analog filter With the low pass Analog Filter ON the normal mode noise rejection ratio of the instrument is increased at 60Hz This filters out noise induced by the power line The Analog Filter attenuates frequency at 20dB decade starting at 18Hz A primary use of the Analog Filter is to keep the high gain input stage of the Model 2182 from saturating due to the presence of high AC and DC voltage Note however that the filter only attenuates AC voltages for the 10mV range of the Model 2182 The Analog Filter adds approximately 125msec of settling between A D conversions The additional settling time may be required when using a high impedance 100kQ2 source in the test circuit The increased settling time causes the reading rate of the Model 2182 to be greatly reduced Therefore if the Analog Filter is not needed turn it OFF Digital filter The digital filter is used to stabilize noisy measurements The displayed stored or transmitted reading is a windowed average of a number of reading conversions from 1 to 100 Digital filter characteristics In general the digital filter places a specified number of A D conversions Filter Count into a memory stack These A D conversions must occur consecutively within a selected reading window Filter Window The readings in the stack are then averaged to yield a single filtered reading The stack can be filled in two ways Filter Type moving or repeating The moving filter keep
166. d accessed from SHIFT SETUP External scanning channels 8 no timer 8 readings accessed from SHIFT CONFIG External triggers accessed from EX TRIG Model 7001 or 7002 Factory defaults restored Scan list 1 1 1 8 Number of scans 1 Channel spacing TrigLink To run the test and store readings in the Model 2182 with the unit set for external triggers press STEP or SCAN The Model 2182 waits with the asterisk annunciator lit for an external trigger from the Model 7001 7002 Press STEP on the Model 7001 7002 to take it out of idle and start the scan The scanner s output pulse triggers the Model 2182 to take a reading store it and send a trigger pulse The following explanation on operation is referenced to the operation model shown in Figure 7 8 Figure 7 8 Operation model for triggering example 7001or 7002 Press STEP to start scan 2182 Idle Idle h a Bypass Wait for Trigger Link K 4 Wait for Trigger kas es Be Trigger Link Trigger h V y l Scan Make Channel l Measurement l l l AA Tri i Trigger Output 2882 L18861 Output Trigger Trigger Scanned Channels Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Triggering 7 11 A Pressing EX TRIG then STEP or SCAN on the Model 2182 places it at point A in the flowchart where it is waiting for
167. d Shoeeteasucol Secasyees 11 3 Interface selection and configuration procedures sssseesseesesreresresesersreees 11 4 GPIB operation and reference sesesessesesessesesessrsrssesresrerestesenesrrsrnrsrrsrsresreseneee 11 6 GPIB Dus Standards isinisi einate a ia aiia 11 6 GPIB DUS Connections 060 csescosssesesetesscsessscnesnsesncsesssencvesetavsevasesesassetensoees 11 6 Primary address selection csi dscecssctasiedsascss chissivaesascctvascadeeceesvacneceaveussceseseasties 11 8 QuickBASIC programming 00 0 ceceescceseeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeaees 11 8 General DUS COMMANAS i sc cccessssesdesssierescessssenesccotescosavtassedsevssosssssedeosesdoess 11 9 Front panel GPIB operation 0 0 eeeescsseeesseceseeeeseeeneeceaeeeaeceaeeesaeeeaeeeeaeees 11 12 OLALUSSITUCLUNE biisecs SacelicsssvediiescSesdettevescsnevtevtyiegustasesecvenetocrosdiesestesessevanvevaes 11 13 Programming syntax 0 eeeceesceseecsecceseeeececececeeeceeecsaeceeeeseeeeteeeeeeseeeseeeeeas 11 21 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com RS 232 interface referen eaen a cece casubeseveves vessesusdecdedsoectaeteeee 11 27 Sending and receiving data ssseseisvaresseceisscesascoasecousevecseeacsveraveasesuadatateaesnseetes 11 27 Baud rate flow control and terminator ccccccsssccceeesseeeceessssseeeeeessnee 11 27 RS 232 COMMECUOMS sic cecsscheis sacevtfecseal sheesansbenacesee
168. d set of commands to control every programmable aspect of an instrument GPIB bus connections To connect the Model 2182 to the GPIB bus use a cable equipped with standard IEEE 488 connectors as shown in Figure 11 1 Figure 11 1 IEEE 488 connector To allow many parallel connections to one instrument stack the connector Two screws are located on each connector to ensure that connections remain secure Current standards call for metric threads which are identified with dark colored screws Earlier versions had different screws which were silver colored Do not use these types of connectors on the Model 2182 because it is designed for metric threads Figure 11 2 shows a typical connecting scheme for a multi unit test system Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 7 Figure 11 2 IEEE 488 connections Instrument Instrument Instrument Controller To avoid possible mechanical damage stack no more than three connectors on any one unit NOTE To minimize interference caused by electromagnetic radiation use only shielded IEEE 488 cables Available shielded cables from Keithley are Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 To connect the Model 2182 to the IEEE 488 bus follow these steps 1 Line up the cable connector with the connector located on the rear panel The connector is designed so that it will fit only one way Figure 11 3 shows the locati
169. d the following command SRE 48 Where ESB bit B5 Decimal 32 MAV bit B4 Decimal 16 lt NRf gt 48 The contents of the Service Request Enable Register can be read using the SRE query command Figure 12 3 Service request enable register Bit Position B7 B6 BS B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Event OSB ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB sht 128 32 16 8 4 1 Decimal Weighting 7 a ea a3 o3 20 noT ee Value 1 Enable Service Events OSB Operation Summary Bit Request Event ESB Event Summary Bit 0 Disable Mask MAV Message Available Service Request Event QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 14 Common Commands STB Status Byte Query Read status byte register Description Use the STB query command to acquire the value in decimal of the Status Byte Register The Status Byte Register is shown in Figure 12 4 The binary equivalent of the decimal value determines which bits in the register are set All bits except Bit B6 in this register are set by other event registers and queues Bit 6 sets when one or more enabled conditions occur The STB query command does not clear the status byte register This register can only be cleared by clearing the related registers and queues For example f
170. ded as follows Analog Output Gain x 1 2 x Rdg Rng Offset Ratio Analog Output can be used with Ratio When enabled the analog output voltage is scaled to a Ratio value of 1 That is the analog output will be 1V for a Ratio result of 1 If for example the Ratio is 0 4 analog output voltage will be 0 4V Gain Offset and Analog Output Rel can also be used However the maximum analog output is 1 2V Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Analog Output 10 5 Operation Analog output connections The analog output is accessed from the rear panel BNC connector that is labeled ANALOG OUTPUT This connector requires a cable that is terminated with a standard male BNC connector Output resistance The output resistance of Analog Output is 1kQ 5 To minimize the effects of loading the input resistance of the device connected to Analog Output should be as high as possible For example with a device with an input resistance of 1OMQ the error due to loading will be approximately 0 01 Configure and control analog output 1 Press SHIFT and then AOUT to display the Gain M factor M 1 0000000 factory default 2 Gain can be set from 100e6 to 100e6 The lt q and gt keys control cursor position and the A and range keys increment and decrement the digit value To change range place the cursor on the multiplier and use the amp and W keys m
171. diately External trigger After the internal scan is configured pressing the EX TRIG key places the instrument in the external trigger mode When the SCAN key is pressed the internal scan is enabled However it doesn t start until an external trig ger is received or the TRIG key is pressed After the trigger occurs operation drops down to the Delay block Delay If a delay auto or manual is being used operation will hold up at this block until the delay period expires Device action Measurements are performed at this block The first measurement is performed on Channel 2 of the Model 2182 Subsequent measurements are performed on Channel 1 Note that every reading is automatically stored in the buffer Sample counter For each scan cycle Channel 2 is measured once and Channel 1 is measured a specified number of times Therefore the sample count is the sum of those two values CH1 COUNT 1 Operation will continue to loop back to Delay and Device Action until all the sample readings are taken Output trigger After the last Channel 1 measurement is performed an output trigger is applied to the rear panel Trigger Link connector Trigger counter The value of this counter determines how many scan cycles will be performed If configured for another scan operation will loop back to the control source for another pass through the trigger model Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melro
172. dress commands s ssssessssssesssessessesstsstsstsstsstesstssesstsssesstssteseessresteseesstesees F 9 Wnaddr ss command wassie erii eniten one on Ee ECEE E RS F 9 Common commands 2 0 eeececeseeeseeeeceeseeceaeeeseeceaeessneceseeeeeeceaeeeseeseaeeeteeenaeens F 10 SCPLCOMMANA S eseese e eaa iir E EE T iiai SE F 10 Command COdeS 00 eeeceescessecssceeseecescesceceacessceceaeesseeceaeeeeeceaeeeseeceaeeeeeeeeaeens F 10 Typical command Sequences scrissi ceisir sikei eiras F 11 IEEE command groups ou ccecccesccsssecssceeseecesceesceceaeesseeceseeeeeceaceeeeceaeessaeeeaeens F 12 Interface function codes smssetissieoii iieiea a E E E ER OERE F 13 G IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information TithOGUCHOM sancs Rio A EEE a A aR iS EN ENE G 2 H Measurement Queries FETON erin eeg nee S EE EEE AE H 2 Whatit doeg reines aesae E N O ety eas tasks EE eee H 2 Linta OMS ereen vic scatcevesedevescaiesseievetssipsiseecaisd a04 s0e6a vanined Ea Ee ETE E R e Eo ECEE H 2 Where Appropriate sies ssonoresesirieo eein eniron oE EE EEE NERE H 2 READ cuzs sincest vase a a R a E E ea H 2 Whatit does sescssceestvevsavezscusciei intan a R O E a EE EE E H 2 Metta beat OMS E A A E TT H 3 When appropriate i520 i cdesicsevesssss eeceisecscuiestauvacsacsencetbescedvedearecoscausces cud vevsteialens H 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com MEASure lt funcetion gt ssc didistieiectientee vinci EE
173. dundant readings will help provide this assurance Once stability has been achieved the actual voltage difference between the cells is measured For each comparison several readings are usually averaged This process of comparing is then repeated each week month or year depending upon the standards laboratory The results can then be plotted and compared over time Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 27 Heated Zener Reference and Josephson Junction Array comparisons The performance of a Heated Zener Reference can be analyzed by comparing it to a Josephson Junction JJ Array using both channels of the Model 2182 In a cryogenic environment the JJ Array provides an output voltage in precise stable 175uV steps The test circuit for this application is shown in Figure 2 14 The JJ Array is adjusted until Channel 1 of the Model 2182 measures OV 10pV The null condition indicates that the Heated Zener Reference voltage is the same as the JJ Array voltage Channel 2 of the Model 2182 is used to determine the exact step that the JJ Array is on Channel 1 can then be monitored to study noise and drift characteristics of the Heated Zener Reference Figure 2 14 Heated Zener characterization Ee Josephson Junction Array Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2
174. e DELTA measurement noise with 6220 or 6221 Typical 3nVRMS VHz 10mV range 1 Hz achieved with 1PLC delay lms RPT filter 23 20 if 50Hz PULSE MODE with 6221 line synchronized voltage measurements within current pulses from 50us to 12ms pulse repetition rate up to 12 Hz Pulse measurement noise typical RMS noise Rpur lt 10 ohms 0 009ppm of range meas_time Vpulse_avg_count 3nV 2 meas_time pulse_avg_count for 10mV range 0 0028ppm for the 100mV range 0 0016ppm for ranges 1V and above 8nV VHz for ranges above 10mV meas_time sec pulsewidth pulse_meas_delay in 33us incr DC NOISE PERFORMANCE DC NOISE EXPRESSED IN VOLTS PEAK TO PEAK Response time time required for reading to be settled within noise levels from a stepped input 60Hz operation CHANNEL 1 RANGE RESPONSE TIME NPLC FILTER 10mV 100mV 1V 10V 100V NMRR CMRR 25 0 5 75 6nV 20 nV 75 nV 750 nV 75 uV 110 dB 140 dB 4 0s 5 10 15 nV 50 nV 150 nV 1 5 pV 75 uV 100 dB 140 dB 1 0s 1 18 25 nV 175 nV 600 nV 2 5 uV 100 pV 95 dB 140 dB 667 ms 1 10 or 5 2 35 nV 250 nV 650 nV 3 3 uV 150 pV 90 dB 140 dB 60 ms 1 Off 70 nV 300 nV 700 nV 6 6 uV 300 uV 60 dB 140 dB CHANNEL 2 25 0 5 75 150 nV 200 nV 750 nV z 110 dB 140 dB 4 0s 5 10 P 150 nV 200 nV 1 5 pV 100 dB 140 dB 1 0s 1 10 or 5 2 gt 175 nV 400 nV 2 5 uV 5 90 dB 140 dB 85 ms 1 Off z 425 nV luv 9 5 uV 60 dB 140 dB VOLTAGE NOISE VS SOURCE RESISTANCE DC NOISE EXPRESSED IN VOLTS
175. e Input Output Pin Number Description 1 Voltmeter Complete Output External Trigger Input No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Signal Ground ON DH A UUN Signal Ground Either pin 3 or 5 may be configured as an output instead of pin 1 Either pin 4 or 6 may be configured as an input instead of pin 2 See the Model 2182 Service Manual for details Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 7 8 Triggering External trigger The EXT TRIG input requires a falling edge TTL compatible pulse with the specifications shown in Figure 7 4 In general external triggers can be used to control measure operations For the Model 2182 to respond to external triggers the trigger model must be configured for it Figure 7 4 Trigger link input pulse specifications EXT TRIG Triggers on Leading Edge TTL High 2V 5V TTL Low lt 0 8V lt 2us SP Minimum Voltmeter complete The VMC output provides a TTL compatible output pulse that can be used to trigger other instruments The specifications for this trigger pulse are shown in Figure 7 5 Typically you would want the Model 2182 to output a trigger after the settling time of each measurement Figure 7 5 Trigger link output pulse specifications VMC Meter Complete TTL High 3 4V Typical TTL Low 0 25V Typical lt J 1 Ops _ gt Minimum Test Equi
176. e MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Common Commands 12 11 NOTE The following commands take a long time to process and may benefit from using OPC or OPC RST and SYST PRES RCL and SAV CALC2 IMM and CALC2 IMM Only when performing the standard deviation cal culation on a large buffer RS 232 operation can also benefit from OPC Comments 1 Resets the Model 2182 to default operating conditions 2 Disables continuous initiation and aborts operation Places 2182 in the idle state 3 Configures the Model 2182 to perform five measurements 4 Performs an immediate initiation INITiate to restart the measurement process and sends the OPC command After all five measurements are performed and the instrument has returned to the idle state an ASCII 1 will be placed in the Output Queue 5 Addresses the Model 2182 to talk This sends the 1 from the Output Queue to the computer 6 Displays the 1 on the monitor 7 Resets the Model 2182 to default operating conditions RCL Recall Return to setup stored in memory Parameters lt NRf gt 0 Description Use this command to return the Model 2182 to the configuration stored in memory The SAV command is used to store the setup configuration in memory location Only one setup configuration can be saved and recalled The Model 2182 ships from the factory with SYSTen PRESet defaults loaded into the available setup memory If a recall error
177. e TRACe or DATA as root command see Note Sec 6 V DATA Read the contents of the buffer data store Vv CLEar Clear readings from buffer FREE Query bytes available and bytes in use vV POINts lt n gt Specify size of buffer 2 to 1024 vV POINts Query buffer size vV FEED lt name gt Select source of readings for buffer SENSe 1 v CALCulate 1 or NONE CONTrol lt name gt Select buffer control mode NEXT or NEVer vV CONTrol Query buffer control mode vV FEED Query source of readings for buffer vV Note SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on the commands in this subsystem Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI Reference Tables 14 13 Table 14 11 Trigger command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI Sec 7 INITiate Path to Initiate measurement cycle s Vv IMMediate Initiate one cycle Vv CONTinuous lt b gt Enable or disable continuous initiation see Note 1 Vv CONTinuous Query state of continuous initiation Vv ABORt Reset trigger system goes to idle state V TRIGger Path to configure Trigger Layer V SEQuence 1 v SOURce lt name gt Select control source IMMediate TIMer MANual IMMediate vV BUS or EXTernal SOURce Query control source vV SIGNal Loop around control source V COUNt lt n gt Set measure count 1 to 9999 or INF see Note 2 vV COUNt Query me
178. e 8 1 a0 5V reading will sound the beeper at its normal pitch a 1 5V reading will sound the beeper at a lower pitch and for a 2 5V reading the beeper will not sound NOTE To use the Limit 2 test the INSIDE beeper mode must be selected With NEVER or OUTSIDE selected Limit 2 is in effect disabled Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 8 4 Limits Setting limit values Use the following steps to enter high and low limit values 1 Press the Limits VALUE key to view the present HI1 limit value HI1 1 000000 default 2 To change the HI1 limit use the cursor keys lt and P gt and the manual range keys Aand Y to display the desired value Move the cursor to the rightmost position and use the Aand W keys to move the decimal point Note that with the cursor on the polarity sign pressing Aor W toggles the polarity of the value 3 Press ENTER to view the present LO limit value LO1 1 000000 default 4 Enter the desired value for this low limit 5 Press ENTER to view the present HI2 limit value HI2 2 000000 default 6 Enter the desired value for this high limit 7 Press ENTER to view the present LO2 limit value LO2 2 000000 default 8 Enter the desired value for this low limit and press ENTER to return to the normal display Enabling limits Use the following procedure to turn on the limits operation 1 Press the Limit
179. e IEEE 488 bus Changing function and range The Model 2182 has independent range control for each of its two voltage measurement functions This means for example that autorange can be turned on for DCV1 while leaving it off for DCV2 Another difference is in the parameter to the range command In other instruments a single number was used to denote each range The parameter of the SCPI RANGe command is given as the maximum value to measure The instrument interprets this parameter and goes to the appropriate range When you query the range with RANGe the instrument sends back the full scale value of its present range The following example program illustrates changing function and range It sets the range for several functions and then takes readings on each of those functions Note that the Model 2182 rounds the range parameter to an integer before choosing the appropriate range Sending SENSe VOLTage CHANnel1l RANGe 20 45 will set Channel 1 of the Model 2182 to the 100V range Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Example Programs Example program to demonstrate changing voltage function and range taking readings on DCV1 and DCV2 For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer INCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0
180. e format for read ings that are sent over the bus e STATus subsystem Covers the SCPI commands to configure and control the status registers e SYSTem subsystem Covers miscellaneous SCPI commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCPI Commands 15 3 DISPlay subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to control the display of the Model 2182 and are summarized in Table 14 3 ENABle lt b gt DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Control display circuitry Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable display circuitry 1 or ON Enable display circuitry Description This command is used to enable and disable the front panel display circuitry When disabled the instrument operates at a higher speed While disabled the display is frozen All front panel controls except LOCAL are disabled Normal display operation can be resumed by using the ENABle command to enable the display or by putting the Model 2182 into local mode press LOCAL TEXT commands DATA lt a gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT DATA lt a gt Define message for display Parameter lt a gt ASCII characters for the message maximum of 12 characters The characters 66 99 must be enclosed in either double quotes or single quotes Description These commands define the text message for display A message can be as long as 12 characters A space counts as a char
181. e the instrument on the 3mV range and short the end of the connecting cable nearest the measured source first disconnect the cable from the source to avoid shorting out the source After allowing the reading to settle press the front panel REL button to null the offset Select the appropriate range and make your measurement as usual If the offset voltage varies the DC current reversal technique should be used instead of REL The DC current reversal technique requires a source that can output currents equal in magnitude but opposite in polarity In general a voltage measurement is performed on both the positive and negative alternations of the current source The averaged difference of those two readings cancels the thermal EMF component of the measurements The Model 2182 can automatically perform the measurements and calculate and display the result by using the Delta measurement mode See Delta in Section 5 for details Source resistance noise Noise present in the source resistance is often the limiting factor in the ultimate resolution and accuracy of Model 2182 measurements The paragraphs below discuss the generation of Johnson noise as well as ways to minimize such noise Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Considerations C 5 Johnson noise equation The amount of noise present in a given resistance is defined by the Johnson noise equation as foll
182. ed acquires a new rel value Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Relative mX b and Percent 4 5 Programming examples relative Program Example 1 This program fragment shows how to null out zero offset for the DCV1 function Be sure to short the Channel 1 input CALL SEND 7 syst pres status Selects DCV1 and enables autorange CALL SEND 7 fetch status Fetches Channel 1 offset reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status Gets offset reading CALL SEND 7 sens volt ref acq status Acquires Rel Value CALL SEND 7 sens volt ref stat on status Enables relative for DCV1 Program Example 2 This program fragment shows how to establish a 1 V baseline for the DCV1 function For this baseline value a 1 V input will be displayed as OV CALL SEND 7 syst pres status Selects DCVI function and enables autorange CALL SEND 7 sens volt ref 1 status Sets a 1V rel value CALL SEND 7 sens volt ref stat on status Enables relative for DCV1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 4 6 Relative mX b and Percent mX b and percent mX b This math operation manipulates normal display readings X mathematically according to the following calculation Y mX b where
183. ed to talk the coded result is sent from the Output Queue to the computer A returned value of zero 0 indicates that the test passed and a value of one 1 indicates that the test failed Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 16 Common Commands WAI Wait to Continue Prevent execution of commands until previous commands are completed Description Two types of device commands exist e Sequential commands A command whose operations are allowed to finish before the next command is executed e Overlapped commands A command that allows the execution of subsequent commands while device operations of the Overlapped command are still in progress Use the WAI command to suspend the execution of subsequent commands until the device operations of all previous Overlapped commands are finished The WAI command is not needed for Sequential commands The Model 2182 has three overlapped commands e INITiate e INITiate CONTinuous ON e TRG NOTE See OPC OPC and TRG for more information The INITiate commands remove the Model 2182 from the idle state The device operations of INITiate are not considered complete until the Model 2182 returns to idle By sending the WAI command after the INITiate command all subsequent commands will not execute until the Model 2182 goes back into idle The TRG command issues a bus trigger that could be used to prov
184. eeeseeeeeceseeeeeeeeneeeeneeeaees 9 11 Waveform to be programmed into Model 2400 0 0 eeceeeceesceceseeeseeceseeeeeeeeaees 9 14 Setup of Model 2182 and Model 2400 ooo eee cece eseeeeeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeeeens 9 15 Remote Operation TEBE 488 CONNECTION coires ren oren rar a ARETE RE EET SEE 11 6 TEEE 488 connections cessccsesccacesdeeesdacvestendesevacescadesstevedeuvedeveeceusecdanecuasesadveuters 11 7 TEEE 488 connector location eeescesccesseceseeeeeeesceseaeceseeesaeceaeeesaeceeeeeeeeeaees 11 7 Model 2182 status model Structure 0 eee esceeeseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeceeeeteeeeae 11 14 Standard event Status oo ceeceeecceseccssceeseceseecseeeseeceaeesseeeeaeesseeesaeeeeeeseeeeseeeeas 11 16 Operation event status ioneina en aen oaecas eaten E TE ESA 11 16 Measurement event status sesesessessesseseessesstesetsstsssssstsstsstssesseessrssesseesese 11 17 Questionable event Status c cccccccsssssccccessssssecceeessssceeceessseeeeeeesssseeeeeeesseaees 11 17 Status byte and service request oo eee eeeeseeeeeeseeeeeescesseeseeesecaeeeaeeseeeaeseeeaes 11 19 RS 232 interface CONMECON ccsss veoseesesereesedeigessecsesvareonevagheveqncevsaeatensecaveceesss 11 29 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 15 Figure 15 1 Figure 15 2 Figure 15 3 Figure 15 4 Figure 15 5 Figure 15 6 Figure 15 7 Figure 15
185. eiei a ods EE EEE I 6 Pulse Delta Proces Sanae eee earar Ea eee o ESE ats Ie i AEE DERSE EE ETAREN I 9 Pulse Delta measurement insumi ienesis iin EEEE I 9 Pulse Delta Outputs onisecsesisseorsersrecrsosisricorssccesrerdesoresesnteb rsson siensensodsiosicosusir I 11 Differential Conductance process ccsccessseeseceseeseseeeseeceaeeececeaeeeseeeeaeeeeeesneeeaeers I 14 Differential Conductance calculations essesssessesseseseeseseseererreresesrsesseseessee I 16 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com List of Illustrations 1 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 3 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 5 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Getting Started Mod l 2182 front panel sisne aE a E i oia 1 7 Model 2182 rear panel 0 eeseescceseeceseeeseeesseesseeceaeeesaeceaeeeaecsaeeeseeseaeesseeeeaeens 1 11 Power mod le nsure nen enea ie iin des Bad eee aaa 1 14 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Line cycle SyncChromization sissies ina e a 2 8 Model 2107 inp t Cable j ccsscezeesisengecbassloxsdesessvacenesscdecens anteveaban sseansebeaeeseasegs 2 13 LEMO connector terminal identi
186. electing and configuring an interface located at the beginning of this section Baud rate The baud rate is the rate at which the Model 2182 and the programming terminal communicate Choose one of the following available rates 19 2k e 9600 4800 e 2400 e 1200 e 600 e 300 The factory selected baud rate is 9600 Make sure that the programming terminal that you are connecting to the Model 2182 can support the baud rate you selected Both the Model 2182 and the other device must be configured for the same baud rate To select a baud rate follow these steps Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 28 Remote Operation Flow control signal handshaking Signal handshaking between the controller and the instrument allows the two devices to communicate to each other regarding being ready or not ready to receive data The Model 2182 does not support hardware handshaking flow control Software flow control is in the form of X__ON and X__OFF characters and is enabled when XonXoFF is selected from the RS232 FLOW menu When the input queue of the Model 2182 becomes more than 3 4 full the instrument issues an X_OFF command The control program should respond to this and stop sending characters until the Model 2182 issues the X_ON which it will do once its input buffer has dropped below half full The Model 2182 recognizes X_ON and X_OFF sent from the controller
187. en OUTPUT a second time The message AOUT REL OFF will be displayed briefly See Section 10 Analog Output for more information on Analog Output Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 4 4 Relative mX b and Percent SCPI programming relative Table 4 1 SCPI commands relative Commands Description Default For DCVI and DCV2 SENSe SENSe Subsystem VOLTage Volts function CHANnel1 Channel 1 DCV1 REFerence lt n gt Specify rel value 120 to 120 volts 0 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable relative OFF ACQuire Use input signal as rel value gt CHANnel2 Channel 2 DCV2 REFerence lt n gt Specify rel value 12 to 12 volts 0 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable relative OFF ACQuire Use input signal as rel value For TEMP1 and TEMP2 SENSe SENSe Subsystem TEMPerature Temperature function CHANnel1 Channel 1 TEMP1 REFerence lt n gt Specify rel value 273 to 1800 0 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable relative OFF ACQuire Use input signal as rel value CHANnel2 Channel 2 TEMP2 REFerence lt n gt Specify rel value 273 to 1800 0 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable relative OFF ACQuire Use input signal as rel value For Analog Output OUTPut OUTPut Subsystem RELative lt b gt Enabling ON relative uses the analog output voltage as OFF the rel value Sending ON with rel already enabl
188. enabled or disabled from the front panel by pressing SHIFT then LOCAL POSetup lt name gt command POSetup lt name gt SYSTem POSetup lt name gt Program power on defaults Parameters lt name gt RST Select RST defaults on power up PRESet Select SYSTem PRESet defaults on power up SAVO Select saved defaults on power up Description This command is used to select the power on defaults With RST selected the instrument powers up to the RST default conditions With PRES selected the instrument powers up to the SYStem PRESet default conditions Default conditions are listed in the SCPI tables Table 14 1 through Table 14 12 With the SAVO parameter selected the instrument powers on to the setup that is saved in the specified location using the SAV command Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCP Commands 15 19 VERSion command VERSion 2 SYSTem VERSion Read SCPI version Description This query command is used to read the version of the SCPI standard being used by the Model 2182 Example code 1991 0 The above response message indicates the version of the SCPI standard ERRor command ERRor SYSTem ERRor Read Error Queue Description As error and status messages occur they are placed in the Error Queue This query command is used to read those messages The Error Queue is a first in first out FIFO register that
189. ent Event AGE oF Stans B15 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 Bo Enable Register Byte Register See Figure 11 9 BFL Buffer Full HL High Limit amp Logical AND BHF Buffer Half Full LL Low Limi OR Logical OR BAV Buffer Available ROF Reading Overflow RAV Reading Available Figure 11 8 Questionable event status ACAL Cal EE Temp ES Questionable B15 B14 B10 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Condition Register B ACAL Cal Temp Questionable Event B15 B14 B10 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Register amp To Questionable ACAL Cal Temp Questionable Event Summary Bit QSB B15 B814 B10 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 B0 Enable Register of Status Byte Register See Figure 11 9 ACAL ACAL Summary amp Logical AND Cal Calibration Summary OR Logical OR Temp Temperature Summary Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 18 Remote Operation Queues The Model 2182 uses two queues which are first in first out FIFO registers e Output Queue Used to hold reading and response messages Error Queue Used to hold error and status messages The Model 2182 status model Figure 11 4 shows how the two queues are structured with the other registers Output queue The output q
190. ential Conductance measurements Models 6221 and 2182A Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance measure ments NOTE The firmware version of the Model 2182 must be A10 or higher The firmware version of the Model 2182A must be C01 or higher Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance l 3 Operation overview The Model 6220 or 6221 Current Source can be used with a Model 2182 2182A Nanovolt meter to perform Delta and Differential Conductance The Model 2182A 6221 combina tion can also perform Pulse Delta These operations use a delta current reversal technique to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs The Model 622x provides a bipolar output current and the Model 2182 2182A performs A D conversions measurements at source high and source low points An averaging algo rithm is then used to calculate the delta reading Delta The Model 622x provides a square wave current output and the Model 2182 2182A performs A D conversions measurements at each high and low output level A 3 point moving average algorithm is used to calculate Delta readings As shown in Figure I 1A the first three Model 2182 2182A A D conversions measure ments yields the first Delta reading Each subsequent Model 2182 2182A A D conversion then yields a single Delta reading Every Delta reading uses the three previous A Ds to cal culate De
191. epted the data byte The previous sequence is used to transfer both data talk and listen addresses as well as multiline commands The state of the ATN line determines whether the data bus contains data addresses or commands as described in the following paragraphs Bus commands The instrument may be given a number of special bus commands through the IEEE 488 interface The following paragraphs briefly describe the purpose of the bus commands which are grouped into the following three categories 1 Uniline commands Sent by setting the associated bus lines true For example to assert REN Remote Enable the REN line would be set low true 2 Multiline commands General bus commands which are sent over the data lines with the ATN line true low 3 Common commands Commands that are common to all devices on the bus sent with ATN high false 4 SCPI commands Commands that are particular to each device on the bus sent with ATN false These bus commands and their general purpose are summarized in Table F 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 Bus Overview Table F 1 IEEE 488 bus command summary Command State of type Command ATN line Comments Uniline REN Remote Enable X Set up devices for remote operation EOI X Marks end of transmission IFC Interface Clear X Clears interface ATN Attention Low Defines data bus conte
192. er than the Min value Timer The maximum timer interval is 99H 99M 99 999S Hour Minute Second format Reading Count This indicates the total number of measurements that will be performed for each step scan cycle For example if Min is set to 1 and Max is set to 10 the Reading Count will automatically set to 10 For each additional step scan cycle simply add 10 to the Reading Count Therefore to perform three step scan cycles set the Reading Count to 30 Reading Count can be set from 2 to 1024 Perform the following steps to configure external stepping or scanning 1 Press SHIFT and then CONFIG Use the gt key to display the present SCANNING type INTernal or EXTernal Press the amp or W key to display EXT and press ENTER The minimum channel MIN CHAN to step scan is displayed Use the edit keys lt q P A and W to specify the Min channel and press ENTER The maximum channel MAX CHAN is then displayed Use the edit keys to specify the Max channel and press ENTER The present state of the timer is displayed OFF or ON Press amp or to display the desired timer state and press ENTER If you turned the timer on the timer interval will be displayed Use the edit keys lt q P gt A and W to set the timer interval and press ENTER The Present Reading Count RNG CNT is displayed It will be Max Min 1 If you wish to increase the Reading Count use the edit keys to display the value and press
193. eration Keithley 622x Keithley ae on 2182 2182A ti t Trigger Link Current Source Nanovoltmeter B PC control of 6220 21 IEEE 488 or Ethernet 6221 Keithley 622x Keithley minor BO null modem 2182 2182A Ch 1 arnet 652l RS 232 On Trigger Link Current Source Nanovoltmeter Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com l 6 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Delta measurement process The Delta process is shown in Figure I 3 As shown three Model 2182 2182A A D conversions are performed to yield a single Delta reading When Delta starts three Model 2182 2182A A Ds A B and C are performed and the Delta reading is calculated After the Ist Delta cycle the moving average technique is then used As shown a Delta reading is yielded for every subsequent Model 2182 2182A A D The new A D replaces the oldest A D in the Delta calculation Figure I 3 Delta measurement technique 2182 2182A 2182 2182A 2182 2182A A D A A DC A D E lt 1st Delta Cycle 2nd Delta Cycle gt I High 622x ume l Source 4th LOW hiteni E 2182 i 2182 2182 2182A i 2182A 2182A ADB ADD ADF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 i r4 3rd Delta Cycle y i _ 4th Delta Cycle 1st Delta Reading Goes 1 3rd Delta Reading C2 8
194. ererrerersesrrsresestes 4 8 Ratio and Delta Ratio ssie asrorini saeir a e E E TEA NEE E E e 5 2 Basic procedure serrurier eerie r ier e Eaa SERESA Er REEE EEES 5 2 Filter Rel and Ranging considerations sseseeseseeseeeeresresesresresrstrsreresreseeresrs 5 4 Delfa sssr estss r rania rora E ar E EE E ENEE ERES 5 6 Selecting Delta n inrireriesrtii cirneiste ra e E E p E REEE 5 9 Delta measurement procedure using a SourceMeter sseseeeessereersreerereerereeee 5 9 Filter c nsiderationS oireisiin iaia ei iR iii 5 15 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI programming ratio and delta wo eee eaeeceeseeeeeeseceeeceecneesseeeaeseeseaeeneeeaees 5 16 Progtamming examples ceisiccesiscsscisenseeaisdesassceasrascava aaeedesesuaves sagen sseoees vous veeasens 5 16 Applications ceisscsevesecicvercectedeecicccveasteg totes i an EEE EREE ONAE 5 18 Testing superconductor materials cee eeceeeceeeseeeseeseeeeeeseesseeeeeaeeseeeatens 5 19 6 Buffer B tfer operations sos isccucescesideads iior irese eiriaa EAE E E R NE ER 6 2 STOTE rororo urarea EEEE EE erar a ea aa aaen aT 6 2 RECA E E E E E E ETE E E E 6 3 Buller statistics esiri eiiiai a NE ia E AET E Aai 6 4 SCPI programming buffer soirmcrssississoires tirsipo ik ieren aei ansar 6 5 Progr mming example saesson eiiiai eona 6 6 7 Triggering Trigger model osinieinireieo esi ii i A ENE aE A TAE Ei aN 7 3 MANS A E
195. esacevens eire ienr ea sk E En A AIEE G 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 2 Getting Started NOTE This User s Manual supports both the Models 2182 and 2182A References to the Model 2182 apply to both the Models 2182 and 2182A References to the Model 2182 2182A apply to the Model 2182 with firmaware ver sion A10 or higher and the Model 2182A with firmware version C01 or higher References to the Model 2182A applies to the Model 2182A with firmware version C01 or higher General information Covers general information that includes warranty information contact information safety symbols and terms inspection and available options and accessories Nanovoltmeter features Summarizes the features of the Model 2182 Front and rear panel familiarization Summarizes the controls and connectors of the instrument Cleaning input connector terminals Explains how to clean the contacts of the input LEMO connectors Power Up Covers line power connection line voltage setting fuse replacement and the power up sequence Display Provides information about the display of the Model 2182 Default settings Covers the tw
196. ese commands follows the table The Ref column in the table provides reference for this information Table 10 2 SCPI commands analog output OFFSet lt NRf gt Specify offset B 1 2 to 1 2 STATe lt b gt RELative lt b gt Enable or disable Analog Output Enable or disable Analog Output Relative Commands Description Ref Default OUTPut OUTPut Subsystem GAIN lt NRf gt Specify gain factor M le 9 to 1e6 ADS gt SSos Reference A GAIN and OFFSet Gain and offset changes do not take affect until the next reading is triggered B STATe OFF 0 forces analog output to OV immediately ON 1 does not take effect until next reading is triggered C RELative Sending ON 1 while Rel is enabled acquires a new Rel value Programming example The following program fragment assumes that you are using analog output to monitor a lmV signal on the 10mV range Analog output gain is set to 10 to increase sensitivity Therefore 1mV will result in a 1V analog output Finally Analog Output Rel is enabled to reference the 1V analog output to zero CALL SEND CALL SEND CALL SEND CALL SEND CALL SEND 7 7 7 7 7 Me syst pres status sens volt rang 0 01 status routp gain 10 status soutp on status soutp rel on status Restore System Preset defaults Select 10mV range Set analog output gain
197. est Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com C 6 Measurement Considerations Magnetic fields When a conductor loop cuts through magnetic lines of force a very small current is generated This phenomenon will frequently cause unwanted signals to occur in the test leads of a test system If the conductor has sufficient length or cross sectional area even weak magnetic fields such as those of the earth can create sufficient signals to affect low level measurements Three ways to reduce these effects are 1 reduce the lengths of the connecting cables 2 minimize the exposed circuit area and 3 change the orientation of the leads or cables In extreme cases magnetic shielding may be required Special metal with high permeability at low flux densities such as mu metal are effective at reducing these effects Even when the conductor is stationary magnetically induced signals may still be a problem Fields can be produced by various sources such as the AC power line voltage Large inductors such as power transformers can generate substantial magnetic fields so care must be taken to keep the Model 2182 voltage source and connecting cables a good distance away from these potential noise sources Radio frequency interference RFI Radio Frequency Interference is a general term used to describe electromagnetic interference over a wide range of frequencies across the spectrum Such RF
198. est Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Table of Contents Getting Started General information scicccisccecis duiees han tbe ches isteagebadeedia see papeonedvasaaeanseiagadeadacaacenedecdoasteans 1 3 Warranty mLOrmatlon sissie iniii i a aait 1 3 Contact iMLOPMAtON s cesscecedsedesseceeadssacecanssenagerses ia EEN Eara EEn RT iE Eea Eaa Tina 1 3 Safety symbols and terms 0 ese ssseseesceseeeeceseseeseentsceseneeserseeesersonesereeeeneees 1 3 INSPECTION iriserai eea e E each censttpas dunes E NE E E E E 1 3 Options and ACCESSOTIES ic sse chessasticeiasseedaseves sees evsesasveeuadensdsresseuceabeaceovseusenas 1 4 Nanovoltmeter features c2 22 isedsctssseaciasasctenotsaasecnancnaessdionoteeceoaasneresasteoustenaesdens 1 6 Front and rear panel familiarization eee eeseeeeeeeeseceseeeeeeseceeeeaeseeeeseeeaeeaeeneees 1 7 Front panel summary bcc sesiaseeinsescacosastsnsatenssepaceusesvunecbaddsenessdaaaeasdesassanensceviceanas 1 7 Rear panel summary 0 i ccsccsiedsotedl ied cece dae ceheeenieieted i ai 1 11 Cleaning input COMMECCOLS c2c cccsisescaicdennseesusssoaseceapsesessecestaeesassecsdecenseoansbecasoee 1 13 Power Up cronometri AEE edd dedblai ee aa ENE eee 1 14 Line power connection oc csieee senses cacensetancicenseteadevaeatnssdoacasenavesaadeaiadessiaeaseeateeds 1 14 Setting line voltage and replacing fuse oe eee eeeeseeeeetaeceeeeseeeeeeaeeneeeaes
199. et upper HI2 limit 100e6 to 100e6 2 LOWer lt n gt Set lower LO2 limit 100e6 to 100e6 2 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 2 test OFF FAIL Query test result 0 pass 1 fail 1 CLEar Path to clear fail indication 2 MMediate Clear fail indication AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear ON IMMediate Re perform limit tests 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 8 6 Limits NOTES 1 The fail message 0 for a limit test indicates that the reading is outside the specified limits 2 With auto clear enabled the fail message 0 is cleared when the instrument goes back into the idle state If programmed not to go back into idle you can manually clear the fail condition by sending the CLEar IMMediate command With auto clear disabled the fail condition will have to be cleared manually 3 When not in a continuous measurement mode waiting for a trigger you can change the limits and re test the last reading After changing the limits send CALCulate3 IMMediate to re perform the limit tests on the last reading Note that sending IMMediate does not initiate trigger a reading It simply repeats the limit tests on the last reading Programming example The following program fragment performs limit tests on a voltage input to Channel 1 Configure 2182 for one shot DCV1 measurements CALL
200. eturn path such as power line ground As shown in Figure C 2 the resulting ground loop causes current to flow through the Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Considerations C 7 instrument LO signal leads and then back through power line ground This circulating current develops a small but undesirable voltage between the LO terminals of the two instruments This voltage will be added to the source voltage affecting the accuracy of the measurement Figure C 2 Power line ground loops Signal Leads Instrument 1 Instrument 2 Instrument 3 Loop i y Current Power Line Ground Figure C 3 shows how to connect several instruments together to eliminate this type of ground loop problem Here only one instrument is connected to power line ground Ground loops are not normally a problem with instruments like the Model 2182 that have isolated LO terminals However all instruments in the test setup may not be designed in this manner When in doubt consult the manual for all instrumentation in the test setup Figure C 3 Eliminating ground loops Instrument 1 Instrument 2 Instrument 3 Power Line Ground Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com C 8 Measurement Considerations Shielding Proper shielding of all signal paths and sources being measured is important to minimize noise pi
201. even when T10X is sent to disable all triggers 9 U Commands e UL For the Model 2182 the U1 error status word only supports the IDDC Invalid Device Dependent Command error bit 0 the IDDCO Invalid Device Dependent Command Option error bit 2 and the Uncalibrated Error bit 8 All other bits remain at zero e U2 The Model 2182 uses two processors while the Model 182 uses three processors Therefore the U2 command will be formatted to only provide revision levels for the Front Panel Processor and the Main Processor 10 U11 and U14 Not supported 11 V Commands The V1 command is not supported 12 Z Commands For the Model 2182 Z1 uses the last reading as the Rel value whereas the Z1 command for the Model 182 uses the next reading as the Rel value The Z3 command simply enables reading relative and uses the present Rel value Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com D 6 Model 182 Emulation Commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Example Programs Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com E 2 Example Programs Program examples All examples presume QuickBASIC version 4 5 or higher and a CEC IEEE 488 interface card with CEC driver version 2 11 or higher with the Model 2182 at address 7 on th
202. f the trigger controls causes the instrument to arm itself for triggers The SCPI trigger model implemented in the Model 2182 gives e Explicit control over the trigger source the TRIGger subsystem e A way for completely disabling triggers Changing any of the settings in the TRIGger subsystem does not automatically arm the Model 2182 for triggers The following program sets up the Model 2182 to take one reading each time it receives an external trigger pulse Example program to demonstrate one shot external triggering For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer INCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls and put trigger model in IDLE state CALL SEND 7 rst status CALL SEND 7 trig sour ext coun inf status start everything CALL SEND 7 init status After the Model 2182 receives the INITiate command it stops at the control source in the trigger model waiting for a trigger pulse Each time a pulse arrives at the Trigger Link connector the Model 2182 takes one reading Because TRIGger COUNt has been set to INFinity the instrument never enters the idle state You can send the ABORt command to put the instrument in the idle state disabling triggers until another INITiate command is sent Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose M
203. fication cece eeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeaes 2 13 Connections single channel Voltage oo ee eeeeeeseceseeneeeseeseceeeeseeeseeseeeaeaes 2 14 Connections dual channel voltage 0 cee eeseeeseceseeeseeceeeeeeeceaeeeseeseaeeeeeeeeaeees 2 15 Connections temperature internal reference le ee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 2 15 Connections temperature simulated reference eee ee eeeeseeseeeseeeeeeseeees 2 16 Connections voltage and temperature internal reference eee eee 2 16 Connections voltage and temperature simulated reference 0 0 eee 2 17 4 Wire low resistance measurement technique sce eeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeaeees 2 23 Measuring switch Contact resistance 0 0 eseeeeeseeseeseceeeeseeececaeeeseeseeeeesaeeneeeaes 2 24 Measuring switch contact resistance and temperature eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 25 Standard cell comparison measurements ee eeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeteeetaeeneeeees 2 26 Heated Zener characterization 0 ee eeeeeeeseeseeseesseesecseeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeseseeesseeneeeaes 2 27 Range Digits Rate and Filter Speed vs noise Characteristics cece ceseeseceseeseceseesecesecseesseeseesseeseeeseeseeeaeeaeens 3 6 Moving and repeating filters ee eeeeseeseeeseceeeeseceeeaeeeecaeseeecaesseesaeeeaeaes 3 10 Ratio and Delta Test circuit using Constant current SOULCE o0 eee eect eeeeseceeeeeeeeseceeeeseeseeeaeeseeenees 5 7 Delta measurement using bipolar s
204. following example shows the response message for a program message that contains four single item query commands 0 1 1 0 Response message terminator RMT Each response is terminated with an LF line feed and EOI end or identify The following example shows how a multiple response message is terminated 0 1 1 0 lt RMT gt Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 27 Message exchange protocol Two rules summarize the message exchange protocol Rule 1 Always tell the Model 2182 what to send to the computer The following two steps must always be performed to send information from the instrument to the computer 1 Send the appropriate query command s in a program message 2 Address the Model 2182 to talk Rule 2 The complete response message must be received by the computer before another program message can be sent to the Model 2182 RS 232 interface reference Sending and receiving data The RS 232 interface transfers data using eight data bits one stop bit and no parity Make sure the controller you connect to the Model 2182 also uses these settings You can break data transmissions by sending a C or X character string to the controller This clears any pending operation and discards any pending output Baud rate flow control and terminator NOTE The procedure to select and configure the RS 232 interface is provided in S
205. gedaicazenacendeboesednasdanesvera EE iT EEr ien 9 8 Internal steppi g secrecions eiai ta e N iaa ANE i 9 9 External scanninE sissien tarse rien dangere aae e Er aR Eai 9 10 SCPI programming stepping and scanning eseseeeseseessetssrsrrsrsrrsrrrrsrrsrrsesrrsreseee 9 12 Programming example se cssscssardhessaparsacerasssscsesssstaastevisedsastassevesasveantsneencseasenaves 9 13 Application I V curves using internal scan seseseeeeseeeeresresesrrerrsrerrsreresresreees 9 14 SCAN for IV curves Measure V sweep I constant H magnetic field or T temper t re rosrisiirorisiriinriiitorerrii eisen E E EEA h 9 14 Analog Output OVETVIEW a seccecisecseds Leteeecethstveudhepennad NEEE EEN EE dade a EE EEEE RNE 10 3 POAT ONL sess ces sisese csttpoeleaessteastenebsaissdiaesvagecencisaadoeoussuoapedoapiasesdasactanestnieatandes 10 5 Analog output connections ooo eee eeeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeesceeaeeseeeaeseeeeaeeneeeaeeeaes 10 5 Configure and control analog output oo eee eee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceetaeeneeeseeeees 10 5 Analog output Telaris i p K a iE 10 5 SCPI programming analog Output sssseessseessseesessesrersrrstsrrstssesrrsrerrsresresesrrsresest 10 6 Programing CXAMPIS nossoinosirciisiiiniiiiii iiia 10 6 Remote Operation Selecting and configuring an interface esessesessesesseersesrrsresesresteresresrssesrrsreseet 11 3 Interfaces sassis aa ea aa a a Ee aea aE e 11 3 Eiaa nE tean E A E E sstdeasusesioseceabesssuistae
206. he Model 2182 several times to spread the DeoxIT around NOTE To minimize the accumulation of oxides on LEMO contacts always keep the LEMO input connectors mated whenever possible However cleaning should still be performed after an extended period of time Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 14 Getting Started Power Up Line power connection Perform the following procedure to connect the Model 2182 to line power and turn on the instrument 1 Check to be sure the line voltage setting on the power module see Figure 1 3 is correct for the operating voltage in your area If not refer to the next procedure Setting line voltage and replacing fuse on page 1 15 CAUTION Operating the instrument on an incorrect line voltage may cause damage to the instrument possibly voiding the warranty 2 Before plugging in the power cord make sure the front panel power switch is in the off 0 position 3 Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to the AC receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet WARNING _ The power cord supplied with the Model 2182 contains a separate ground wire for use with grounded outlets When proper connections are made instrument chassis is connected to power line ground through the ground wire in the power cord Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in personal injury or death
207. he LLO Local Lockout command is in effect the LOCAL key is also inoperative Status structure See Figure 11 4 for the Model 2182 s status structure Instrument events such as errors are monitored and manipulated by four status register sets Notice that these status register sets feed directly into the Status Byte Register More detailed illustrations of these register sets are provided in Figure 11 5 through Figure 11 9 NOTE The status structures registers are configured and controlled by STATus Subsystem commands see Section 15 and Common Commands see ESE ESR SRE and STB in Section 12 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 14 Remote Operation Figure 11 4 Model 2182 status model structure Questionable Questionable Questionable Event Condition Event Enable Register Register Register Logical OR 7 E 3 z 7 2 z IT S068 Error Queue Always Zero Output Queue Service Status Request Byte Enable Standard Register Register Standard Event MSB Event Status 1 Status Enable EAV Register Register QSB Operation Complete MAV ESB Query Error RQS MSS Device Specific Error Execution Error STB Command Error User Request Logical Master Summary Status MSS
208. he SourceMeter to source current and measure voltage A B On the SourceMeter select Source I and Measure V Select an appropriate current source range For example if your current reversal values are going to 1mA select the 1mA source range Press SPEED and select FAST SourceMeter measurements are not used in this test but it must run as fast as possible to avoid synchronization problems with the Model 2182 Step5 Configure the SourceMeter to perform a 2 point custom sweep A The menu to configure a sweep is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then SWEEP From the menu select TYPE and then select CUSTOM Set the POINTS to two and set ADJUST POINTS P0000 and P0001 to the positive and negative current source values For example if the test requires lmA set P0000 to 1mA and set P0001 to 1mA Also from the sweep configuration menu specify the number of 2 point sweeps to perform Selecting INFINITE allows the SourceMeter to continuously source the current reversal sweep Select FINITE if you wish to perform a specific number of 2 point sweeps Step6 Return the Model 2182 to FACTory defaults Return the nanovoltmeter to its factory default conditions by pressing RESTR and selecting FACT Step 7 Configure the Model 2182 for Delta measurements A B Press RATE to select 1 PLC MED annunciator on or 5 PLC SLOW annunciator on Enable Delta measurements by pressing SHIFT and then V1 V2 NOTE For
209. he front panel RATE key will change the speed setting and will also enable Autozero Rate changes using remote programming have no effect on the state of Autozero To force a single rapid update of the internal reference points when Autozero is enabled set the integration rate to FAST or 0 01 PLC for remote programming and then back to the desired rate i e MED 1 0 PLC Details on Rate are covered in Section 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 8 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Controlling autozeroing modes For front panel operation the two autozeroing modes are controlled from the SHIFT gt CONFIG menu as follows NOTE For remote programming the commands to control the two autozeroing modes are listed in Table 2 2 1 Press SHIFT and then CONFIG to display the present state of Front Autozero Y yes enabled N no disabled 2 To change the FRONT AZERO setting use the amp or W key to display Y or N 3 If you do not wish to view or change the Autozero setting jump to step 6 Otherwise proceed to the next step 4 Press the gt key to display the present state of Autozero YES enabled NO disabled To change the AUTOZERO setting use the amp or W key to display YES or NO 6 Press ENTER to enter the setting s and exit from the menu structure ad NOTE The factory default setting for Front Autozero and Autozero in ON enabled
210. he processing of any other device command A DCL does not affect instrument settings and stored data Program fragment CALL TRANSMIT DCL status Clears all devices SDC selective device clear The SDC command is an addressed command that performs essentially the same function as the DCL command However since each device must be individually addressed the SDC command provides a method to clear only selected instruments instead of clearing all instruments simultaneously as is the case with DCL Program fragment CALL TRANSMIT UNL LISTEN 7 SDC status Clears 2182 GET group execute trigger GET is a GPIB trigger that is used as an event to control operation The Model 2182 reacts to this trigger if it is the programmed control source The control source is programmed from the SCPI TRIGger subsystem With the instrument programmed and waiting for a GPIB trigger the following program fragment will provide the GET Program fragment CALL TRANSMIT UNL LISTEN 7 GET status Trigger 2182 from over the bus When the command is executed the trigger event for the 2182 occurs Any other listeners ignore the trigger Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 12 Remote Operation SPE SPD serial polling Use the serial polling sequence to obtain the Model 2182 serial poll byte The serial poll byte contains important informatio
211. he reading is considered a true measurement The reading is held on the display until an out of window reading occurs to restart the hold process For remote operation or when scanning the hold process seeks a new seed once it has been satisfied and the readings have been released For basic front panel operation the hold process does not seek a new seed until the held condition is removed NOTE Hold can only be used with Channel 1 Whenever Hold is enabled Channel 2 becomes inoperative Hold example Press SHIFT and then HOLD to display the present window 0 01 0 1 1 or 10 To change the window press the amp or W key to display the desired window Press ENTER The present hold count is displayed 2 to 100 To change the hold count use the lt q P gt A and W keys to display the desired count Press DCV1 to measure voltage on Channel 1 Apply the test signal to Channel 1 of the Model 2182 Once the signal becomes stable enough to satisfy the hold condition the reading is released and the beeper sounds if enabled 7 Remove the hold condition by disconnecting the signal from Channel 1 Hold will then seek a new seed 8 To disable HOLD press SHIFT and then HOLD DN ee Beeper control The beeper for Hold can be enabled or disabled from the ON OFF LIMITS menu as follows 1 Press ON OFF to display the beeper selections NEVER OUTSIDE and INSIDE Perform step A or B A To enable
212. his section for details on using Hold Programming example The following program fragment triggers and stores in the buffer 10 readings which are then displayed on the computer CRT CALL SEND 7 rst status Restore RST defaults CALL SEND 7 trig del 0 5 status Set delay for 0 5sec CALL SEND 7 samp coun 10 status Set sample count to 10 CALL SEND 7 read status Trigger and request readings reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status Address 2182 to talk PRINT reading Display the 10 readings on the CRT Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 7 18 Triggering Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Limits Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 8 2 Limits e Limit operations Explains Limit 1 and Limit 2 testing operations SCPI programming Covers the SCPI commands for remote operation e Application Provides an application that sorts resistors by tolerances Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Limits 8 3 Limit operations Limit operations set and control the values that determine the HI IN LO status of subsequent measurements The limit test is performed on the result
213. i oll 12a ILD HOS L Liol lo o d 94 d 0 94 0 0 dS qa NN 0 o olol o t moy TI ft 1 1 a Z W Z 29 w9 s WS r Wr pe WE az WZ L WL a 0 vo uunop q a a fa sug gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt O A L 0 amp 5 L amp 5 0 amp 5 I amp 5 0 S L Q 0 a L LISD 0 38 0 6 8 l 6 L 5 0 3 0 a L Less Ee be 0 o o 8 0 a 5 x x x x x x x amp x za IEEE 488 Bus Overview F 8 Figure F 3 Command codes Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 Bus Overview F 9 Addressed multiline commands Addressed commands are multiline commands that must be preceded by the device listen address before that instrument will respond to the command in question Note that only the addressed device will respond to these commands Both the commands and the address preceding it are sent with ATN true SDC Selective Device Clear The SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command except that only the addressed device responds Generally instruments return to their power up default conditions when responding to the SDC command GTL Go To Local The GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode With some instruments GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previously locked out with the LLO command GET Group Execute Tr
214. iation Therefore operation will immediately leave the idle state when it is sent The RCL 0 command will do the same if INITiation CONTInuous ON is a user saved default RST disables continuous initiation Therefore the instrument will remain in the idle state Either of the following two initiate commands will take the instrument out of the idle state INITiate INITiate CONTinuous ON NOTES While in remote pressing the LOCAL key restores continuous front panel operation When switching from the 182 language to the SCPI language the instrument will go into the idle state and stay there You can take the instrument out of idle by pressing the TRIG key or by sending an initiate command Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Triggering 7 15 Trigger model operation Once the instrument is taken out of idle operation proceeds through the trigger model down to the device action In general the device action includes a measurement and when stepping scanning closes the next channel Control source As shown in Figure 7 10 a control source is used to hold up operation until the programmed event occurs The control source options are as follows e IMMediate Event detection is immediately satisfied allowing operation to continue e MANual Event detection is satisfied by pressing the TRIG key The Model 2182 must be in LOCAL mode for it to respond to the
215. ice requests SRQs are managed by the serial poll sequence of the Model 2182 If an SRQ does not occur bit B6 RQS of the Status Byte Register will remain cleared and the program will simply proceed normally after the serial poll is performed If an SRQ does occur bit B6 of the Status Byte Register will set and the program can branch to a service subroutine when the SRQ is detected by the serial poll Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 21 The serial poll automatically resets RQS of the Status Byte Register This allows subsequent serial polls to monitor bit B6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event can cause another SRQ even if the event register that caused the first SRQ has not been cleared A serial poll clears RQS but does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all Status Byte event summary bits are cleared Programming syntax The following paragraphs cover syntax for both common commands and SCPI commands For more information see the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI standards Command words Program messages are made up of one or more command words Commands and command parameters Common commands and SCPI commands may or may not use a parameter The following are some examples SAV lt NRf gt Parameter NRf required RST No parameter used SINITiate CONTinuous lt b gt Parameter lt b g
216. ide the arm scan and measure events for the Trigger Model By sending the WAI command after the TRG command subsequent commands will not be executed until the pointer for the Trigger Model has finished moving in response to TRG and has settled at its next state Program fragment CALL SEND 7 syst pres staus CALL SEND 7 init cont off abort status Place 2182 in idle CALL SEND 7 trig coun l sour tim status CALL SEND 7 samp coun 30 status Program for 30 measurements then stop CALL SEND 7 init wai status Start measurements and send WAI CALL SEND 7 data status Query a reading reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status Get a response when 2182 goes into idle PRINT reading Display the reading Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 13 2 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands The signal oriented measurement commands are used to acquire readings You can use these high level instructions to control the measurement process These commands are summarized in Table 13 1 Table 13 1 Signal oriented measurement command summary Command Description CONFigure lt function gt Places the Model 2182 in a one shot measurement mode for the specified function FETCh Requests the latest reading
217. igger The GET command is used to trigger devices to perform a specific action that depends on device configuration for example take a reading Although GET is an addressed command many devices respond to GET without addressing Address commands Addressed commands include two primary command groups and a secondary address group ATN is true when these commands are asserted The commands include LAG Listen Address Group These listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address and are used to address devices to listen The actual command byte is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 TAG Talk Address Group The talk commands are derived from the primary address by ORing the address with 40 Talk commands are used to address devices to talk SCG Secondary Command Group Commands in this group provide additional addressing capabilities Many devices including the Model 2182 do not use these commands Unaddress commands The two unaddress commands are used by the controller to remove any talkers or listeners from the bus ATN is true when these commands are asserted UNL Unlisten Listeners are placed in the listener idle state by the UNL command UNT Untalk Any previously commanded talkers will be placed in the talker idle state by the UNT command Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com F 10 IEEE 488 Bus Overvie
218. imary address of 7 would be 47 47 7 40 The IEEE 488 standards also include another addressing mode called secondary addressing Secondary addresses lie in the range of 60 7F Note however that many devices including the Model 2182 do not use secondary addressing Once a device is addressed to talk or listen the appropriate bus transactions take place For example if the instrument is addressed to talk it places its data string on the bus one byte at a time The controller reads the information and the appropriate software can be used to direct the information to the desired location Bus lines The signal lines on the IEEE 488 bus are grouped into three different categories data lines management lines and handshake lines The data lines handle bus data and commands while the management and handshake lines ensure that proper data transfer and operation takes place Each bus line is active low with approximately zero volts representing a logic 1 true The following paragraphs describe the operation of these lines Data lines The IEEE 488 bus uses eight data lines that transfer data one byte at a time DIO1 Data Input Output through DIO8 Data Input Output are the eight data lines used to transmit both data and multiline commands and are bi directional The data lines operate with low true logic Bus management lines The five bus management lines help to ensure proper interface control and management These lines
219. ing NOTE Channel annunciators do not turn on during an external step or scan Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 4 Stepping and Scanning Front panel trigger models The front panel trigger models for stepping and scanning are shown in Figure 9 1 and Figure 9 2 These are expansions of the basic front panel trigger model that is presented and explained in Section 7 see Figure 7 1 The following discussions focus on the stepping and scanning operations Be sure to refer to Section 7 for additional information on the various components of trigger models Internal scanning Figure 9 1 shows the front panel trigger model for internal scanning The components of the trigger model are explained as follows Control source Immediate With immediate triggering event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to drop down to the next trigger model block Delay Timer The timer is used to control the time interval between internal scans It has no effect on the time interval between each measurement in a scan cycle When SCAN is pressed the timer starts and event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to drop down to Delay If configured for an additional scan operation will later loop back to this control source where it will wait until the timer interval expires If the timer interval is already expired event detection will be satisfied imme
220. instrument reading Vv FRESh Return a new fresh reading Vv CHANnel lt n gt Select channel to measure 0 1 or 2 0 internal 1 See 2 temperature sensor CHANnel Query selected channel HOLD Path to configure and control Hold Sec 7 WINDow lt n gt Set Hold window 0 01 to 20 1 WINDow Query Hold window COUNt lt n gt Set Hold count 2 to 100 5 COUNt Query Hold count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Hold OFF STATe Query state of Hold VOLTage DC Path to configure DC volts vV NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate in line cycles PLC 0 01 to 60 5 Sec 3 V 60Hz or 0 01 to 50 50Hz NPLCycles Query NPLC vV APERture lt n gt Set integration rate in seconds 166 67e 6 to 1 83 33 60Hz or 200e 6 to 1 50Hz APERture Query Aperture DIGits lt n gt Set display resolution 4 to 8 8 Sec 3 DIGits Query display resolution RATio lt b gt Enable or disable Ratio V1 V2 OFF Sec 5 RATio Query state of Ratio DELTa lt b gt Enable or disable Delta V1t1 V1t2 2 OFF Sec 5 DELTa Query state of Delta CHANnel1 Channel 1 voltage commands RANGe Configure measurement range Sec 3 V UPPer lt n gt Select range 0 to 120 volts 120 v UPPer Query range value vV AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable autorange ON vV AUTO Query state of autorange vV REFerence lt n gt Specify reference Rel value for Channel 1 0 Sec 4 V 120 to 120 volts STATe lt b gt Enable
221. ion To simplify the task of keeping track of the devices a unique address number is assigned to each On the bus only one device can talk at a time and is addressed to talk by the controller The device that is talking is known as the active talker The devices that need to listen to the talker are addressed to listen by the controller Each listener is then referred to as an active listener Devices that do not need to listen are instructed to unlisten The reason for the unlisten instruction is to optimize the speed of bus information transfer since the task of listening takes up bus time Through the use of control lines a handshake sequence takes place in the transfer process of information from a talker to a listener This handshake sequence helps ensure the credibility of the information transfer The basic handshake sequence between an active controller talker and a listener is as follows 1 The listener indicates that it is ready to listen The talker places the byte of data on the bus and indicates that the data is available to the listener 3 The listener aware that the data is available accepts the data and then indicates that the data has been accepted 4 The talker aware that the data has been accepted stops sending data and indicates that data is not being sent 5 The listener aware that there is no data on the bus indicates that it is ready for the next byte of data Bus description The IEEE 488 bus which is a
222. ion menu Use A or key to display CAL TEMP Press ENTER The temperature in C at the time of the last ACAL is displayed Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Autozeroing modes An A D measurement cycle measures the input signal and will periodically measure internal voltages that correspond to offsets zero and amplifier gains and the internal reference temperature These measurements help maintain stability and accuracy over time and changes in temperature The signal offset gain and temperature measurements are then used in an algorithm to calculate the reading of the input signal This process is known as autozeroing Internally the Model 2182 has two amplifiers that have an impact on speed noise drift and offset These performance aspects can be controlled to some degree by controlling the available autozeroing modes The front end amplifier is controlled by Front Autozero and the second amplifier is controlled by Autozero Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 7 Front Autozero With Front Autozero for the front end amplifier enabled which is the default setting the Model 2182 performs two A D measurement cycles for each reading The first one is a normal measurement cycle and the second one is performed with the polarity of the amplifier reversed This two cycle polarity reversal measureme
223. ions and operating instructions or the safety of the equipment may be impaired Do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories as defined in the specifications and operating in formation and as shown on the instrument or test fixture panels or switching card When fuses are used in a product replace with same type and rating for continued protection against fire hazard Chassis connections must only be used as shield connections for measuring circuits NOT as safety earth ground connections If you are using a test fixture keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Safe operation requires the use of a lid interlock Ifa screw is present connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recommended in the user documentation The J symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on an instrument shows that it can source or measure 1000 volts or more including the combined effect of normal and common mode voltages Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The A symbol indicates a connection terminal to the equipment frame The WARNING heading in a manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading in a manual explains hazards that could
224. ipmentDepot com 9 12 Stepping and Scanning SCPI programming stepping and scanning Commands to scan are listed in Table 9 1 Notice that many commands from the TRIGger Subsystem are used for scanning See Section 7 for details on triggering Table 9 1 SCPI commands stepping and scanning Commands Description Default For ROUTe Subsystem ROUTe ROUTe Subsystem SCAN Scanning INTernal Internal Scan CCOunt lt n gt Specify number of Channel 1 readings 1 to 1 1023 EXTernal lt list gt Specify external scan list 2 to 800 see note 1 1 10 LSELect lt name gt Select scan operation NONE INTernal or NONE EXTernal see Note 2 For TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger Trigger commands SOURce lt name gt Select control source IMMediate TIMer MANual IMMediate BUS or EXTernal TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 1 COUNt lt n gt Set trigger count 1 to 9999 or INF see Note 3 DELay lt n gt Set delay 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto delay SAMPle Sample Counter COUNt lt n gt Set sample count 1 to 1024 1 Notes 1 The lt list gt parameter is formatted as follows lt list gt X Y Where X is the Min channel Y is the Max channel 2 The parameters are explained as follows NONE Disables all operations associated with a scan INTernal Enables an internal scan EXTernal Enables an external scan 3 Defaul
225. is imperative that all connecting surfaces are kept clean and free of oxides As noted in Table C 1 copper to copper oxide junctions can result in thermal EMFs as high as ImV C Even when low thermal cables and connections are used thermal EMFs can still be a problem in some cases It is especially important to keep the two materials forming the junction at the same temperature Keeping the two junctions close together is one way to minimize such thermal problems Also keep all junctions away from air currents in some cases it may be necessary to thermally insulate sensitive junctions to minimize temperature variations When a Cu Cu connection is made sufficient pressure must be applied to ensure the connection is gas tight to prevent future oxidation In some cases connecting the two thermal junctions together with good thermal contact to a common heat sink may be required Unfortunately most good electrical insulators are poor conductors of heat In cases where such low thermal conductivity may be a problem special insulators that combine high electrical insulating properties with high thermal conductivity may be used Some examples of these materials include hard anodized aluminum sapphire and diamond Nulling residual thermal offsets Even if all reasonable precautions are taken some residual thermal offsets may still be present These offsets can be minimized by using the Model 2182 Relative feature to null them out To do so plac
226. itch contacts Low power switches Figure 2 11 shows how the Model 2182 can be used to measure the resistance of a switch contact The constant current is provided by the Keithley Model 220 current source which can source up to 100mA To avoid oxide puncture the voltage across the switch contact should be lt 20mV Voltage is limited by choosing a current that will not result in a larger voltage drop than 20mV For example with a contact resistance specified at 5 00mQ the current should be no larger than 40mA Figure 2 11 Measuring switch contact resistance Model 220 Current Source DCV1 Test Circuit 2182 With current known and voltage measured resistance can be calculated using Ohms Law R VY L Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 25 High power switches Heat is a factor in high power switching As the temperature of the switch increases so does the contact resistance In Figure 2 12 heat is generated in the switch by sourcing a constant high current i e 10A through it Figure 2 12 Measuring switch contact resistance and temperature Thermocouple 10A p a Constant Current Source Test Circuit 2182 The Model 2182 measures both the voltage across the switch contact and the temperature These measurements allow you to develop a resistance vs temperature profile With cu
227. ithley for use with the Model 2182 Cables connectors and adapters Models 2107 4 and 2107 30 Input Cable Connect the Model 2182 Nanovoltmeter to DUT using one of these input cables The input cable is terminated with a LEMO connector for connection to the Model 2182 on one end and four copper spade lugs for connection to DUT on the other The Model 2107 4 which is a supplied accessory to the Model 2182 is 1 2m 4 ft in length and the Model 2107 30 is 9m 30 ft in length Also included are four copper alligator clips that attach to the copper lugs of the cable and DeoxIt copper cleaning solution Model 2182 KIT Low Thermal Connector Consists of a low thermal LEMO connector and strain relief Includes all the connector parts required to build a custom input cable for the Model 2182 Nanovoltmeter Model 2187 4 Input Cable Low thermal input cable for the Model 2182 2182A Termi nated with a LEMO connector on one end and four banana plugs on the other The cable is 4 ft 1 2m in length Model 2188 Low Thermal Calibration Shorting Plug This input shorting plug is required to calibrate the Model 2182 Nanovoltmeter Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 Shielded GPIB Cables Connect the Model 2182 to the GPIB bus using shielded cables and connectors to reduce electromagnetic interference EMI The Model 7007 1 is 1m long the Model 7007 2 is 2m long Model 7009 5 Shielded RS 232 Cable 1 5m 5 ft RS 232 cable terminated with a
228. itional information on these commands is provided after the table Table 6 1 SCPI commands buffer Commands Description Default TRACe TRACe Subsystem See Note CLEar Clear readings from buffer FREE Query bytes available and bytes in use POINts lt n gt Specify number of readings to store 2 to 1024 FEED lt name gt Select source of readings SENSe CALCulate or NONE CONTrol lt name gt Select buffer control mode NEVer or NEXT DATA Read all readings in buffer CALCulate2 CALCulate2 Subsystem FORMat lt name gt Select buffer statistic MINimum MAXimum MEAN NONE SDEViation or NONE STATe lt b gt Enable or disable statistic calculation OFF IMMediate Recalculate raw input data in buffer IMMediate Perform calculation and read result DATA Read result of statistic calculation Note SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on TRACe commands TRACe subsystem The FEED command controls the source of the readings With the SENSe parameter selected raw input readings are stored in the buffer With the CALCulate parameter selected results of the mX b or Percent calculation are stored in the buffer Commands to control and configure the mX b and Percent calculations are summarized in Table 4 2 in Section 4 FEED CONTrol is used to control the storage process NEXT starts the storage process and NEVer stops it After storage is completed buffer control automatically returns to NEVer CALC
229. l be applied to all measurement functions 4 To disable percent again press SHIFT and then The MATH annunciator will turn off NOTES The result of the percent calculation is positive when the input exceeds the reference and negative when the input is less than the reference The result of the percent calculation may be displayed in exponential notation For example a displayed reading of 2 500E 03 is equivalent to 2500 2 5K Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 4 8 Relative mX b and Percent SCPI programming mX b and percent Table 4 2 SCPI commands mX b and percent Commands Description Default CALCulate FORMat lt name gt Select calculation NONE MXB or PERCent NONE KMATh Path to configure mX b and Percent MMFactor lt NRf gt Specify scale factor M for mX b 100e6 to 100e6 1 MBFactor lt NRf gt Specify offset B for mX b 100e6 to 100e6 0 MUNits lt name gt Specify units for mX b see Setting mX b units MX PERCent lt NRf gt Specify reference value for Percent 100e6 to 100e6 1 ACQuire Use input signal as reference value STATe lt b gt Enable or disable the selected calculation OFF DATA LATest Query last calculation result FRESh Trigger a reading and query the calculation result Setting mX b units The lt name gt parameter for CALCulate K MATh MUNits can be one or two character
230. lated using Average Voltage and Average Current and is explained in the following paragraphs Average Voltage and Power Average Voltage calculation Average Voltage is the average bias voltage that was present across the device when the corresponding Differential Conductance reading was taken For remote operation the Average Voltage reading for Differential Conductance can be included in the returned data string Average Voltage is calculated as follows X Y Z Y ef AvgVolt D 2 AvgVolt sterte Where AvgVolt is the Average Voltage corresponding to a given the differential voltage dV reading X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for the dV reading Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com I 18 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Power calculation With WATTS power measurement units selected power for Differential Conductance is calculated using Average Voltage see Average Voltage calculation and Average Cur rent Average Current is calculated by the Model 622x as follows X Y Z Y ha e R AvgCurr en See 5 2 AvgCurr Somes eee apt t Where AvgCurr is the Average Current corresponding to a given Differential Conductance reading X Y and Z are the three current levels for the Differential Conductance reading With Average Voltage and Average Current known calculated by the Model 622x p
231. ld H while maintaining a fixed current I through the DUT Such a test system is shown in Figure 5 6 A Keithley SourceMeter Model 2400 2410 or 2420 is used to source current through the DUT and the Model 2182 measures the voltage across the DUT Keep in mind that the I Source of the SourceMeter is a constant current source Therefore the current through the DUT will remain constant as the resistance of the DUT increases Figure 5 6 Test circuit Fixed I Vary H HI i SourceMeter D 2182 Thermal 30 Cables Source l CH 1 EMFs i DUT aN TE Cryostat After measuring the DUT voltage V at a series of increasing magnetic field values H you can graph H vs V The example H V curve in Figure 5 7 shows that the measured voltage across the DUT remains at OV in low magnetic fields This is the flat portion of the curve where the DUT remains at OQ At some point the voltage drop across the DUT will start increasing as the magnetic field increases The actual resistance of the DUT can be calculated at any magnetic field point using Ohm s law R V I where R is actual resistance of the DUT V is the measured voltage across the DUT I is the known current that flows through the DUT Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 21 Figure 5 7 H V Curve Fixed I Fixed Measure V Magnetic Field H Delta measurements A
232. le Rel ON V STATe Query state of Rel V ACQuire Use the voltage on Channel 2 as Rel REFerence Query Rel value vV LPASs Control analog filter for DCV2 Sec 3 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter OFF STATe Query state of analog filter DFILter Configure and control digital filter Sec 3 WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing TCONtrol Query filter type STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON STATe Query state of digital filter Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI Reference Tables 14 9 Table 14 7 SENSe command summary cont Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI TEMPerature Path to configure temperature TRANsducer lt name gt Specify transducer TCouple or INTernal TCouple Sec 2 TRANsducer Query transducer TCouple Thermocouple TC Sec 2 TYPE lt type gt Set TC type J K T E R S B or N J TYPE Query TC type RJUNction Reference junction sec 2 RSELect lt name gt Set reference type S Mulated or INTernal INTernal RSELect Query reference type SIMulated lt n gt Specify simulated temperature in C 0 to 60 23 SIMulated Query simulated tempe
233. lection B Press the amp or key to toggle the selection C Press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal display state RS 232 interface The RS 232 interface is selected and configured from the RS 232 menu structure From this menu you can enable or disable the RS 232 interface and check or change the following settings e Baud rate 19 2k 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 or 300 e Flow control none or XonXoff e Terminator CR LF CRLF or LFCR NOTE See RS 232 interface reference located at the end of this section for information on the these settings and connections to the computer Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 5 Perform the following steps to select and configure the RS 232 interface NOTE To retain a present RS 232 setting press ENTER with the setting displayed You can exit from the menu structure at any time by pressing EXIT 1 Press SHIFT and then RS232 to access the RS 232 menu The present state on or off of the RS 232 is displayed 2 To enable the RS 232 interface A Place the cursor on the on off selection by pressing the gt key B Press the amp or key to toggle the selection to ON C Press ENTER The present baud rate is displayed 3 To change baud rate A Place the cursor on the baud rate value B Use the amp and keys to display the desired baud rate value C Press ENTER
234. les for each reading The first one is a normal measurement cycle The second measurement cycle is performed with the polarity of the front end amplifier reversed This current reversal measurement technique is used to cancel internal offsets in the amplifier With Front Autozero disabled the second measurement cycle is not performed The speed for Delta measurements can be doubled by disabling Front Autozero Delta uses its own current reversal technique to cancel offsets Therefore the dual measurement technique of Front Autozero is not required See Autozeroing modes in Section 2 for more information including benefits and drawbacks on Front Autozero Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCP Commands 15 17 AZERO STATe lt b gt SYSTem AZERo STATe lt b gt Control Autozero Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable Autozero 1 or ON Enable Autozero Description With autozero disabled measurement speed is increased However the zero and gain reference points will eventually drift resulting in inaccurate readings of the input signal It is recommended that autozero only be disabled for short periods of time NOTE See Performance considerations in Section 2 for more information on autozero LSYNc lt b gt SYSTem LSYNe lt b gt Control line cycle synchronization Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable line cycle synchronization 1
235. ll math calculations are disabled Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 13 3 Buffer operation is disabled A storage operation presently in process will be aborted e Autozero is set to the RST default value e All operations associated with stepping or scanning are disabled This command is automatically asserted when the MEASure command is sent Program fragment CALL SEND 7 conf volt CALL SEND 7 trig del 0 5 CALL SEND 7 samp coun 10 CALL SEND 7 read reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading PRINT reading FETCh Description length3 status status3 status3 status 7 status 4 4 4 Perform CONFigure operations Set delay for 0 5sec Set sample count to 10 Trigger and request readings Address 2182 to talk Display the 10 readings on the CRT This command requests the latest post processed reading After sending this command and addressing the Model 2182 to talk the reading is sent to the computer This command does not affect the instrument setup This command does not trigger a measurement The command simply requests the last available reading Note that this command can repeatedly return the same reading Until there is a new reading this command continues to return the old reading If your application requires a fresh
236. lore 91 80 2212 8027 Fax 91 80 2212 8005 www keithley com Italy Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 39 16 28 wwwkeithley it Japan Tokyo 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 wwwkeithleyjp Korea Seoul 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 www keithley com Netherlands Gorinchem 0183 635333 Fax 0183 630821 www keithley nl Singapore Singapore 65 6747 9077 Fax 65 6747 2991 www keithley com Sweden Solna 08 509 04 600 Fax 08 655 26 10 www keithley com Taiwan Hsinchu 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 www keithley com tw 3 04 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Model 2182 and 2182A Nanovoltmeter User s Manual This User s Manual supports both the Models 2182 and 2182A References to the Model 2182 apply to both the Models 2182 and 2182A References to the Model 2182 2182A apply to the Model 2182 with firmaware version A10 or higher and the Model 2182A with firmware version C01 or higher References to the Model 2182A applies to the Model 2182A with firmware version C01 or higher 2004 Keithley Instruments Inc All rights reserved Cleveland Ohio U S A First Printing June 2004 Document Number 2182A 900 01 Rev A Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Manual Print History The print history shown below lists the printing dates of all Revisions a
237. lso referred to as the GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus was designed as a parallel transfer medium to optimize data transfer without using an excessive number of bus lines In keeping with this goal the bus has only eight data lines that are used for both data and with most commands Five bus management lines and three handshake lines round out the complement of bus signal lines A typical setup for controlled operation is shown in Figure F 1 Generally a system will contain one controller and a number of other instruments to which the commands are given Device operation is categorized into three operators controller talker and listener The controller controls the instruments on the bus The talker sends data while a listener receives data Depending on the type of instrument any particular device can be a talker only a listener only or both a talker and listener Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 Bus Overview F 3 Figure F 1 IEEE 488 bus configuration TO OTHER DEVICES DEVICE 1 ABLE TO TALK LISTEN E AND CONTROL COMPUTER DATA BUS DEVICE 2 ABLE TO TALK AND LISTEN DATA BYTE 2182 TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE 3 ONLY ABLE TO LISTEN PRINTER GENERAL INTERFACE MANAGEMENT DEVICE 4 ONLY ABLE E DIO 1 8 DATA TO TALK 8 LINES DAV NRFD HANDSHAKE NDAC IFC ATN BUS SRQ MANAGEMENT REN EOI There are two categories of
238. lta Pulse Delta The Model 6221 outputs pulses and uses 3 point repeating average measurements to calculate Pulse Delta voltage For each pulse the Model 2182A performs an A D conversion measurement at pulse low pulse high and pulse low Each set of three A D readings yield a single Pulse Delta reading Figure I 1B shows Pulse Delta measurements If device heating is a concern 2 point measurements can instead be used 2nd low pulse not measured due to corruption from heat Differential Conductance The Model 622x outputs a differential current dI sweep and measures differential voltage dV This function uses a 3 point moving average algorithm to calculate dV With dI known and dV calculated the Model 622x can then calculate dif ferential conductance dG or differential resistance dR Figure I 1C shows Differential Conductance measurements Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com l 4 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Figure l 1 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance measurements A Delta measurements 2182 2182A 2182 2182A 2182 2182A A D A D Ist Delta Cycle I High 622x DELTA I Source Reading LOW ts i 2182 i 2182 2182 2182A 2182A 2182A AD AD A D e 2nd Delta Cycle lt _ 3rd Delta Cycle gt 1 Ath Delta Cycle B Pulse Delta measureme
239. ltage and Temperature Measurements 2 15 Also note that channel voltage differential reduces the maximum measurement capability of Channel 2 Normally Channel 2 can measure up to 12V However a 2V differential reduces the maximum measurement capability of Channel 2 to 10V In Figure 2 5A a gt 10V input to Channel 2 will cause an overflow condition NOTE Channel 2 HI or LO cannot be more than 12V peak from Channel 1 LO Figure 2 5 Connections dual channel voltage Cable to copper 2107 wire connection Input Cable one of four red HI CH 1 DCV1 Loo black T HI green CH2 green CH 2 DCV2 DUT 10V range DCV2 o LO white LO white 2182 Test Circuit 2182 Note Channel 2 HI or LO must not exceed 12V from Channel 1 LO A Typical Measurement Configuration B Voltage Differential Between Channels Temperature only connections Channel 1 of the Model 2182 can be used to make temperature measurements Figure 2 6 shows connections using the internal reference junction Keep in mind that the thermocouple wires must be soldered directly to a LEMO connector as previously explained Figure 2 6 Connections temperature internal reference Thermocouple wire soldered directly to LEMO connector one of two Test Circuit Thermocouple Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 16 V
240. mal display state NOTE Line cycle synchronization is not available for integration rates lt 1 PLC regardless of the LSYNC setting Pumpout current low charge injection mode Pumpout current for Channel 1 is very low 0 5uA peak to peak and therefore does not adversely affect instrument performance Channel 2 can make the same claim as long as Channel 2 LO is connected to Channel 1 LO This pumpout current is due to internal switch transitions and occurs between A D conversions Settling for the transition occurs on the next A D conversion Whenever the impedance between Channel 2 LO and Channel 1 LO is gt 100kQ pumpout current could be high enough to corrupt measurements below 1V Above 1V measurements pumpout current is not significant Low Charge Injection Mode If you must use Channel 2 for measurements below 1V and the impedance between Channel 2 LO and Channel 1 LO is gt 100k you can enable the Low Charge Injection Mode to reduce the pumpout current However this mode increases measurement noise by up to 8 times The Low Charge Injection Mode can be enabled or disabled from the GPIB or RS 232 interface The command to control low charge injection is listed in Table 2 2 Low charge injection cannot be enabled from the front panel However it can be disabled from the front panel by restoring factory default conditions Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 1
241. mand cisien i R ERE E 15 16 Performance commands sereset RES a 15 16 TBEEPer COMMAMNA oc cs0cc esecdecieceesesdeesessedvesasdicecacdebacceeasancdneaeditousi Ees EESE 15 18 TRCEICK COMMANG sac cxsscecoecucidscectescanscdsnedhutssseesiesossueseeusteeeeteeteeieteeiiacenedes 15 18 POSetup lt name gt command 00 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeseeeeaeenees 15 18 SVERSION command spesse d E EE EEA REA 15 19 SERRot command resosi eE e ea EEEE AAR EEEE E 15 19 CLEar command ecni E AE a 15 19 TKEY lt NRf gt command 0 cccsssesssseecssstecsssccesssnceessesecssesecsseneeesenseesanes 15 20 Specifications Status and Error Messages Measurement Considerations Measurement Considerations 0 0 ee eeeeseeeeeeseceeeeseeseeescesseeseeesecseeeaeeeeesesseseaeenees C 2 Thermoelectric potentials eee eeseeceseesecesecseeesecseessecseeeseesaeeseeeaseaeeneeeaeeeas C 2 Thermoelectric generation 0 ee eeeeeceseesecesecseeeseseeeesecseeeaeesaeeseeeeseaeesaeeneeeas C 3 Source resistance NOISE oo eee eseceeeeaeeseeeseesseesecesecseseaeeseseaecesesesseseaeeseee C 4 Magnetic Helds orasan era E R R dee EA ERS C 6 Radio frequency interference oo eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeseceeeesecseeeseeseeeseeeeseaeenaeeseeegs C 6 Ground OOPS sereisas a i e ee ania Gatien C 6 Seldi anaran sv bcs ceddacbe ods EE eh C 8 Meter loading retsina EE E O E EES C 9 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot
242. mber of paired positive amp negative steps in 2400 CONST NumRdgs NumRdgsPerStep 2 CalcReadings NumRdgs represents the number of readings to store in 2182 s buffer The 2 accounts for positive and negative steps DIM DataCH2 CalcReadings array represents total number of channel 2 readings DIM DataCH1 CalcReadings array represents total number of channel 1 readings FOR i 1 TO CalcReadings allocates space for each channel reading DataCH2 i SPACES 18 DataCH1 i SPACE 18 NEXT i CODE for Parsing single string of buffer response into 48 individual readings OneReading SPACES 20 represents 1 reading from buffer string response OneCharacter SPACES 2 represents 1 character from buffer string response Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 18 Stepping and Scanning AsciiRdgsBuf SPACE 18 NumRdgs represents the string of buffer response DIM Readings 1 TO NumRdgs array of the 48 individual readings in numerical representation form converted from ASCII CALL send Addr TRACE DATA status ask 2182 for the buffer response CALL enter AsciiRdgsBuf length Addr status read in buffer response Start Parsing the data readings ParseLength 1 represents how many characters to extract from response string CurrentPosition 1 represents which character on in response s
243. mize thermal EMFs Temperature Simulated Reference Connections For temperature measurements using an external simulated reference junction simply wrap or clamp the thermocouple wires around the copper lugs or bare wires of the input cable Customized connections Temperature measurements using the internal reference junction require that the thermocouple wires be soldered directly to a LEMO connector that mates to the input of the Model 2182 Silver solder should be used to minimize thermal EMFs Figure 2 3 shows terminal identification for a LEMO connector Figure 2 3 LEMO connector terminal identification Channel 1 HI Channel 1 LO Channel 2 HI Channel 2 LO Rear View Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 14 Voltage and Temperature Measurements To make these customized connections you can modify the supplied input cable or you can use the LEMO connector that is included with the optional Model 2182 KIT CAUTION Silver solder has a high temperature melting point Take care not to damage the LEMO connector by applying excessive heat Voltage only connections Single Channel Measurement Connections Figure 2 4 shows typical connections to measure a DUT using a single channel When using Channel 2 its inputs must be referenced to Channel 1 LO as shown in FFigure 2 4B Figure 2 4 Connections single channel voltage Cable to copper Cable to
244. mmands Description Default For DCV1 SENSe SENSe Subsystem VOLTage Volts function CHANnel1 Channel 1 DCV1 LPASs lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter OFF DFILter Configure and control digital filter WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON For DCV2 SENSe SENSe Subsystem VOLTage Volts function CHANnel2 Channel 2 DCV2 LPASs lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter OFF DFILter Configure and control digital filter WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON For TEMP1 SENSe SENSe Subsystem TEMPerature Temperature function CHANnel1 Channel 1 TEMP1 LPASs lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter OFF DFILter Configure and control digital filter WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON For TEMP2 SENSe SENSe Subsystem TEMPerature Temperature function CHANnel2 Channel 2 TEMP2 LPASs lt b gt Enable or disable a
245. n about internal functions Generally the serial polling sequence is used by the controller to determine which of several instruments has requested service with the SRQ line However the serial polling sequence may be performed at any time to obtain the status byte from the Model 2182 Program Fragment WaitSRQ CALL SPOLL 7 poll status Serial poll the 2182 IF poll AND 64 0 THEN GOTO WaitSRQ Loop back if no SROQ Front panel GPIB operation The following paragraphs describe aspects of the front panel that are part of GPIB operation including messages status indicators and the LOCAL key Error and status messages See Appendix B for a list of error and status messages associated with IEEE 488 programming The instrument can be programmed to generate an SRQ and command queries can be performed to check for specific error conditions GPIB status indicators The REM remote TALK talk LSTN listen and SRQ service request annunciators show the GPIB bus status Each of these indicators is described below e REM This indicator shows when the instrument is in the remote state REM does not necessarily indicate the state of the REM line as the instrument must be addressed to listen with REM true before the REM indicator turns on When the instrument is in remote all front panel keys except for the LOCAL key are locked out When REM is turned off the instrument is in the local state and front panel operation i
246. n codes Code Interface function SH1 Source Handshake capability AHI Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Talker basic talker talk only serial poll unaddressed to talk on LAG L4 Listener basic listener unaddressed to listen on TAG SR1 Service Request capability RL1 Remote Local capability PPO No Parallel Poll capability DC1 Device Clear capability DT1 Device Trigger capability CO No Controller capability El Open collector bus drivers TEO No Extended Talker capability LEO No Extended Listener capability The codes define Model 2182 capabilities as follows SH Source Handshake Function SH1 defines the ability of the instrument to initiate the transfer of message data over the data bus AH Acceptor Handshake Function AH1 defines the ability of the instrument to guarantee proper reception of message data transmitted over the data bus T Talker Function The ability of the instrument to send data over the bus to other devices is provided by the T function Instrument talker capabilities T5 exist only after the instrument has been addressed to talk L Listener Function The ability for the instrument to receive device dependent data over the bus from other devices is provided by the L function Listener capabilities L4 of the instrument exist only after it has been addressed to listen SR Service Request Function SR1 defines the ability of the instrument to request service from
247. n instead be used for the reference junction The thermocouple wires are connected to the copper lugs of the supplied input cable The connection points are then immersed in the ice bath The temperature of the ice bath must be entered into the Model 2182 as the simulated reference temperature Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 5 Performance considerations The following aspects of operation affect accuracy and speed Warm up After the Model 2182 is turned on it must be allowed to warm up for at least 2 hours to allow the internal temperature to stabilize After the warm up period an ACAL must be performed if the present internal temperature and TCAL differ by more than 1 C TCAL is the internal temperature reading stored for the last ACAL see ACAL ACAL calibration ACAL is a special front end gain calibration for the 10mV and 100V ranges It needs to be performed whenever the internal temperature and TCAL vary by more than 1 C TCAL is the internal temperature reading at the time of the last ACAL For example if ACAL was performed at 28 C and the internal temperature changes to 29 1 C another ACAL will be required to main tain specified accuracy The procedures to measure internal temperature and TCAL are located after the ACAL Procedure When the internal temperature and TCAL differ by more than 1 C Bi
248. n is in process It takes around five minutes to complete LOW LVL ACAL and a little more than five minutes to complete FULL ACAL When finished the instrument returns to the normal display state Measuring internal temperature Perform the following steps to measure the internal temperature of the Model 2182 1 2 Press SHIFT and then TCOUPL to display the present units designator C F or K for temperature measurements To change the units designator press the P gt key to place the blinking cursor on the units designator and press the amp or W key to display the desired units Press ENTER The present sensor selection TCOUPLE or INTERNL is displayed The internal INTERNL sensor is used for measuring internal temperature To change the sensor selection press the gt key to place the blinking cursor on TCOUPLE and press the amp or W key to display INTERNL Press ENTER to return to the normal display state Press TEMP1 or TEMP2 to measure and display the internal temperature of the Model 2182 Note that when displaying the internal temperature both the CH1 and CH2 annunciators are off NOTE As long as the INTERNL sensor is selected TEMP1 and TEMP will only measure and display the internal temperature of the Model 2182 Checking TCAL temperature Perform the following steps to determine the internal temperature at the time of the last ACAL EA NS E Press SHIFT and then CAL to access the calibrat
249. n or not Also describe signal source Where is the measurement being performed factory controlled laboratory out of doors etc What power line voltage is used Ambient temperature F Relative humidity Other Any additional information If special modifications have been made by the user please describe Be sure to include your name and phone number on this service form Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Specifications are subject to change without notice All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments Inc All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies KEITHLEY A GREATER MEASURE OF CONFIDENCE Keithley Instruments Inc Corporate Headquarters 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 e www keithley com Belgium Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 www keithley nl Italy Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 39 16 28 e wwwkeithley it China Beijing 8610 82251886 Fax 8610 82251892 www keithley com cn Japan Tokyo 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 www keithley jp
250. nalog filter OFF DFILter Configure and control digital filter WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Programming example Range Digits Rate and Filter 3 13 The following program fragment configures the Filter for Channel 2 voltage DCV2 It disables the analog filter and enables the digital filter 5 window count 10 moving Analog Filter CALL SEND 7 sens volt Digital Filter CALL SEND 7 sens volt CALL SEND 7 sens volt CALL SEND 7 sens volt CALL SEND 7 sens volt chan2 chan2 chan2 chan2 chan2 lpas dfil sdfils off status Disable analog filter wind 5 status dfil dfil coun 10 status tcon mov status stat on status Set window to 5 Set count to 10 Select filter Enable filter moving digital Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 3 14 Range Digits Rate and Filter Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Relative mX b and Percent
251. nd Addenda created for this manual The Revision Level letter increases alphabetically as the manual undergoes subsequent updates Addenda which are released between Revisions contain important change information that the user should incorporate immediately into the manual Addenda are numbered sequentially When a new Revision is created all Addenda associated with the previous Revision of the manual are incorporated into the new Revision of the manual Each new Revision includes a revised copy of this print history page Revision A Document Number 2182A 900 01 cccccccseesesscseesecseesseeeesseeseeeesseseeseees June 2004 All Keithley product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of Keithley Instruments Inc Other brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com KEUS Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read and follow all installation operation and maintenance information carefully
252. nd SCAN Enables a stepping or scanning operation of consecutive channels SHIFT HALT Stops stepping or scanning and restores the trigger model to a non stepping scanning mode Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 7 Step Scan configuration Internal Stepping Scanning The settings for internal stepping and scanning are explained as follows Timer The maximum timer interval is 99H 99M 99 999S Hour Minute Second format Channel 1 Count This specifies the number of measurements to be performed while on Channel 1 Keep in mind that for each step scan cycle only one measurement is performed on Channel 2 Channel 1 Count can be set from 1 to 1023 Reading Count This indicates the total number of measurements that will to be performed for each step scan cycle For example if Channel 1 Count is set to 3 the Reading Count will initially set to 4 the extra reading is for Channel 2 For each additional step scan cycle simply add 4 to the Reading Count Therefore to perform three step scan cycles set the Reading Count to 12 Reading Count can be set from 2 to 1024 NOTES If you change the Reading Count it must be a multiple of the initial count val ue For example if the initial Reading Count is 3 you can change it to 6 or 9 or 12 etc If you enter a non multiple value the instrument will select the next lower value that i
253. nductance calculations dV calculations While the dV calculations for the first six dV readings are shown in Figure I 7 the follow ing formula can be used to calculate any dV reading in the test Where X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for a dV reading n Reading Number 1 Example Calculate the 21st dV reading X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for the 21st dV reading n Reading Number 1 21 1 20 Therefore X Y Z Y ee ee a ee dV oo Feng 1 X Y ZY 2 2 2 The 1 term in the dV calculation is used for polarity reversal of every other calculated dV reading This makes all calculated dV readings in the test the same polarity Simplified dV calculation The above dV calculation can be simplified as follows X Y Z Y 2 n er dV 5 1 dV ZIER 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance I 17 Measurement units The fundamental measurement for Differential Conductance is differential voltage dV However the dV reading can be converted into a differential conductance dG differen tial resistance dR or power Watts reading by the Model 622x With Ohms dR or Siemens dG measurement units selected the reading is calculated as follows dR dV dI dG dI dV With Power measurement units selected power is calcu
254. ne cycle synchronization Includes the SCPI commands for remote operation Connections Covers test circuit connection to the Model 2182 Temperature configuration Explains how to configure the Model 2182 for temperature measurements Measuring voltage and temperature Provides the basic step by step procedure to make measurements Includes the SCPI commands for remote operation Low level considerations Explains two external factors that can corrupt low level measurements thermal EMFs and noise Applications Provides some typical applications for the Model 2182 These include Testing Switch Contacts Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 3 Measurement overview The Model 2182 provides two input channels for DC voltage and temperature measurements Table 2 1 lists the measurements that can be performed by the two channels NOTE Measurement queries are used to trigger and or return readings Details are provided in Section 7 Section 13 and Appendix H Table 2 1 Measurement channels Measurement Input Channel s To Use Voltage Channel 1 Temperature Channel 1 Voltage and Voltage Channel 1 and Channel 2 Voltage and Temperature Channel 1 and Channel 2 Channel 1 is used as the fundamental measurement channel while Channel 2 provides sense measurements Because of this operational relationship bet
255. nt 4 Reading Count 10 Overview A Reading Count of ten sets the Trigger Counter in Figure 9 2 to 10 A total of ten measurements will be performed and stored in the buffer The 1st and 6th measurements will be performed on Channel 2 and the rest will be performed on Channel 1 Operation When the STEP key is pressed operation proceeds to Device Action where a measurement on Channel 2 is performed An output trigger is sent and the Trigger Counter is decremented to 9 Operation then loops back to Device Action four more times to perform four measurements on Channel 1 Note that an output trigger is sent after every measurement At this point the Trigger Counter is set to 5 Operation continues to loop until Channel 2 is again measured one time and Channel 1 is again measured four times After the last measurement is performed the instrument goes into idle Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 10 Stepping and Scanning External scanning Figure 9 3 summarizes the front panel operations to configure a scan for the External triggering example provided in Section 7 In that example the Model 2182 is used to scan and measure eight DUTs switched by a Model 7168 Nanovolt Scanner card installed in a Model 7001 7002 Switch System Figure 7 6 and Figure 7 7 show the signal and trigger connections while Figure 7 8 shows trigger model operation for the test Both
256. nt the voltage drop across the DUT will start increasing as current through the DUT increases The actual resistance of the DUT can be calculated at any current source point using Ohm s law R V I where R is actual resistance of the DUT V is the measured voltage across the DUT I is the known current that flows through the DUT Figure 5 9 I V Curve Fixed H Fixed H Measure V Source Such a test system is shown in Figure 5 10 A Keithley SourceMeter Model 2400 2410 or 2420 is used to source current through the DUT and two Model 2182s are used to provide simultaneous voltage measurements Model 2182 1 measures the voltage across a precision reference resistor Rggp and stores the readings in its buffer These stored readings allow you to reference current amplitudes to the voltage measurements of the DUT Model 2182 2 measures voltage across the DUT and stores the readings in its buffer For example assume you want to measure DUT voltage at current sweep values of 10nA 20uA and 501A When the sweep is started LOA output Model 2182 1 measures 1mV 10uA x 100Q 1mV and stores the reading in its buffer at location 1 At the same time Model 2182 2 measures the DUT and stores that reading in its buffer at location 1 At the next sweep point 20uA Model 2182 1 measures 2mV and stores the reading in its buffer at location 2 and Model 2182 2 measures the DUT and stores the reading in its buffer at location 2 At
257. nt Status Register use the ESE and ESE Common Commands respectively All other enable registers are programmed and queried using the ENABle and ENABle commands in the STATus Subsystem See Section 14 for more information An enable register is not cleared when it is read The following operations affect the enable registers e Cycling power Clears all enable registers e STATus PRESet clears the following enable registers e Operation Event Enable Register e Questionable Event Enable Register e Measurement Event Enable Register e ESE 0 Clears the Standard Event Status Enable Register Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 16 Remote Operation Figure 11 5 Standard event status To Event Summary Bit ESB of Status Byte Register See Figure 11 9 Figure 11 6 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Standard Event B4 B3 Status Register PON Power On URQ User Request CME Command Error EXE Execution Error DDE Device Dependent Error QYE Query Error OPC Operation Complete Operation event status amp Logical AND OR Logical OR OR To Operation Summary Bit OSB of Status Byte Register See Figure 11 9 TE Idle Filt Trig Meas
258. nt configuration as the USER power on setup The RESTR key restores the instrument to the factory defaults or the user saved defaults Perform the following steps to save the present setup as the power on default configuration Configure the instrument for your measurement application Press SAVE 1 2 3 Use the amp and keys to display YES or NO 4 Press ENTER The instrument will power on to this USER default setup NOTE Toassure that the proper filter state is recalled set the analog and digital filters before saving the user setup See Section 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com To restore factory or user settings 1 Press RESTR 2 Use the amp and keys to display FACT factory or USER defaults 3 Press ENTER NOTE The basic measurement procedure in the next section Section 2 assumes factory defaults Table 1 2 Reset the instrument to the factory default settings when following that step by step procedure Table 1 2 Factory defaults Setting Factory Default Analog output On Gain M 1 0 Offset B 0 Relative REL Off Autozeroing modes Front Autozero On Autozero On LSYNC Off Buffer No effect Delta Off Function DCV1 GPIB No effect On at factory Address No effect 7 at factory Language No effect SCPI at factory Key click On Limits Off Beeper Never High limit 1 1 Low limit 1 1 High limit 2 2 Low limi
259. nt reading The resolution of this reading tracks the display resolution of the instrument An overflow reading reads as 9 9e37 with no units Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCPI Commands 15 7 CHANnel Corresponds the instrument reading to the channel number Channel 0 corresponds to the sensor used to measure the internal temperature of the Model 2182 Channel 1 and Channel 2 corresponds to the two input channels of the instrument For external scanning the number corresponds to the channel number of the switching card UNITs This element attaches the function unit to the reading and the channel unit internal or external to the channel number An external channel refers to the channel for an external switch system This element is not available for the binary formats The ASCII format in Figure 15 1 shows the byte order of the data string Remember that the byte order can only be reversed for the binary formats When using this command to add an element you must include all elements that you want in the format For example if the reading is already specified and you want to add the channel you must include the READing parameter form elem chan read Data elements for the item list can be listed in any order but they are always sent in the order shown in Figure 15 1 STATus subsystem The STATus subsystem is used to control the status registers
260. nt register Note 2 ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 ENABle Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register QUEStionable Questionable event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 ENABle Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register PRESet Return status registers to default states QUEue Path to access Error Queue NEXT Read the most recent message Note 4 ENABle lt list gt Specify error and status messages for Error Queue _ Note 5 ENABle Read the enabled messages DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in queue Note 5 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clears all messages from Error Queue Notes 1 Commands in this subsystem are not affected by RST or SYSTem PRESet The effects of cycling power CLS and STATus PRESet are explained by the following notes 2 Event Registers Power up and CLS clears all bits STATus PRESet has no effect 3 Enable Registers Power up and STATus PRESet clears all bits CLS has no effect 4 Error Queue Power up and CLS clears all bits of the registers 5 Error Queue Messages Power up clears list of messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 12 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14
261. nt technique is used to cancel internal offsets in the amplifier With Front Autozero disabled the second A D measurement cycle is not performed Benefits of Front Autozero disabled e Twice as fast e Lower Pumpout Current noise Drawbacks of Front Autozero disabled High drift 20u V C in normal voltage mode High offset voltage 500uV in normal voltage mode NOTE To increase the speed of Delta measurements disable Front Autozero The two measurement cycle polarity reversal technique used by Front Autozero is not required for Delta Delta uses its own polarity reversal technique to cancel offsets Delta measurements are covered in Section 5 Autozero When Autozero for the second amplifier is disabled the offset gain and internal reference temperature measurements are not performed This increases measurement speed a few at 1PLC However the zero gain and temperature reference points will eventually drift resulting in inaccurate readings for the input signal It is recommended that Autozero only be disabled for short periods of time When Autozero is enabled after being off for a long period of time the internal reference points will not be updated immediately This will initially result in inaccurate measurements especially if the ambient temperature has changed by several degrees A faster update of reference points can be forced by setting a faster integration rate Rate With Autozero disabled pressing t
262. nts 2182A 2182A 2182A A D A D A D I High esas 6221 l Source 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A A D A D A D A D A D A D l Low Pulse Delta Pulse Delta Pulse Delta Reading Reading Reading i 1st 2nd Nth i 1st Pulse Delta 2nd Pulse Delta gt lt 3rd Pulse Delta Cycle Cycle Cycle C Differential Conductance measurements 622x l Source Start lt 2nd Diff Cond Cycle gt i ie 3rd Diff Cond Cycle i4 4th Diff Cond Cycle gt Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance l 5 Test system configurations There are two test system configurations that can be used for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance measurements and are shown in Figure I 2 One is for front panel stand alone operation and the other is for remote programming PC control system Both systems use serial communications via RS 232 interface between the Model 622x and the Model 2182 2182A The Model 622x sends setup commands to the Model 2182 2182A and the Model 2182 2182A sends Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance readings to the buffer of the Model 622x Once the test is started trigger synchronization between the two instruments is controlled by the Trigger Link Figure I 2 Test system configurations A Stand alone system front panel op
263. nts SRQ X Controlled by external device Multiline LLO Local Lockout Low Locks out local operation Universal DCL Device Clear Low Returns device to default conditions SPE Serial Enable Low Enables serial polling SPD Serial Poll Disable Low Disables serial polling Addressed SDC Selective Device Clear Low Returns unit to default conditions GTL Go To Local Low Returns device to local Unaddressed UNL Unlisten Low Removes all listeners from the bus UNT Untalk Low Removes any talkers from the bus Common High Programs IEEE 488 2 compatible instruments for common operations SCPI High Programs SCPI compatible instruments for particular operations Uniline commands ATN IFC and REN are asserted only by the controller SRQ is asserted by an external device EOI may be asserted either by the controller or other devices depending on the direction of data transfer The following is a description of each command Each command is sent by setting the corresponding bus line true REN Remote Enable REN is sent to set up instruments on the bus for remote operation When REN is true devices will be removed from the local mode Depending on device configuration all front panel controls except the LOCAL button if the device is so equipped may be locked out when REN is true Generally REN should be sent before attempting to program instruments over the bus EOI End or Identify EOI is used t
264. nuous lt b gt Enable or disable continuous initiation C Note 1 FETch Request the last reading s D READ Perform an ABORt INITiate and a FETch E TRIGger Trigger commands SOURce lt name gt Select control source IMMediate TIMer F IMMediate MANual BUS or EXTernal TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 1 COUNt lt n gt Set trigger count 1 to 9999 or INF Note 2 DELay lt n gt Set delay 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto delay G SIGNal Loop around control source H SAMPle Sample counter COUNt lt n gt Set sample count to 1024 I 1 SENSe SENSe Subsystem HOLD Reading Hold commands J WINDow lt n gt Set Hold window in 0 01 to 20 1 COUNt lt n gt Set Hold count 2 to 100 5 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Hold OFF SYSTem SYSTem Subsystem BEEPer Beeper control STATe lt b gt Enable or disable the beeper ON RST Restore RST defaults see Default column of this table Places 2182 in the idle state Notes 1 Defaults for continuous initiation SYSTem PRESet enables continuous initiation RST disables continuous initiation 2 Defaults for trigger count SYSTem PRESet sets the count to INF infinite RST sets the count to 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Triggering 7 17 Reference A ABORt With continuous initiation disabled the 2182 g
265. o instrument setup configurations available to the user user defined or factory default Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started 1 3 General information Warranty information Warranty information is located at the front of this manual Should your Model 2182 require warranty service contact the Keithley representative or authorized repair facility in your area for further information When returning the instrument for repair be sure to fill out and include the service form at the back of this manual to provide the repair facility with the necessary information Contact information Worldwide phone numbers are listed at the front of this manual If you have any questions please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Application Engineers at 1 800 348 3735 U S and Canada only Safety symbols and terms The following symbols and terms may be found on the instrument or used in this manual The A symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on an instrument shows that high voltage may be present on the terminal s Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The WARNING heading used in this manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully bef
266. o positively identify the last byte in a multi byte transfer sequence thus allowing data words of various lengths to be transmitted easily IFC Interface Clear IFC is used to clear the interface and return all devices to the talker and listener idle states Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com are 1 U0q X 8OIG 4d LOIA q 30N T8LZ PPOW Aq payuawajdu you TOYLNOD IAVL LOL pue GANDIANOONN 110d 1411WYVd Add UNDIANOD 110d 1ITIVAVd Ddd Das 99d dNOUYD dNOYD GNVWWOD GNVWWOD AYVGNODAS AYVWINd OVL OV ON 9v dNOND dNOND dNOND dNOND ss3XAAVY SsIAAAY GNVWWOD GNYWWOD Vv N3Lst TYSXJAINA e ad o INN SL O INA a SL sn IS SL 1 RE IAE pe u oge U vl N oge lt vl 5 Su OS vl Oe ee a O w 6z l Ww 67 L so XD L wo E I T 87 ZL 1 97 gt ZL f S4 dd ZL o o Lile A LT LL z Lt LL osa 1 LL L L 0 L z 97 Z OL 97 OL ans 411 OL ol j lo A SZ A 6 l Gz 6 6 GdS W3 LOL LH 6 L o ojfu x y vz X 8 H ve 8 8 ddS NVD 19D sg 8 o o o L M 3 EZ M Z D EZ Z Z F qld 149 Z Ly LILIO J 7 A 9 d TZ 9 9 x NAS OV 9 o f l o n LZ n S q LZ s s sNdd VN Odd ONI s a E o a SE 30 p oz l v d oz v v 1a 70d das 103 v o o t4tifo s 2 6l S 9 6L 20 X14 L o 0 1 q gL X z g gL z z i zoa XLS z o ti ojo b e ZL fe L v ZL L L
267. o test switches Measurement techniques Techniques used to measure resistances in the normal range are not generally suitable for making low resistance measurements because of errors caused by voltage drops across the test leads To overcome these limitations low resistance measurements are usually made using the 4 wire Kelvin connections shown in Figure 2 10 A current source forces the current I through an unknown resistance developing a voltage across that device Even though the test lead resistance Ry gap is present it does not affect the current through Rpyr because I is assumed to be a constant current source with high output impedance Also since the voltmeter has a very high input resistance very low leakage current the current through the sense leads will be negligible and the voltage drop across Ry gap Will be essentially zero Thus the voltage measured by the meter will be essentially the same as the voltage across the unknown resistance Rput Figure 2 10 4 Wire low resistance measurement technique R R V OFFSET Current Source Voltmeter Since the current through the measured resistance and the voltage across the device are both known the value of that resistance can easily be determined from Ohm s law Rput Vm Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 24 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Compensating for thermal EMFs Alth
268. oes into the idle state With continuous initiation enabled operation continues at the top of the trigger model B _INITiate Whenever the instrument is operating within the trigger model sending this command causes an error and will be ignored C INITiate CONTinuous With continuous initiation enabled you cannot use the READ command or set sample count SAMPle COUNTt greater than one D FETch See Section 13 for details on this Signal Oriented Measurement Command E READ Use this one query command to perform the tasks of the three commands See Section 13 for details on this Signal Oriented Measurement Command F TRIGger SOURce With the timer control source selected use the TRIGger TIMer command to set the interval G DELay AUTO Auto delay period is Smsec for the 100V range and Imsec for all other voltage ranges Disabling auto delay sets the delay time to 0 H TRIGger SIGNal Send this action command to bypass the control source when you do not wish to wait for the programmed event to occur The instrument must be waiting at the control source for the event when this command is sent Otherwise an error occurs and the command is ignored I SAMPle COUNt A sample count gt 1 specifies how many readings will automatically be stored in the buffer However with continuous initiation enabled you cannot set the sample count greater than one J SENSe HOLD See Reading hold autosettle located in t
269. of an enabled Rel mX b or Percent operation There are two sets of limits Limit 1 uses high and low limits HI1 and LO1 as does Limit 2 HI2 and LO2 However the HI IN LO status message only applies to Limit 1 Figure 8 1 illustrates the following limits which are the factory defaults Limit 1 HI 1V and LOI 1V Limit 2 HI2 2V and LO2 2V Figure 8 1 Default limits LO X IN xX HI gt e 2V 1V 0 1V 2V LO2 LO1 HI1 HI2 Limit 1 Limit 2 For the limits shown in Figure 8 1 a reading of 1 5V is outside Limit 1 which is the primary limit Therefore the message HI will be displayed A beeper is also available for limit testing There are three beeper options NEVER OUTSIDE and INSIDE These options are explained as follows NEVER With this option the beeper is disabled Only the HI IN LO status message is used for the Limit 1 test OUTSIDE With this option the beeper sounds when the reading is outside HI or LO of Limit 1 Again referring to Figure 8 1 a 1 5V reading is outside HI Limit 1 Therefore the beeper will sound INSIDE With this option the beeper sounds when the reading is inside Limit 1 and or Limit 2 If the reading is inside Limit 1 the beeper will sound at its normal pitch If the reading is outside Limit 1 but inside Limit 2 the beeper will sound at a lower pitch The beeper will not sound for readings outside Limit 2 For the limits shown in Figur
270. oltage and Temperature Measurements Figure 2 7 shows temperature only connections using an ice bath as a simulated reference junction Note that the connection points for the input cable and the thermocouple wires are immersed in the ice bath Figure 2 7 Connections temperature simulated reference 2107 Thermocouple Input Cable Test Circuit Ice Bath Cable to thermocouple wire connection one of two Voltage and temperature connections Channel 1 should be used for voltage measurements since it supports a wider range of measurements leaving Channel 2 to measure temperature A connection example using the internal reference junction for temperature measurements is shown in Figure 2 8 In this example Channel 1 measures the voltage drop across the DUT and Channel 2 measures the temperature of the DUT Notice the jumper wire from the thermocouple to test circuit low If the case of the DUT is metal and already connected to test circuit low the jumper would not be needed Also if there is enough thermal bonding between the DUT and test circuit low the thermocouple can be connected directly to low Figure 2 8 Connections voltage and temperature internal reference Copper wire soldered directly Cable to copper to LEMO connector one of wire connection two one of two J Thermocouple HI o y CH 1 DCV1 L D LO o HI o CH 2 TEMP2 Test Circuit LO o 2182 aa Thermocouple wire
271. ommand does not trigger a reading When appropriate This is a much better choice than the FETCh query because it can t return the same reading twice This would be a good query to use when triggering by BUS or EXTERNAL because it will wait for a reading to complete if a reading is in progress The CALC DATA FRESh query is similar to the DATA FRESh query but applies to readings which have math applied to them e g MX B scaling SENSe 1 DATA LATest What it does This query will return the last reading the instrument had regardless of what may have invalidated that reading such as changing ranges or functions Limitations This query is fully capable of returning meaningless old data When appropriate If for some reason the user wanted the last completed reading even after changing ranges or other measurement settings which would invalidate the old reading The CALC DATA LATest query is similar to the DATA LAT query but applies to readings which have math applied to them e g MX B scaling Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Measurement Queries H 5 Examples One shot reading DC volts no trigger fastest rate RST INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe 10 Use fixed range for fastest readings SENSe VOLTage DC NPLC 0 01 Use lowest NPLC
272. on Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com F 12 IEEE 488 Bus Overview IEEE command groups Command groups supported by the Model 2182 are listed in Table F 5 Common commands and SCPI commands are not included in this list Table F 5 IEEE command groups HANDSHAKE COMMAND GROUP NDAC NOT DATA ACCEPTED NRFD NOT READY FOR DATA DAV DATA VALID UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUP ATN ATTENTION DCL DEVICE CLEAR IFC INTERFACE CLEAR REN REMOTE ENABLE SPD SERIAL POLL DISABLE SPE SERIAL POLL ENABLE ADDRESS COMMAND GROUP LISTEN LAG LISTEN ADDRESS GROUP MLA MY LISTEN ADDRESS UNL UNLISTEN TALK TAG TALK ADDRESS GROUP MTA MY TALK ADDRESS UNT UNTALK OTA OTHER TALK ADDRESS ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP ACG ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP GTL GO TO LOCAL SDC SELECTIVE DEVICE CLEAR STATUS COMMAND GROUP RQS REQUEST SERVICE SRQ SERIAL POLL REQUEST STB STATUS BYTE EOI END Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 Bus Overview F 13 Interface function codes The interface function codes which are part of the IEEE 488 standards define an instrument s ability to support various interface functions and should not be confused with programming commands found elsewhere in this manual The interface function codes for the Model 2182 are listed in Table F 6 Table F 6 Model 2182 interface functio
273. on of the TEEE 488 connector Figure 11 3 IEEE 488 connector location Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 8 Remote Operation 2 Tighten the screws securely making sure not to over tighten them 3 Connect any additional connectors from other instruments as required for your application 4 Make sure that the other end of the cable is properly connected to the controller Most controllers are equipped with an IEEE 488 style connector but a few may require a different type of connecting cable See your controllers instruction manual for information about properly connecting to the IEEE 488 bus NOTE You can only have 15 devices connected to an IEEE 488 bus including the controller The maximum cable length is either 20 meters or two meters times the number of devices whichever is less Not observing these limits may cause erratic bus operation Primary address selection The Model 2182 ships from the factory with a GPIB address of 07 When the instrument powers up it momentarily displays the primary address You can set the address to a value of 0 30 Do not assign the same address to another device or to a controller that is on the same GPIB bus Usually controller addresses are 0 or 21 but see the controllers instruction manual for details Make sure the address of the controller is the same as that specified in the controllers programming language
274. onnections may contribute enough thermal EMFs to corrupt the measurement The Relative feature of the Model 2182 can be used to null out this offset as follows 1 Connect the test circuit shown in Figure 8 1 but leave the current source disconnected 2 Using the lowest possible range or autorange measure the offset voltage 3 Press REL to zero the display of the Model 2182 4 Connect the current source and test the resistors NOTE As long as all the resistor leads in the batch are made of the same metal the Rel value obtained for the first resistor should be satisfactory for each subsequent resistor Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 2 Stepping and Scanning Step Scan overview Summarizes the stepping and scanning operations Front panel trigger models Uses the trigger model to illustrate how stepping and scanning operates e Stepping Scanning controls Covers the front panel keys used to configure and control stepping scanning e Stepping Scanning examples Provides examples for internal stepping and scanning and external scanning SCPI programming Covers the SCPI commands used for stepping and scanning e Application Uses internal scanning to produce an I V curve for a DUT Test Equipment Depot
275. ont panel display on or off Note 1 vV ENABle Query display state vV WINDow 1 Path to control user test messages Vv TEXT Note 2 Vv DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message a up to 12 characters vV DATA Read text message vV STATe lt b gt Enable or disable text message mode Note 3 vV STATe Query state of text message mode vV Notes 1 RST and SYSTem PRESet have no effect on the display circuitry Pressing LOCAL or cycling power enables ON the display circuit 2 RST and SYSTem PRESet have no effect on a user defined message Pressing LOCAL or cycling power can cels all user defined messages 3 RST and SYSTem PRESet have no effect on the state of the message mode Pressing LOCAL or cycling power disables OFF the message mode Table 14 4 FORMat command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI FORMat Sec 15 DATA lt type gt lt length gt Specify data format ASCii SREal or DREal ASCii V DATA Query data format v BORDer lt name gt Specify byte order NORMal or SWAPped SWAPped V BORDer Query byte order vV ELEMents lt name gt Specify data elements READing CHANnel READing vV and UNITs ELEMents Query data format elements V Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 6 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14 5 OUTPut command summary Defaul
276. ontrolled by two 8 bit registers the Status Byte Register and the Service Request Enable Register Figure 11 9 shows the structure of these registers Figure 11 9 Status byte and service request Status Summary Messages _ Read by Serial Poll Service R Request STB OSB B6 ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB Status Byte S Generation erial Poll B7 we B5 BO Register A A Read by STB amp La OR Le EB lt SRE OSB ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB Service SRE B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Request Enable Register OSB Operation Summary Bit amp Logical AND MSS Master Summary Status OR Logical OR RQS Request for Service ESB Event Summary Bit MAV Message Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit Status byte register The summary messages from the status registers and queues are used to set or clear the appropriate bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register These bits do not latch and their states 0 or 1 are solely dependent on the summary messages 0 or 1 For example if the Standard Event Status Register is read its register will clear As a result its summary message will reset to 0 which in turn will clear the ESB bit in the Status Byte Registe
277. onverted into an Ohms W Siemens S or Power W reading by the Model 622x With Power W units selected a Pulse Delta reading can be expressed and displayed as a Peak power reading or an Average power reading W peak power I x V W Average power I x V x Duty Cycle Pulse Delta outputs Pulse Delta output is made up of one or more Pulse Delta cycles Each cycle is made up of three output pulses low high and low The time period for a cycle is adjustable and is the same for all cycles The output pulses have an adjustable pulse width which is the same for all pulses There are two basic Pulse Delta output types Fixed output and Sweep output For Fixed output all high and low pulses are fixed for all Pulse Delta cycles in the test For Sweep output the sweep SWP function of the Model 6221 is used to output a staircased loga rithmic or user specified custom pulse sweep Fixed output Figure I 5 shows one Pulse Delta cycle for a Fixed output As shown the Model 6221 out puts a low pulse a high pulse and then another low pulse during every Pulse Delta cycle The pulse width is adjustable and is the same for all high and low pulses The cycle inter val is also adjustable and is based on the set number of power line cycles The Pulse Delta interval shown in Figure I 5 is set for 5 PLC power line cycles which is the default set ting After the set interval expires the next Pulse Delta cycle starts if pulse count i
278. or ON Enable line cycle synchronization Description When enabled A D conversions are synchronized with the power line frequency This reduces noise at the expense of speed Line cycle synchronization LSYNC is not available for integration rates lt 1 PLC regardless of the LSYNC setting NOTE See Performance considerations in Section 2 for more information on LSYNC LFRequency SYSTem LFRequency Read power line frequency setting Description On power up the Model 2182 detects the line power frequency and automatically selects the proper line frequency setting The line frequency setting can be checked using this command The response message will be 50 or 60 The value 50 indicates that the line frequency is set for 50Hz or 400Hz while 60 indicates that it is set for 60Hz Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 15 18 Additional SCP Commands BEEPer command STATe lt b gt SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable beeper 0 or OFF Disable beeper Description This command is used to enable or disable the beeper for limit tests and HOLD KCLick command KCLick lt b gt SYSTem KCLick lt b gt Enable or disable keyclick Parameters lt b gt 1orON Enable keyclick 0 or OFF Disable keyclick Description This command is used to enable or disable the keyclick The keyclick can also be
279. or an acquired decimal value of 48 the binary equivalent is 00110000 This binary value indicates that bits 4 and 5 of the Status Byte Register are set The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows Bit 0 Measurement Status MSB A set bit indicates that a measurement event has occurred The event can be identified by reading the Measurement Event Status Register using the STATus MEASurement command see Section 5 for details Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Error Available EAV A set bit indicates that an error or status message is present in the Error Queue The message can be read using one of the following SCPI commands SYSTem ERRor STATus QUEue See Section 15 for more information Bit 3 Questionable Summary Bit QSB A set bit indicates that a calibration error has occurred Bit 4 Message Available MAV A set bit indicates that a message is present in the Output Queue The message is sent to the computer when the Model 2182 is addressed to talk Bit 5 Event Summary Bit ESB A set bit indicates that an enabled standard event has occurred The event can be identified by reading the Standard Event Status Register using the ESE query command Bit 6 Master Summary Status MSS Request Service RQS A set bit indicates that one or more enabled Status Byte conditions have occurred Read the MSS bit by using the STB query command or perform a serial poll to detect the occurrence of a service
280. or disable Rel OFF vV STATe Query state of Rel vV ACQuire Use input signal as Rel Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 8 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14 7 SENSe command summary cont Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI REFerence Query Rel value V LPASs Control analog filter for DCV1 Sec 3 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter OFF STATe Query state of analog filter DFILter Configure and control digital filter Sec 3 WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing TCONtrol Query filter type STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON STATe Query state of digital filter CHANnel2 Channel 2 voltage commands OFF LQMode lt b gt Enable or disable low charge injection mode Sec 2 LQMode Query state of low charge injection mode RANGe Configure channel 2 measurement range Sec 3 V UPPer lt n gt Select range 0 to 12 volts 12 Vv UPPer Query range value V AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable autorange ON V AUTO Query state of autorange V REFerence lt n gt Specify reference Rel value for Channel 2 0 Sec 4 V 12 to 12 volts STATe lt b gt Enable or disab
281. or enable Filter for both channels FILT annunciator turns on However remember that even though Filter can be enabled for both channels only the Channel 1 Filter settings are used NOTE The filter configuration menu cannot be accessed while in Ratio To make filter configuration changes you must first disable Ratio This can be done by returning to Channel I press DCV1 Rel Relative considerations As explained in Section 3 a separate Rel value can be established for each voltage channel When Ratio is enabled any established Rel values are applied to the respective channels before the calculation is performed Ratio is calculated as follows Ratio Filt V1 V1 Rel Filt V2 V2 Rel where Filt V1 is the filtered reading for Channel 1 voltage input V1 Rel is the Rel value established for Channel 1 Filt V2 is the filtered reading for Channel 2 voltage input V2 Rel is the Rel value established for Channel 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 5 NOTE The previous calculation shows Filter enabled If Filter is not used remove the Filt component from the calculation When Ratio is enabled the state on or off of the REL annunciator depends on which measurement function was last selected If on DCV1 when Ratio is enabled the state of the REL annunciator on or off will indicate the state enabled or disabled of Rel for DCV
282. or temperature readings CALL SEND 7 sens volt digits 4 status CALL SEND 7 sens temp digits 5 status Set volts for 3 digits Set temp for 5 digits Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 3 6 Rate Range Digits Rate and Filter The RATE key selects the integration time of the A D converter This is the period of time the input signal is measured also known as aperture The integration time affects the amount of reading noise as well as the ultimate reading rate of the instrument The integration time is specified in parameters based on a number of power line cycles NPLC where 1 PLC for 60Hz is 16 67msec 1 60 and 1 PLC for 50Hz and 400Hz is 20msec 1 50 In general the Model 2182 has a parabola like shape for its speed vs noise characteristics and is shown in Figure 3 1 The Model 2182 is optimized for the 1 PLC to 5 PLC reading rate At these speeds Lowest noise region in the graph the Model 2182 will make corrections for its own internal drift and still be fast enough to settle a step response lt 100ms Figure 3 1 Speed vs noise characteristics A Lowest Voltage noise Noise region a aaa 166 7us 16 67ms 83 33ms Is Aperture Time You can have a separate rate setting for voltage and temperature functions The rate setting for a voltage function applies to the other voltage function For example if you set
283. ore performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading used in this manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Inspection The Model 2182 was carefully inspected electrically and mechanically before shipment After unpacking all items from the shipping carton check for any obvious signs of physical damage that may have occurred during transit There may be a protective film over the display lens which can be removed Report any damage to the shipping agent immediately Save the original packing carton for possible future shipment The following items are included with every Model 2182 order e Model 2182 Nanovoltmeter with line cord e Model 2107 4 Input Cable Four alligator clips that attach to the copper lugs of the Model 2107 Input Cable e DeoxIt copper cleaning solution e Accessories as ordered e Certificate of calibration e Model 2182 User s Manual P N 2182 900 00 e Model 2182 Service Manual P N 2182 902 00 e Manual Addenda pertains to any improvements or changes concerning the instrument or manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 4 Getting Started If an additional manual is required order the appropriate manual package The manual packages include a manual and any pertinent addenda Options and accessories The following options and accessories are available from Ke
284. ough the 4 wire measurement method minimizes the effects of lead resistances other factors can affect low resistance measurement accuracy Thermal EMFs and other effects can add an extraneous DC offset voltage Vorrspr in Figure 2 10 to the measured voltage The Relative feature of the Model 2182 can be used to null out the offset voltage In general this is done by disconnecting the current source and zeroing the reading on the Model 2182 by pressing the REL key see Measuring voltage and temperature Nulling thermal EMFs The DC offset voltage is effectively cancelled as long as it remains comparatively steady If the offset voltage varies the DC current reversal technique should instead be used The DC current reversal technique to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs requires a source that can output currents equal in magnitude but opposite in polarity In general a voltage measurement is performed on both the positive and negative alternations of the current source The averaged difference of those two readings cancels out the thermal EMF component of the measurements The Model 2182 can automatically perform the measurements and then calculate and display the result by using the Delta measurement mode For Delta measurements a Keithley SourceMeter Model 2400 2410 or 2420 or the Keithley Model 220 Current Source can be used to provide current reversal Details on performing Delta measurements are provided in Section 5 Testing sw
285. ource 0 lees cece eeeeseeeseteeeesetseeeseenneeaees 5 8 Delta measurement connections 00 eee eseeeeseeeeeeseceeeeseeeceeaeseeeeaeenseeseeeaeae 5 11 Triggering timing diagram 0 cee eeecceescceseeceteeseneceaeeesaeceaeeesceceaeeeseeseaeeetaeeeaeens 5 14 Calibrating 1 1 0 divider icc ssereds cei ceiieteteecs catia iin E EEN Ee 5 18 Test circuit Fixed I Vary H oc cescceecccssesseceseeseeeceeeeseecseeeseeseaeeseneeeaeens 5 20 H V Curve Fixed I ccscccscssedscccscesesccesdedosestevescivesandecseassegesiesessvavcetesesorecersdeneeste 5 21 SourceMeter output 2 point custom SWEEP sesssseeessresesrsrrstesretrsreresrereereseees 5 21 I V Curve Fixed H wo ccccccccccssssssecceeesssscceecesssaceececessseeeeecessseaeeeeeesssaeeeeeeees 5 22 Test circuit Fixed H Vary D serce eiii 5 23 SourceMeter output 30 point custom SWEEP ssessseesesreresresrerrseeresrererrrseees 5 25 Trigger link connections using two Model 21828 eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 26 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 6 Figure 6 1 7 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 8 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 9 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 11 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 11 8 Figure 11 9 Figure 11 10
286. overed by the warranty e Channel 1 HI and LO inputs have a maximum measurement capability of 120V peak These inputs are protected to 150V peak to any terminal or 350V peak to chassis e Channel 2 HI and LO inputs have a maximum measurement capability of 12V peak Channel 2 HI is protected to 150V peak to any terminal and Channel 2 LO is protected to 70V peak to Channel 1 LO Both inputs are protected to 350V peak to chassis NOTE Asa general rule use Channel 1 whenever possible to measure voltage below 1V If using Channel 2 to measure lt 1V and the impedance between Channel 2 LO and Channel I LO is gt 100kQ pumpout current may be high enough to corrupt measurements In this case the Low Charge Injection mode can be enabled to reduce pumpout current at the expense of increased measurement noise See Performance considerations Pumpout current low charge injection mode for details Connection techniques Copper to copper connections should be used wherever possible in the test circuit to minimize thermal EMFs that could corrupt measurements see Measurement error external causes for information on thermal EMFs Any solder connections to your test circuit require the use of silver solder to minimize thermal EMFs You can order a 20 foot length of silver solder from Keithley part number 2182 325A Included with the solder is an MSDS sheet listing the solder chemical contents CAUTION Silver solder has a high tempera
287. ower is then calculated as follows Power AvgVolt x AvgCurr Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Index Symbols CLS Clear Status 12 3 ESE Event Enable 12 4 ESE Event Enable Query 12 4 ESR Event Status Register Query 12 6 IDN Identification Query 12 7 OPC Operation Complete 12 8 OPC Operation Complete Query 12 10 RCL Recall 12 11 RST Reset 12 12 SAV Save 12 12 SRE Service Request Enable 12 12 SRE Service Request Enable Query 12 12 STB Status Byte Query 12 14 TRG Trigger 12 15 TST Self Test Query 12 15 WAI Wait to Continue 12 16 Numerics A 4 Wire low resistance measurement 2 23 ACAL calibration 2 5 Additional SCPI Commands 15 1 Address commands F 9 Addressed multiline commands F 9 Analog filter 3 8 Analog Output 10 1 Analog output connections 10 5 Analog output rel 10 5 Application I V curves using internal scan 9 14 Applications 2 23 Autoranging 3 4 Autozeroing modes 2 6 Baud rate flow control and terminator 11 27 Bipolar source 5 8 Buffer 6 1 Buffer operations 6 2 Buffer statistics 6 4 Bus commands F 6 Bus description F 2 Bus lines F 4 Bus management lines F 4 Cables connectors and adapters 1 4 CALCulate command summary 14 3 Calibrating resistor network dividers 5 18 CALibration command summary user a
288. ows Ems V4kTRF where Epws rms value of the noise voltage k Boltzmann s constant 1 38 x 10 2J K T Temperature K R Source resistance ohms F Noise bandwidth Hz At a room temperature of 293K 20 C the above equation simplifies to Epms 1 27 x 100 RF Since the peak to peak noise is five times the rms value 99 of the time the peak to peak noise can be equated as follows E_p 6 35 x 10 JRE For example with a source resistance of 10k the noise over a 0 5Hz bandwidth at room temperature will be E 6 35 x 107 10 x 10 0 5 E 45nV Minimizing source resistance noise From the above examples it is obvious that noise can be reduced in several ways 1 lower the temperature 2 reduce the source resistance and 3 narrow the bandwidth Of these three lowering the resistance is the least practical because the signal voltage will be reduced more than the noise For example decreasing the resistance of a current shunt by a factor of 100 will also reduce the voltage by a factor of 100 but the noise will be decreased only by a factor of 10 Very often cooling the source is the only practical method available to reduce noise Again however the available reduction is not as large as it might seem because the reduction is related to the square root of the change in temperature For example to cut the noise in half the temperature must be decreased from 293K to 73 25K a four fold decrease T
289. p the current values for points PO through P29 are shown in Figure 5 11 e In Step 7 enable line synchronization on both Model 2182s To access control press SHIFT and then LSYNC NOTE Optimum synchronization among all instruments is achieved when Model 2182 line synchronization is enabled and autozero is disabled Autozero cannot be disabled from the front panel of the Model 2152 When controlling this application over the bus use the following commands for the Model 2182s iSYSTem LSYNc STATe ON Enable 2182 Line Synchronization iSYSTem AZERo STATe OFF Disable 2182 Autozero Autozero should only be disabled for short periods of time After performing a sweep re enable Autozero For details on Autozero see Section 2 InStep 9 set the buffers of both Model 2182s to store the Delta readings If performing a 30 point sweep set both buffers to store 30 Delta readings Log sweep If your test requires currents that span two or more decades you can configure the SourceMeter to output a log sweep The 30 point sweep in Figure 5 11 is confined to the 10pA 100uA decade If for example you want to expand the sweep to span three current decades the next 30 sweep points would be used for the 100uA 200pA and the 500nA amplitudes The last 30 sweep points would be used for the 1mA 2mA and 5mA amplitudes The I V data points can then be graphed using a logarithmic linear scale Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street
290. pment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com External triggering example In a typical test system you may want to close a channel and then measure the DUT Triggering 7 9 connected to the channel with the Model 2182 Such a test system is shown in Figure 7 6 which uses a Model 2182 to measure eight DUTs switched by a Model 7168 Nanovolt Scanner Card in a Model 7001 7002 Switch System See Section 9 for details on external scanning Figure 7 6 DUT test system H o DCV1 Output Channel 1 Bor e o L S o Channel 2 a a L J o SS Channel 8 ee Q o 7168 Nanovolt Scanner Card The Trigger Link connections for this test system are shown in Figure 7 7 Trigger Link of the Model 2182 is connected to Trigger Link either IN or OUT of the Model 7001 7002 Note that with the default trigger settings on the Model 7001 7002 line 1 is an input and line 2 is an output This complements the trigger lines on the Model 2182 Figure 7 7 Trigger link connections 7001 or 7002 Switch System Trigger Link Trigger Link Cable 8501 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2182 Nanovoltmeter Trigger 7 10 Triggering For this example the Models 2182 and 7001 7002 are configured as follows Model 2182 Factory defaults restore
291. pply to command words that exceed four letters If the fourth letter of the command word is a vowel delete it and all the letters after it immediate imm Rule exception The short form version of the following command uses only the first two letters of the word TCouple tc If the fourth letter of the command word is a consonant retain it but drop all the letters after it format form If the command contains a question mark or a non optional number included in the command word you must include it in the short form version delay del Command words or characters that are enclosed in brackets are optional and need not be included in the program message Program messages A program message is made up of one or more command words sent by the computer to the instrument Each common command is simply a three letter acronym preceded by an asterisk SCPI commands are categorized in the STATus subsystem and are used to help explain how command words are structured to formulate program messages Command structure STATus Path Root OPERation Path ENABle lt NRf gt Command and parameter ENABle Query command PRESet Command Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 25 Single command messages The above command structure has three levels The first level is made up of the root command STATus and serves
292. r Bit B6 in the Status Byte Register is one of the following e The Master Summary Status MSS bit sent in response to the STB command indicates the status of any set bits with corresponding enable bits set The Request for Service RQS bit sent in response to a serial poll indicates which device was requesting service by polling on the SRQ line For a description of the other bits in the Status Byte Register see Section 12 Common Commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 20 Remote Operation The IEEE 488 2 standard uses the STB common query command to read the Status Byte Register When reading the Status Byte Register using the STB command bit B6 is called the MSS bit None of the bits in the Status Byte Register are cleared when using the STB command to read it The IEEE 488 1 standard has a serial poll sequence that also reads the Status Byte Register and is better suited to detect a service request SRQ When using the serial poll bit B6 is called the RQS bit Serial polling causes bit B6 RQS to reset Serial polling is discussed in more detail later in this section Any of the following operations clear all bits of the Status Byte Register e Cycling power e Sending the CLS common command NOTE The MAV bit may or may not be cleared Service request enable register This register is programmed by you and serves as
293. r key Press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal measurement display state NOTES While the Filter is enabled FILT annunciator on changes to the configuration take effect as soon as they are made With Filter disabled FILT annunciator off changes to the configuration take place when the Filter is enabled If both the analog and digital filters are configured to be off the digital filter will automatically turn on if or when the Filter is enabled FILT annunciator on This ensures that filtering analog andlor digital is being applied whenever the FILT annunciator is on While the filtering operation is in progress the FILT annunciator blinks Readings will continue to be processed i e displayed stored sent over the bus sent to analog output but they could be questionable When the FILT annunciator stops blinking the filter has settled Changing function or range causes the Filter to reset The Filter then assumes the state enabled or disabled and configuration for that function or range When both channels are being measured for Ratio the Filter state enabled or disabled and configuration for channel 1 DCV1 is used Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 3 12 Range Digits Rate and Filter SCPI programming filter NOTE All the filter commands are part of the SENSe Subsystem Table 3 4 SCPI commands filter Co
294. r For example with sample count set to 5 the five measured readings will be stored in the buffer If the trigger model is configured to repeat the sample readings i e trigger count 2 those five new readings will overwrite the original five readings in the buffer Output trigger The Model 2182 will send one or more output triggers The output trigger is applied to the Trigger Link connector on the rear panel It can be used to trigger an external instrument to perform an operation The trigger model can be configured to output a trigger after the completion of a series of measurements or after every measurement For example with the sample counter set to 10 and the trigger counter set to one a trigger will be sent after the 10 measurements are performed If instead the trigger counter is set to 10 and the sample counter is set to 1 a trigger will be sent after each measurement Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 7 16 Triggering Triggering commands Commands for triggering are summarized in Table 7 2 Information not covered in the table or in Trigger model GPIB operation is provided after the table The Ref column provides reference for this information Table 7 2 SCPI commands triggering Commands Description Ref Default ABORt Reset trigger system A INITiate Initiation IMMediate Initiate one trigger cycle B CONTi
295. r 1 of the bits in the register This register is cleared on power up This register is used as a mask for the Standard Event Register When a standard event is masked the occurrence of that event will not set the Event Summary Bit ESB in the Status Byte Register Conversely when a standard event is unmasked enabled the occurrence of that event sets the ESB bit For information on the Standard Event Register and descriptions of the standard event bits see the following section A cleared bit 0 in the enabled register prevents masks the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register from setting when the corresponding standard event occurs A set bit 1 in the enable register allows enables the ESB bit to set when the corresponding standard event occurs The Standard Event Enable Register is shown in Figure 12 1 and includes the decimal weight of each bit The sum of the decimal weights of the bits that you wish to be set is the parameter value that is sent with the ESE command For example to set the CME and QYE bits of the Standard Event Enable Register send the following command ESE 36 Where CME bit B5 Decimal 32 QYE bit B2 Decimal _4 lt NRf gt 36 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Common Commands 12 5 If a command error CME occurs bit B5 of the Standard Event Status Register sets If a query error QYE occurs bit B2 of the Standard Event
296. r loading increases Figure C 5 shows the method used to determine the percent error due to meter loading The voltage source Vg has a source resistance Rg while the input resistance of the Model 2182 is Rj and the voltage measured by the nanovoltmeter is Vm Figure C 5 Meter loading i Vs VM Source Measured Voltage Voltage The voltage actually measured by the meter is attenuated by the voltage divider action of Rg and Ry and it can be calculated as follows VRL MB Rs This relationship can be modified to directly compute for percent error 100R Ri Rs Percent error From the above equation it is obvious that the input resistance of the Model 2182 must be at least 999 times the value of source resistance if loading error is to be kept to within 0 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com C 10 Measurement Considerations Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Model 182 Emulation Commands Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com D 2 Model 182 Emulation Commands The Model 2182 can be configured to accept device dependent commands of the Keithley Model 182 Sensitive Digital Voltmeter The commands for controlling the Model 2182 with the 182 language are provided in Table D 1 For
297. rammed to sweep the current in a bipolar DC current reversal technique growing amplitude fashion See waveform in Figure 9 4 This sweep will store into the 2182 memory and can be recalled at the end of the sweep By having the 2400 and 2182 in a tight hardware control the DC current reversal technique can be run at a rate of 8 sec at a PLC integration time This will greatly reduce any thermal EMFs in the system by being able to reverse the DC current before any temperature effects can occur Looking for critical currents I can be accomplished at a faster reading rate NOTE Channel 1 is used to measure the voltage across the sample while Channel 2 measures the voltage across a known reference Rggp resistor to determine the current in the sample Figure 9 4 Waveform to be programmed into Model 2400 P8 P10 5mA 2mA 1mA 1mA 2mA 5mA Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 15 Set up 2182 Restore factory defaults Filters off Rate 1 plc Ch1 10mV Ch2 1V Ext Trigger on Delay Set to time needed for cable settling Config SCAN INT Timer off Ch1 Count 3 Note Ch1 will store 3 readings 2400 programmed current level Ch2 will store 1 reading 2400 programmed current level Rdg Count 48 Figure 9 5 Setup of Model 2182 and Model 2400 8501 Trigger Link Cable 2400 Test Equipment Depo
298. rature RTEMperature Query internal temperature Sec 2 NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate in line cycles PLC 0 01 to 60 5 Sec 3 60Hz or 0 01 to 50 50Hz NPLCycles Query NPLC APERture lt n gt Set integration rate in seconds 166 67e 6 to 1 83 33 60Hz or 200e 6 to 1 50Hz APERture Query Aperture DIGits lt n gt Set display resolution 4 to 7 6 Sec 3 DIGits Query display resolution CHANnel1 Channel 1 temperature commands REFerence lt n gt Specify reference Rel value for Channel 1 328 0 Sec 4 to 3310 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Rel OFF STATe Query state of Rel ACQuire Use input signal as Rel REFerence Query Rel value LPASs Control analog filter for TEMP1 Sec 3 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter OFF STATe Query state of analog filter DFILter Configure and control digital filter Sec 3 WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing TCONtrol Query filter type STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON STATe Query state of digital filter Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 10 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14 7 SENSe command summa
299. rce asii niie ee ei EE EE E EER E ETES 15 21 Measurement Considerations Thermal EMF generation ccc cccsc cesceessessenesectipernevensscenscosnasteshevectenesssvectesedseis Power line ground loops scssisscctescecscscsassvsceicsestesessescssusqacauesdicessnsecanssecnescensttensvess Eliminating ground loops 0 cee ceesseeeeeescesseeseeeceeaeceeeeaeeesesseseeeseeeaesseeeaeesees Shielding Ox AM Plea ccca c seaswecs sage saceegeseneecaasdepenecuesesneseasssdbinseveastesabex NRA Meter loading isisisi aai IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEFE 488 Dus configuration seci sscscsccssssvesesscessocisssrecisseus sesso sstacvesscessstioessssvesssness TEEE 488 handshake Sequence cccesccescceeseeeseeeeseeesaeceseeececeaceeeeceaeeesaeeeaeensas Command codes sesiis noises iesire iei oud oocs donde E TA E i vesdivess Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance measurements 008 Test System COMP PUTALIONS sissien ciiir k siii iiin K NNa ea NENS Delta measurement teChnique isiicesessiriisesirisierisoisisisressssrisrieissi srona cisiesyss Pulse Delta 3 point measurement technique esses eseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeseeeneeaes P lse timing secsec iari era TEA E eS EEA EEEN Pulse sweep output examples oes eeeeseceeceecseeeseeseeesecseeeaeesaeeaeesaeeaeeneeeas Differential Conductance measurement process ee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeees Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431
300. rear panel of the Model 2182 is shown in Figure 1 2 This figure includes important abbreviated information that should be reviewed before operating the instrument Figure 1 2 Model 2182 rear panel WARNING ANALOGJOUTPUT 1KQ OPTPUT RESISTANCE TRIGGER LINK KEITHLEY Pins 7 and 8 DIGITAL COMMON 4 Pin 2 Pin 1 EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT VOLTMETER COMPLETE OUTPUT Trigger Reading Reading Complete TTL HI TTL HI gt gt 2usec e gt 10usec e TTLLO TTLLO Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 1 12 Getting Started 1 ANALOG OUTPUT Provides a scaled non inverting DC voltage With analog output gain set to one a full range input will result in a 1V analog output 2 TRIGGER LINK Eight pin micro DIN connector for sending and receiving trigger pulses among connected instruments Use a trigger link cable or adapter such as Models 8501 1 8501 2 8502 and 8503 3 RS 232 Connector for RS 232 operation Use a straight through not null modem DB 9 shielded cable 4 IEEE 488 Connector for IEEE 488 GPIB operation Use a shielded cable such as the Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 5 Power Module Contains the AC line receptacle power line fuse and line voltage setting The instrument can be configured for line voltages of 100V 120V 220V 240VAC at line frequencies of
301. reet Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 2 Common Commands Common commands summarized in Table 12 1 are device commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Table 12 1 IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries Mnemonic Name Description CLS Clear status Clears all event registers and Error Queue ESE lt NRf gt Event enable command Program the Standard Event Enable Register ESE Event enable query Read the Standard Event Enable Register ESR Event status register query Read the Standard Event Enable Register and clear it IDN Identification query Returns the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels of the unit OPC Operation complete command Set the Operation Complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register after all pending commands have been executed OPC Operation complete query Places an ASCII 1 into the output queue when all pend ing selected device operations have been completed RCL lt NRf gt Recall command Returns the 2182 to the user saved setup RST Reset command Returns the 2182 to the RST default conditions SAV lt NRf gt Save command Saves the present setup as the user saved setup SRE lt NRf gt Service request enable command Programs the Service Request Enable Register SRE Service request enable query Reads the Service Request Enable Register STB Status b
302. reet Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 Bus Overview Typical command sequences For the various multiline commands a specific bus sequence must take place to properly send the command In particular the correct listen address must be sent to the instrument before it will respond to addressed commands Table F 3 lists a typical bus sequence for sending the addressed multiline commands In this instance the SDC command is being sent to the instrument UNL is generally sent as part of the sequence to ensure that no other active listeners are present Note that ATN is true for both the listen command and the SDC command byte itself Table F 3 Typical addressed bus sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low i 27 39 3 SDC Stays low EOT 04 4 4 Returns high Assumes primary address 7 Table F 4 gives a typical common command sequence In this instance ATN is true while the instrument is being addressed but it is set high while sending the common command string Table F 4 Typical addressed common command sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low 27 39 3 Data Set high i 2A 42 4 Data Stays high R 52 82 5 Data Stays high S 53 83 6 Data Stays high T 54 84 Assumes primary address 7 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washingt
303. reet Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Limits 8 7 Application Sorting resistors Limits can be used to sort resistors Figure 8 2 shows a basic setup to test 10Q resistors The Model 220 is used to source a constant 1mA through the resistor and the Model 2182 measures the voltage drop Figure 8 2 Setup to test 10Q resistors Model 220 Current Source Test Circuit 2182 For this application the idea is to sort a batch of 10 resistors into three bins Bin 1 is for resistors that are within 1 of the nominal value Bin 2 is for resistors that exceed 1 tolerance but are within 5 Bin 3 is for resistors that exceed 5 tolerance Limit 1 will be used to test for the 1 tolerance and Limit 2 will be used to test for the 5 tolerance The Model 2182 does not directly measure resistance so the tolerances have to be converted to voltage values The voltage drop across a nominal 10 resistor is calculated as follows VNOoM 102 x ImA 10mV The voltage values for the 1 and 5 tolerances are calculated as follows Vi 10mV x 1 V5 10mV x Vs 10mV x 0 01 10mV x 0 05 0 1lmV 0 5mV Finally the high and low limits are calculated as follows HI Limit 10mV Vi HI Limit2 10mV V5 10mV 0 1mV 10mV 0 5mV 10 1mV 10 5mV LO Limit 1 10mV Vi LO Limit2 10mV Vs5q 10mV 0 1mV 10mV 0 5mV 9 9mV 9 5mV The limits are illustrated in Figure 8 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517
304. rement control and data I O signals are Measurement Category I and must not be directly connected to mains voltage or to voltage sources with high transient over voltages Measurement Category II connections require protection for high transient over voltages often as sociated with local AC mains connections Assume all measurement control and data I O connections are for connection to Category I sources unless otherwise marked or described in the Manual Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may be present on cable connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standards Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60VDC are present A good safety practice is to expect that hazardous voltage is present in any unknown circuit before measuring Operators of this product must be protected from electric shock at all times The responsible body must ensure that operators are prevented access and or insulated from every connection point In some cases connections must be exposed to potential human contact Product operators in these circumstances must be trained to protect themselves from the risk of electric shock If the circuit is capable of operating at or above 1000 volts no conductive part of the circuit may be exposed Do not connect switching cards directly to unlimited power circuits They are intended to be used with impedance limited sourc
305. rement query commands to trigger and or return readings are provided in Section 13 and Appendix H The flowchart in Figure 7 1 summarizes triggering as viewed from the front panel It is called a trigger model because it is modeled after the SCPI commands used to control triggering Note that for stepping and scanning the trigger model has additional control blocks These are described in Section 9 NOTE The complete trigger model which is based on bus operation is shown and discussed later in this section see SCPI programming triggering Keep in mind that there is only one trigger model The ones shown Figure 7 1 and in Section 9 are abbreviated versions to illustrate front panel operation Figure 7 1 Front panel trigger model without Stepping Scanning Cide D4 y Control Event Source Detection Immediate External y Output Delay Trigger Device Action Idle The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not performing any measurements or scanning operations From the front panel the unit is considered idle at the end of a step or scan operation when the reading for the last channel remains displayed To restore triggers press SHIFT and then HALT Once the Model 2182 is taken out of idle operation proceeds through the trigger model Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com
306. ring too long EE 151 Invalid string data EE 150 String data error EE Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Status and Error Messages B 3 Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Number Description Event 148 Character data not allowed EE 144 Character data too long EE 141 Invalid character data EE 140 Character data error EE 128 Numeric data not allowed EE 124 Too many digits EE 123 Exponent too large EE 121 Invalid character in number EE 120 Numeric data error EE 114 Header suffix out of range EE 113 Undefined header EE 112 Program mnemonic too long EE 111 Header separator error EE 110 Command header error EE 109 Missing parameter EE 108 Parameter not allowed EE 105 GET not allowed EE 104 Data type error EE 103 Invalid separator EE 102 Syntax error EE 101 Invalid character EE 100 Command error EE 000 No error SE 101 Operation complete SE 121 Device calibrating SE 125 Device measuring SE 171 Waiting in trigger layer SE 174 Re entering the idle layer SE 180 Filter settled SE 301 Reading overflow SE 302 Low limit 1 event SE 303 High limit 1 event SE 304 Low limit 2 event SE 305 High limit 2 event SE 306 Reading available SE Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com B 4 Status and Error Messages Table B 1 cont Status
307. rratic operation In this case results cannot be guaranteed Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 4 Remote Operation Interface selection and configuration procedures When you select enable the GPIB interface the RS 232 interface disables Conversely selecting enabling the RS 232 interface disables the GPIB interface GPIB interface The GPIB interface is selected and configured from the GPIB menu structure From this menu you can enable or disable the GPIB interface and check or change the following settings e Primary address 0 to 30 e Language SCPI or 182 Perform the following steps to select and configure the GPIB interface NOTE To retain a present GPIB setting press ENTER with the setting displayed You can exit from the menu structure at any time by pressing EXIT 1 Press SHIFT and then GPIB to access the GPIB menu The present state on or off of the GPIB is displayed 2 To enable the GPIB interface A Place the cursor on the on off selection by pressing the J gt key B Press the amp or key to toggle the selection to ON C Press ENTER The present GPIB address is displayed 3 To change the GPIB address A Use the lt q P gt A and keys to display a valid address value B Press ENTER The present language selection is displayed 4 To change the programming language A Place the cursor on the present language se
308. rrent known and voltage measured resistance can be calculated using Ohms Law R V I Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 26 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Standard cell comparisons Standard cell comparisons are conducted by measuring the potential difference between a reference and an unknown standard cell All cell differences are determined in series opposition configuration The positive terminals of the standard cells V1 and V2 are connected to the HI and LO inputs of the nanovoltmeter as shown in Figure 2 13A The Model 2107 Input Cable supplied with the Model 2182 should be used to connect the cells to the nanovoltmeter in order to minimize errors caused by thermal EMFs Vgpp Figure 2 13 Standard cell comparison measurements Thermal EMFs VEMF DCV1 via Standard Cells V2 _ Reading 1 V1 V2 Vener A Reading 1 Thermal EMFs a a pcv1 VEMF Standard Cells 2182 Reading 2 Ven V2 V1 B Reading 2 Once the measurement connections have been made care must be taken to avoid errors from thermally generated potentials To minimize the effects of thermal EMFs a second measurement is taken with the nanovoltmeter leads reversed as shown in Figure 2 13B The small voltage difference is calculated by averaging the absolute values of the two readings Calculation of standard deviation across several re
309. rs See Section 14 for more information Event registers As Figure 11 4 shows each status register set has an event register An event register is a latched read only register whose bits are set by the corresponding condition register Once a bit in an event register is set it remains set latched until the register is cleared by a specific clearing operation The bits of an event register are logically ANDed with the bits of the corresponding enable register and applied to an OR gate The output of the OR gate is applied to the Status Byte Register Use the ESR Common Command to read the Standard Event Register All other event registers are read using the EVENt query commands in the STATus Subsystem See Section 14 for more information An event register is cleared when it is read The following operations clear all event registers e Cycling power Sending CLS Enable registers As Figure 11 4 shows each status register set has an enable register An enable register is programmed by you and serves as a mask for the corresponding event register An event bit is masked when the corresponding bit in the enable register is cleared 0 When masked a set bit in an event register cannot set a bit in the Status Byte Register 1 AND 0 0 To use the Status Byte Register to detect events i e serial poll you must unmask the events by setting 1 the appropriate bits of the enable registers To program and query the Standard Eve
310. ry eee eeeeseeeeeeseeeeeaeesceeaeeseeeaecaeesaeseeeeseseaeaes 14 13 UNIT command Summary asisite aaia ea eai 14 14 Status and Error Messages Status and error MESSAGES oen resci it e E E i enaiis B 2 Measurement Considerations Material thermoelectric Coefficients ssseeseesesesesesreseeresrsresrnrrsrnresrenenresresreene C 2 Model 182 Emulation Commands Model 182 device dependent command summary ce ceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneees D 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com F Table F 1 Table F 2 Table F 3 Table F 4 Table F 5 Table F 6 G Table G 1 Table G 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEE 488 bus command summary 0 0 ceeceeseeeeeeeeeeteeceeeeececeaceeeeseaeeesaeeeaeenses F 7 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes cescceeseeeseeesceeeseeeeeeeeneeesneeeaeers F 10 Typical addressed bus sequence 0 00 eeseceeseeeteeetseeeseeetaeceseeesceceaeeeeeseaeentneeeaeens F 11 Typical addressed common command Sequence ce eeeeseeseeeeseeeeeenseeseeees F 11 IEEE command groups ccessccescceseecesceesceceseesneceaeeesaeceaeeeseecsaeeeseeseaeeseneeeaeens F 12 Model 2182 interface function codes ssssseeesssseseessssssesseseesressresreserssreseessee F 13 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information TEEE 488 documentation requirements essseessseeeeesesreresreresrestrrstrsrereeresesresrs G 2 Coupled Commands 2 2 icccisec cdicpsazers
311. ry cont Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI CHANnel2 Channel 2 temperature commands REFerence lt n gt Specify reference Rel value for Channel 2 0 Sec 4 328 to 3310 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Rel OFF STATe Query state of Rel ACQuire Use the voltage on Channel 2 as Rel REFerence Query Rel value LPASs Control analog filter for TEMP2 Sec 3 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter OFF STATe Query state of analog filter DFILter Configure and control digital filter Sec 3 WINDow lt n gt Specify filter window in 0 to 10 0 01 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat MOVing TCONtrol Query filter type STATe lt b gt Enable or disable digital filter ON STATe Query state of digital filter Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI Reference Tables 14 11 Table 14 8 STATus command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI STATus Note 1 Sec 15 MEASurement Measurement event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 ENABle Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register OPERation Operation event registers EVENt Read the eve
312. s enclosed in single or double quotes A character can be any letter of the alphabet the degrees symbol or the ohms symbol Q The ohms symbol Q and the degrees symbol are not ASCII characters and therefore must be substituted with the and V characters as follows CALCulate KMAth MUNits Use ohms symbol Q as units designator CALCulate KMAth MUNits Use degrees symbol as units designator Programming examples mX b and percent Program Example 1 This program fragment shows how to configure and enable the mX b calculation CALL SEND 7 calc form mxb status Selects mX b calculation CALL SEND 7 calc kmat mmf 2 status Sets scale factor M to 2 CALL SEND 7 calc kmat mbf 0 5 status Sets offset B to 0 5 CALL SEND 7 calc kmat mun cd status Sets units to CD CALL SEND 7 calc stat on status Enables calculation Program Example 2 This program fragment shows how to configure and enable the Percent calculation CALL SEND 7 calc form perc status Selects percent calculation CALL SEND 7 calc kmat perc acq status Uses input signal as reference CALL SEND 7 calc stat on status Enables calculation Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02
313. s 40 5 MAX INTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 120 s 120 s MAX EXTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 120 s 120 s MEASUREMENT CHARACTERISTICS A D LINEARITY 0 8ppm of reading 0 5ppm of range FRONT AUTOZERO OFF ERROR 10mV 10V Add 8ppm of reading 500uV for lt 10 minutes and 1 C NOTE Offset voltage error does not apply for Delta Mode AUTOZERO OFF ERROR 10mV Add 8ppm of reading 100nV for lt 10 minutes and 41 C 100mV 100V Add 8ppm of reading 10uV for lt 10 minutes and 1 C NOTE Offset voltage error does not apply for Delta Mode INPUT IMPEDANCE 10mV 10V gt 10GQ in parallel with lt 1 5nF Front Filter ON 10mV 10V gt 10GQ in parallel with lt 0 5nF Front Filter OFF 100V 10MQ 1 DC INPUT BIAS CURRENT lt 60pA 23 C 10V to 5V lt 120pA 23 C 5 V to 10V COMMON MODE CURRENT lt 50nA p p at 50Hz or 60Hz INPUT PROTECTION 150V peak to any terminal 70V peak Channel LO to Channel 2 LO CHANNEL ISOLATION gt 10GQ EARTH ISOLATION 350V peak gt 10GQ and lt 150pF any terminal to earth Add 35pF ft with Model 2107 Low Thermal Input Cable Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com RKN 6 08 04 RevA Page 2 of 3 2182A Nanovoltmeter Specifications ANALOG OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 1 2V ACCURACY 0 1 of output ImV OUTPUT RESISTANCE 1kQ 5 GAIN Adjustable from 10 to 10 With gain set to 1 a full range input will produce a 1V
314. s gt 1 Pulses are synchronized to the frequency of the power line voltage When Pulse Delta is started the three pulses low high and low are generated on the positive going edges of the first three power line cycles For the remaining power line cycles in the interval the output remains at the I Low level Sweep output The sweep feature of the Model 6221 can be used to output a series of pulses that allow the use of different levels for the high pulses Each high pulse returns to the programmed low pulse level The low level is the same for all pulses Like the Fixed output shown in Figure I 5 a Sweep output is synchronized to the fre quency of the power line voltage and the pulse width is adjustable and is the same for all pulses Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com I 12 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Figure I 5 Pulse timing I High 1 Low 2 Power Line One Pulse Delta Cycle 5 8 Interval 5 PLC Pulse Low High Low nE pp JIL et he 4 gt One Line Cycle One Line Cycle One Line Cycle gt lt gt lt Dit One Line Cycle One Line Cycle Be es eee Voltage 1 I High can be set from 105mA to 105mA default is 1mA 2 I Low can be set from 105mA to 105mA default is OmA 3 Pulse Width can be set from 50us to 12ms default is 110s 4 One 60Hz power line cycle 16 6
315. s send the ABORt command to place the instrument in idle which by definition completes the initiate command Since continuous initiation is on operation continues on into the Trigger Model After sending the TRG command an ASCII 1 is placed in the Output Queue and the MAV bit sets when the TRG command is finished After OPC is executed additional commands cannot be sent to the Model 2182 until the pending overlapped commands are finished For example INITiate CONTinuous ON followed by OPC locks up the instrument and requires a device clear DCL or SDC before it will accept any more commands NOTE See OPC TRG and WAI for more information Programming example The following command sequence demonstrates how to use OPC to signal the end of a measurement process SYST PRES INIT CONT OFF ABORt TRIG COUN 1 SAMP COUN 5 INIT OPC Returns 2182 to default setup Disables continuous initiation Aborts operation Places 2182 in idle These two commands configure the 2182 to perform five measurements Starts measurement process Sends the OPC command After all five measurements are performed and the instrument returns to idle state an ASCII T will be placed in the Output Queue After addressing the Model 2182 to talk the 1 from the Output Queue is sent to the computer SYST PRES Returns 2182 to default setup Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melros
316. s BO through B3 Not used Additional SCPI Commands 15 9 Bit B4 Temperature Summary Temp Set bit indicates that an invalid reference junction measurement has occurred for thermocouple temperature measurements Bits B5 through B7 Not used Bit B8 Calibration Summary Cal Set bit indicates that an invalid calibration constant was detected during the power up sequence The instrument will instead use a default calibration constant This error will clear after successful calibration of the instrument Bit B9 ACAL Summary ACAL Set bit indicates that an invalid ACAL was performed This error will clear after a successful ACAL is performed Bits B10 through B15 Not used NOTE Whenever a questionable event occurs the ERR annunciator will turn on The annunciator will turn off when the questionable event clears Figure 15 5 Questionable event register Bit Position Event Decimal Weighting Value B15 B10 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Value 1 Operation Event Set 0 Operation Event Cleared Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Events ACAL ACAL Summary Cal Calibration Summary Temp Temperature Summary 15 10 Additional SCP Commands Operation Event Register Bit BO Calibrating Cal Set bit indicates that the instrument is calibrating Bits B1 through B3 Not used Bit B
317. s ON OFF key to view the present beeper status BEEP NEVER default 2 To change the beeper setting use the Aand W keys to display NEVER OUTSIDE or INSIDE 3 Press ENTER to return to the normal display The HI IN LO status is displayed along with the reading 4 To disable Limits press the ON OFF key Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Limits 8 5 SCPI programming limits For remote operation the testing capabilities of Limit 1 and Limit 2 are the same Limit 1 and or Limit 2 can be enabled The commands to configure and control limit testing are listed in Table 8 1 NOTE When testing limits remotely keep in mind that the front panel HI IN LO status messages only apply to Limit 1 Also if the front panel beeper is set for OUTSIDE or INSIDE it will operate according to its front panel definition as previously explained Table 8 1 SCPI commands limits Commands Description Default Note CALCulate3 CALCulate3 Subsystem LIMit Configure and control Limit 1 UPPer lt n gt Set upper HI1 limit 100e6 to 100e6 1 LOWer lt n gt Set lower LO1 limit 100e6 to 100e6 1 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 1 test OFF FAIL Query test result 0 pass 1 fail 1 CLEar Path to clear fail indication 2 IMMediate Clear fail indication AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear ON LIMit2 Configure and control Limit 2 UPPer lt n gt S
318. s a multiple Reading Count can be set to a value gt 1024 or INFinite but only the first 1024 readings will be stored in the buffer Perform the following steps to configure internal stepping or scanning 1 Press SHIFT and then CONFIG Use the gt key to display the present SCANNING type INTernal or EXTernal 2 Press the amp or W key to display INT and press ENTER 3 The present state of the timer is displayed OFF or ON Press amp or to display the desired timer state and press ENTER 4 Ifyou turned the timer on the timer interval will be displayed Use the edit keys lt q P gt A and W to set the timer interval and press ENTER 5 The present Channel 1 Count CH1 CNT is displayed Use the edit keys to set the number of measurements for Channel 1 and press ENTER 6 The Present Reading Count RNG CNT is displayed it will be CH1 CNT 1 If you wish to increase the Reading Count use the edit keys to display the value and press ENTER to return to the normal display state Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 8 Stepping and Scanning External Stepping Scanning The settings for external stepping scanning are explained as follows Min Max Values These two values specify the beginning and ending channels for the step scan list Valid values for Min is 1 to 799 and valid values for Max is 2 to 800 However the Max value must be larg
319. s adding and removing a single A D conversion from the stack before taking the average while the repeating filter only averages a stack that is filled with new A D conversions Details on digital filter characteristics are provided as follow Filter count The filter count specifies how many consecutive A D conversions within the filter window to place in the memory stack When the stack is full the A D conversions are averaged to calculate the final filtered reading The filter count can be set from 1 to 100 Note that with a filter count of 1 no averaging is done However only readings within the filter window will be displayed stored or transmitted Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Range Digits Rate and Filter 3 9 Filter window The digital filter uses a window to control filter threshold As long as the input signal remains within the selected window A D conversions continue to be placed in the stack If the signal changes to a value outside the window the filter resets and the filter starts processing again starting with a new initial conversion value from the A D converter The five window selections from the front panel are 0 01 0 1 1 10 of range and NONE no window For remote operation the window can be set to any value from 0 01 to 10 or NONE For voltage the filter window is expressed as a percent of range For example on the 10V
320. s in the test leads will automatically be canceled during the source measure process Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 24 Ratio and Delta To check measurement repeatability you may wish to perform more than one Delta measurement at each current amplitude In Figure 5 11 the SourceMeter outputs five bipolar steps for each amplitude The result will be five Delta measurements for each amplitude When configuring the custom sweep 10uA would be assigned to the first 10 points of the sweep 20uA would be assigned to the next 10 points and 50uA would be assigned to the last 10 points Therefore the custom sweep in Figure 5 11 would be made up of 30 points PO through P29 The procedure to use the SourceMeter and Model 2182 to perform Delta measurements is provided in Delta measurement procedure using a SourceMeter That procedure presented earlier in this section under Delta uses a 2 point custom sweep and will have to be modified for this application as follows This application uses two Model 2182s Therefore both nanovoltmeters must be configured exactly the same InStep 3 of the procedure change the Trigger Count to equal the number of points in the custom sweep For example if using the 30 point custom sweep in Figure 5 11 set the Trigger Count to 30 InStep 5 assign current values to the sweep points For the example 30 point swee
321. s previously explained the DC current reversal measurement technique must be used to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs in the test leads By configuring a custom sweep the SourceMeter can function as a bipolar fixed amplitude source For example if the test requires a fixed current of 1mA the custom sweep can be configured to alternate between 1mA and 1mA see Figure 5 8 By enabling Delta measurements on the Model 2182 the effects of thermal EMFs in the test leads will automatically be canceled during the source measure process Figure 5 8 SourceMeter output 2 point custom sweep hank PO PO 0 1mA P1 P1 The procedure to use the SourceMeter and Model 2182 to perform Delta measurements is provided in Delta measurement procedure using a SourceMeter That procedure presented earlier in this section under Delta uses a 2 point custom sweep which is required for this application Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 22 Ratio and Delta Superconductor Application 2 fixed magnetic field Another typical test on a superconductor sample DUT is to source an increasing amplitude current I through the DUT while maintaining the magnetic field H at a fixed level The I V curve in Figure 5 9 shows that the measured voltage across the DUT remains at OV for low currents I This is the flat portion of the curve where the DUT remains at 0 At some poi
322. s restored e TALK This indicator is on when the instrument is in the talker active state Place the unit in the talk state by addressing it to talk with the correct MTA My Talk Address command TALK is off when the unit is in the talker idle state Place the unit in the talker idle state by sending an UNT Untalk command addressing it to listen or sending the IFC Interface Clear command e LSTN This indicator is on when the Model 2182 is in the listener active state which is activated by addressing the instrument to listen with the correct MLA My Listen Address command LSTN is off when the unit is in the listener idle state Place the unit in the listener idle state by sending UNL Unlisten addressing it to talk or sending the IFC Interface Clear command over the bus e SRQ You can program the instrument to generate a service request SRQ when one or more errors or conditions occur When this indicator is on a service request has been generated This indicator stays on until the serial poll byte is read or all the conditions that caused SRQ have ceased to exist Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 13 LOCAL key The LOCAL key cancels the remote state and restores local operation of the instrument Pressing the LOCAL key also turns off the REM indicator and returns the display to normal if a user defined message was displayed If t
323. se MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 5 Figure 9 1 Front panel triggering internal scanning lt Another Trigger Scan Counter Control Event Source Detection Output Immediate Trigger External Timer No a Yes Another Sample Reading Counter 2 y Delay Device Action Figure 9 2 Front panel triggering other step scan operations Idle lt Another i Yes Trigger bai Reading Counter y Reading Count Control Event Source Detection Immediate External y Timer Output Delay Trigger a Device Action Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 6 Stepping and Scanning Other Stepping Scanning operations Control source e Immediate With immediate triggering event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to drop down to the next trigger model block Delay Timer The timer is used to set a time interval between channels in a step scan cycle When STEP or SCAN is pressed the timer starts and event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to drop down to Delay When operation later loops back to this control source it waits until the timer interval expires If the timer interval is already expired event detection will be satisfied immediately
324. seascesaiasteavs einar a sons ieeasens 7 17 8 Limits Limit operations sirsa aoe enia enera A Ea ee eA deen teas TEER EE RE EEE 8 3 Setting limit vales srsti eeina NEA E Ea Ea AaS E aA TN 8 4 Enabling MIMS oseiro E 8 4 SCPI programming limits sissies iska ia i 8 5 Jeo PAC AON 55 cced EE E E 8 7 S rting TESISLOTS sss ivsccdde case sik Eri eT Ei aE EREE E EESE AAEN TE Eai 8 7 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 10 11 Stepping and Scanning Step Scan OVELVIEW cesecsivsesecsseescchse disescuesassuedeteuse E Ee aN N Eai 9 3 Internal Stepping Scanning Channels 1 and 2 sessssesssessesesseesesrerrersereresreresss 9 3 External Stepping Scanming sseeseseesesesseesssreresrsresrrsrsrrsterresrnrrsrnresrnsesresenrestent 9 3 Front panel trigger models ssississiisieiiaseri teriores tosic eegisenit rasna p aenar Eai iaeoe n Eirias 9 4 Internal scanning sociicoorissreisineiik algae anes dele deducted ces ese ENETEIA 9 4 Other Stepping Scanning Operations 00 ee eeeeseceeeeseeeeeeseeseeeaeeeeeeaseeeeeaeeees 9 6 Stepping Scanming Controls oo eee eee eseeeseeseeeseceeeeaeceesaesceeaeseaesaeseaeeseseaeeseees 9 6 Step Scan COnFIQUration 0 0 2 ee eeeesseeseescceseeeeceseeessesessonenceeesentccetenerseeseeeress 9 7 Stepping Scanning examples 00 eee eseeseeeseeseeeseceeeeaeceeeeseseeeeaeseeesseeeaeeeeeaeeseees 9 8 Internal scanne scsiceissssesvenedeasieveissceadtsa
325. see Note 1 DATA Return 2182 readings LATest Return the last reading FRESh Return a new fresh reading TEMPerature Configure temperature measurements TRANsducer lt name gt Select sensor TCouple or INTernal TCouple RJUNction Configure reference junction RSELect lt name gt Select reference SIMulated or INTernal INTernal SIMulated lt n gt Specify simulated reference temperature in C 0 to 60 23 TCouple lt type gt Specify thermocouple type J K T E R S B or N J UNIT TEMPerature lt name gt Select units designator C F or K C Note Channel 0 is the internal temperature sensor With a temperature function selected reading Channel 0 returns the inter nal temperature reading With a voltage function selected reading Channel 0 returns the voltage reading of the internal temperature sensor Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 21 Programming Example measure voltage and temperature The following program fragments will measure voltage on Channel and temperature on Channel 2 Temperature is configured using a simulated reference junction 1 e ice bath and a type K thermocouple Configure Temperature CALL SEND 7 sens temp trans tc status Select thermocouple sensor CALL SEND 7 Ssens temp rjun rsel sim status Select simulated reference CALL SEND
326. selected DCV1 ranges will be available when Ratio is enabled If Channel 2 is presently selected DCV2 ranges will be available when Ratio is enabled Complete information on ranging for Ratio is provided in Section 5 There is no range selection for temperature TEMP1 and TEMP2 measurements Temperature measurements are performed on a single fixed range The DIGITS key sets reading resolution Maximum readings The full scale readings for every voltage range are 20 over range For example on the 10V range the maximum input voltage is 12V Depending on which type of thermocouple is being used the maximum temperature readings range from 200 C to 1820 C The Specifications Appendix A list the reading range for each thermocouple type Input values that exceed the maximum readings cause the overflow message OVRFLW to be displayed Manual ranging To select a range press the RANGE or key The instrument changes one range per key press The selected range is displayed for one second Note that the manual range keys have no effect on temperature TEMP1 and TEMP2 If the instrument displays the OVRFLW message on a particular range select a higher range until an on range reading is displayed Use the lowest range possible without causing an overflow to ensure best accuracy and resolution Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 3 4 Range Digi
327. setting for fastest readings DISPlay ENABle OFF Turn off display to increase speed SYSTem AZERo STATe OFF Disable autozero to increase speed but may cause drift over time SENSe VOLTage DC LPASs OFF Turn off analog filter for speed SENSe VOLTage DC DFILter OFF Turn off digital filter for speed TRIGger COUNt 1 READ Enter reading One shot reading DC volts bus trigger auto ranging RST INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt TRIGger SOURce BUS SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO ON TRIGger COUNt 1 INITiate TRG or GPIB GET command Triggers reading SENSe DATA FRESh Enter reading One shot reading external trigger auto delay enabled RST INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt TRIGger SOURce EXTernal TRIGger DELay AUTO ON Note Auto trigger delay only takes effect with trigger source set for BUS or EXTernal SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO ON INITiate external trigger SENSe DATA FRESh Enter reading This step will time out if the trigger hasn t occurred Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com H 6 Measurement Queries Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance l 2 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance
328. sociated statements 00 0 0 elec eeeeeseeeeeeseeeeees 11 9 RS 232 connector pinout oo ee eee cece teeeeeseeeseeseeeseeseseaeceeeaecseeeaessaeeseeneeeaes 11 29 PC serial port pious isi5s c250ciehs iiss Gua si n piste teats E EEE ES 11 30 Common Commands TEEE 488 2 common commands and queries cescceseeeeceseeeececenceeeeeeeaees 12 2 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands Signal oriented measurement command SUMMATY cs eeeeseeeeeeteeseeeteeeeeees 13 2 SCPI Reference Tables CALCulate command sUMMATY 2 00 ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeseteeceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeneees 14 3 CALibration command summary user accessible eeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenees 14 4 DISPlay command Summary 0 ce eseeeeseeeeeneceeeeseeeceeeeceeeceeeesesseeeaeseeeeaeeseee 14 5 FORMat command SUMMALY eee eeeeseceeeeeceeeeseeesesaeceeecaeeeaeeaeeeaeseeeeaeenaees 14 5 OUT Put command Summary 0 eee eee eseeeeeneceeeeeeesesseceeeceeeeseeeeeaeseeeeaeenaees 14 6 ROUTe command summary eeeeseeseeeeeneceeeeseeeceseeceeeceesseeseeeaeseeeeaeeeee 14 6 SENSe command summary 000 cceceeesesseceeceseceeeeseseseeseesaeeseeeaecseeeaeeseeeaseeeeas 14 7 STATus command Summary ec eeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeeescesaeeseseseceeeaeeeeeeaeseeeeaes 14 11 SYSTem command suMMALY 00 eee eeeeseeseeesecseeeseesseeeeeeecseesaeeseeeseseeeeaes 14 12 TRACe command Summary 0 eee ee eeeeseeseeeeceseeeaeeceeaeceeeeaeseeeeaeeneeeaeseeeaes 14 12 Trigger command summa
329. ssceueaassbeeobiagach ageeaivevenabvaass 11 29 BITOT Messages pienriistan ii EEE NE NERS aE 11 30 12 Common Commands CLS Clear Status Clear status registers and error queue s s s 12 3 ESE lt NRf gt Event Enable Program the standard event enable register 12 4 ESE Event Enable Query Read the standard event register 0 0 0 0 12 4 ESR Event Status Register Query Read register and clear it 0 0 12 6 IDN Identification Query Read the identification code 0 eee 12 7 OPC Operation Complete Set the OPC bit in the standard event register after all pending commands are complete eee 12 8 OPC Operation Complete Query Place a 1 in the output queue after all pending operations are completed 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteee 12 10 RCL Recall Return to setup stored in MEMOTY 2 0 0 eee eeeeteeeeeeeeee 12 11 RST Reset Return 2182 to RST defaults oo ee eeeeseeeeeereeeeeeeeee 12 12 SAV Save Save present Setup in MEMOTY eee eeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee 12 12 SRE lt NRf gt Service Request Enable Program service request enable Tesisten eerren e e a Ar E eaa a EER E e EARR 12 12 SRE Service Request Enable Query Read service request enable TEISTEL lt c5s sccascvevesensetessesGneasoneedecsbercecedseeed uocesndeasasssntevensevastaussteasetense 12 12 STB Status Byte Query Read status byte register eeeeeeeeeeeseeeerereerse 12 14 TRG Trigger Send bus trigger to 2
330. summary Table 14 8 STATus command summary Table 14 9 SYSTem command summary Table 14 10 TRACe command summary Table 14 11 Trigger command summary Table 14 12 UNIT command summary General notes Brackets are used to denote optional character sets These optional characters do not have to be included in the program message Do not use brackets in the program message Angle brackets lt gt are used to indicate parameter type Do not use angle brackets in the program message The Boolean parameter lt b gt is used to enable or disable an instrument operation 1 or ON enables the operation and 0 or OFF disables the operation Upper case characters indicate the short form version for each command word Default Parameter Listed parameters are both the RST and SYSTem PRESet defaults unless noted otherwise Parameter notes are located at the end of each table Ref Refers you to the section Sec that provides operation information for that command or command subsystem SCPI A checkmark V indicates that the command and its parameters are SCPI confirmed An unmarked command indicates that it is a SCPI command but does not conform to the SCPI standard set of commands It is not a recognized command by the SCPI consortium SCPI confirmed commands that use one or more non SCPI parameters are explained by notes Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot
331. t 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 16 Stepping and Scanning Set up 2400 Menu Savesetup Global Reset Bench Meas V Source Config Trig ARM LAYER ARM IN IMMEDIATE ARM OUT LINE 3 EVENTS TRIG LAYER DONE OFF TRIG LAYER TRIGGER IN TRIGGER LINK 1 EVENT DETECT BYPASS NEVER TRIGGER IN EVENTS SOURCE ON all others off TRIG LAYER TRIGGER OUT LINE 2 EVENTS TRIGGER OUT EVENTS SOURCE ON all others off COUNT 12 Config Sweep TYPE CUSTOM POINTS 12 ADJUST POINTS see waveform COUNT INFINITE Speed 0 01 plc Turn output On SWEEP exit TRIG HALT ON the 2182 enable SCAN Note Memory buffer annunciator comes on ON the 2400 enable SWEEP Note Arm annunciator comes on Press Trig on 2400 After completion of the sweep recall the data from the 2182 using the TRACe command To remove thermal EMFs from the readings do the following math on the recalled data CH2 Rdg 1 Buffer Rdg 1 Buffer Rdg 5 2 CH2 Rdg 2 Buffer Rdg 9 Buffer Rdg 13 2 repeat CH1 Rdg_Pos 1 Buffer Rdg 2 Buffer Rdg 3 Buffer Rdg 4 3 CH1 Rdg _Neg 1 Buffer Rdg 6 Buffer Rdg 7 Buffer Rdg 8 3 CH1 Rdg 1 CH1 Rdg_Pos 1 CH1 Rdg _Neg 1 2 CH1 Rdg_Pos 2 Buffer Rdg 10 Buffer Rdg 11 Buffer Rdg 12 3 CH1 Rdg_Neg 2 Buffer Rdg 14 Buffer Rdg 15 Buffer Rdg 16 3 CH1 Rdg 2 CH1 Rdg_Pos 2
332. t Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI OUTPut Sec 10 GAIN lt NRf gt _ Set analog output gain M 100e6 to 100e6 1 GAIN Query analog output gain OFFSet lt NRf gt Set analog output offset B 1 2 to 1 2 0 OFFSet Query analog output offset STATe lt b gt Enable or disable analog output OFF forces OV ON STATe Query state of analog output RELative lt b gt ON uses the present analog output voltage as the Rel value OFF OFF disables analog output Rel RELative Query state of Rel Table 14 6 ROUTe command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI ROUTe Sec 9 SCAN Path to configure and control scanning V INTernal Internal scanning CCOunt lt n gt Specify number of readings on Channel 1 1 to 1023 CCOunt Query Channel 1 count EXTernal lt list gt Specify external scan list 1 10 LSELect lt name gt Select and enable scan operation INTernal EXTernal or NONE LSELect Query selected scan operation Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com SCPI Reference Tables 14 7 Table 14 7 SENSe command summary Default Command Description Parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 FUNCtion lt name gt Select function VOLTage DC or TEMPerature VOLT Sec 2 V FUNCtion Query measurement function Vv DATA Path to return instrument readings Sec 2 V LATest Return the last
333. t required SYSTem PRESet No parameter used Put at least one space between the command word and the parameter e Brackets Some command words are enclosed in brackets These brackets are used to denote an optional command word that does not need to be included in the program message For example INITiate IMMediate These brackets indicate that MMediate is implied optional and does not have to used Thus the above command can be sent in one of two ways sINITiate or INITiate IMMediate Notice that the optional command is used without the brackets When using optional command words in your program do not include the brackets Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 11 22 Remote Operation e Parameter types The following are some of the common parameter types lt b gt lt name gt lt name gt lt NRf gt lt n gt lt list gt Boolean Used to enable or disable an instrument operation 0 or OFF disables the operation and 1 or ON enables the operation OUTPut RELative ON Enable Analog Output Rel Name Parameter Select a parameter name from a listed group NEVer NEXT CALCulate FORMat MXB Select Mx B calculation Numeric Representation Format A number that can be expressed as an integer e g 8 a real number e g 23 6 or an exponent 2 3E6 TRACe POINts 20 Set buffer size to 20 Numeric
334. t 2 2 mX b Off Scale factor M 1 0 Offset B 0 0 Percent Off Reference 1 0 Ratio V1 V2 Off RS 232 Off Baud rate No effect Flow control No effect Terminator Tx No effect Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Getting Started 1 18 Getting Started Table 1 2 Factory defaults cont Setting Factory Default Scanning Off Type Internal Timer Off Channel 1 count 1 Reading count 2 TEMP and TEMP2 Digits 6 Filter On Analog filter Off Digital filter On Count 10 Mode Moving average Window 0 01 Rate 5 PLC Slow Reference junction Internal Relative REL Off Sensor Thermocouple Thermocouple type Type J Units C Triggers Continuous On Delay Auto Control Source Immediate DCV1 and DCV2 Digits 7 5 Filter On Analog filter Off Digital filter On Count 10 Mode Moving average Window 0 01 Hold Off Count 5 Window 1 Range Auto Rate 5 PLC Slow Relative REL Off Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 2 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Measurement overview Explains the voltage and temperature measurement capabilities of the Model 2182 Performance considerations Covers various aspects of operation that affect accuracy and speed These include warm up ACAL calibration autozero and LS YNC li
335. t 9 in the Questionable Event Condition Register will set to indicate a questionable ACAL See Status structure in Section 11 for more information NOTE Do not confuse this partial calibration to be performed by the user with the com plete instrument calibration that is to be performed by a qualified service technician The complete calibration procedure is located in the Model 2182 Service Manual There are two ACAL options FULL ACAL calibrates the 10mV and 100V ranges while LOW LVL low level ACAL only calibrates the 10mV range If you are not going to use the 100V range it is recommended that you only perform LOW LVL ACAL NOTES FULL ACAL requires that there not be any connectors or cables connected to the LEMO input connector of the Model 2182 Whenever LEMO connections are broken for an extended period of time the contacts must be cleaned before reconnecting See Cleaning input connectors in Section I Getting Started For LOW LVL ACAL you do not need to remove the input cable break any connections or remove power ACAL procedure Perform the following steps to perform LOW LVL or FULL ACAL 1 Press the ACAL key to access the menu 2 Use amp or W key to display desired ACAL LOW LVL or FULL Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 6 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Press ENTER The message ACAL will be displayed while calibratio
336. t by the Model 2182 still includes the 10uV of thermal EMF but the voltage across the DUT is now negative Therefore the Model 2182 will measure 90 V V282 Vrnerm Vpur 10V 100uV 90nV As demonstrated in Figure 5 1 neither measurement by the Model 2182 accurately measured the voltage across the DUT However if you take a simple average of the magnitudes of the two readings 110 V and 90uV the result is 100uV which is the actual voltage drop across the DUT This is what the calculation for Delta does Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 8 Ratio and Delta To use the DC current reversal technique replace the constant current source with a bipolar current source as shown in Figure 5 2 The current source will alternate between 1mA and ImA When using Delta the Model 2182 performs the first voltage measurement V1t1 while sourcing 1mA The second voltage measurement V1t2 is performed while sourcing 1mA NOTE When using the Model 2182 to perform Delta measurements RATE must be set to 1 PLC or 5 PLC to optimize measurement performance At 1 PLC or 5 PLC Delta measurements will cancel thermal EMFs to a lt 50nV level Vitl Vryerm VpurV1t2 Vrnerm Vpur 10nV 100nV 10uV 100nV 110uV 90nV Delta is then calculated as follows Vitl V1t2 _ 110uV 90uV _ aa 100uV Delta 2 2 Using Delta with a bipolar source effectivel
337. t chan gt Select range control channel 1 or 2 VOLTage DC Path to configure DC volts RATio lt b gt Enable or disable Ratio V1 V2 OFF DELTa lt b gt Enable or disable Delta Not valid with OFF TEMP or TEMP selected SYSTem FAZero STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Front Autozero To double ON the speed of Delta disable Front Autozero Note Enabling Ratio disables Delta and conversely enabling Delta disables Ratio Programming examples Ratio programming example The following program fragment enables Ratio and displays the result on the computer CRT CALL SEND 7 CALL SEND 7 CALL SEND 7 CALL SEND 7 r reading SPAC a a a a s sens volt func volt status sens volt chan 1 status sens volt ratio status sens data fresh status ES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status PRINT reading Select voltage function Select Channel 1 DCV1 for range control Enable Ratio Request a fresh reading Address 2182 to talk Display Ratio reading on CRT Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 17 Delta programming example The following program fragment uses a SourceMeter SM with the Model 2182 to perform Delta measurements External triggering via Trigger Link is used to synchronize the source measure operations between the two ins
338. ta For offsets that vary the DC current reversal technique should be used instead of REL This technique uses the Delta measurement mode of the Model 2182 to cancel offsets See Delta in Section 5 for details REL Key The REL key sets a rel value for the selected function DCV1 DCV1 TEMP1 and TEMP2 Note that a unique rel value can be established for each measurement function Perform the following steps to set a rel value 1 Display the reading you want as the rel value This could be a zero offset reading that you want to null out or it could be an applied level that you want to use as a baseline 2 Press REL The REL annunciator turns on and subsequent readings will be the difference between the actual input and the rel value 3 To disable REL press the REL key a second time The REL annunciator turns off NOTE You can manually set a rel value using the mX b function Set M for 1 and B for the desired rel value See mX b for more information Analog Output Rel A rel value can also be established for analog output When Analog Output Rel is turned ON the present analog output voltage is used as the rel value Subsequent analog output readings will be the difference between the actual analog output and the rel value To enable Analog Output Rel press SHIFT and then OUTPUT The message AOUT REL ON will be displayed briefly to indicate that it is enabled To disable Analog Output REL press SHIFT and th
339. tatus reading SPACES 300 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com E 8 Example Programs Controlling the Model 2182 via the RS 232 COM2 port This example program illustrates the use of the Keithley Model 2182 interfaced to the RS 232 COM2 port The Model 2182 is set up to take 100 readings at the fastest possible rate 2000 per second The readings are taken sent across the serial port and displayed on the screen Example program controlling the Model 2182 via the RS 232 COM2 port For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card RD SPACES 1500 Set string space CLS CLear screen PRINT Set COM2 baud rate to 19200 PRINT Set no flow control and CR as Terminator Configure serial port parameters ComOpen COM2 19200 N 8 1 ASC CD0 CS0 DS0 LF OP0 RS TB8192 RB8192 OPEN ComOpen FOR RANDOM AS 1 1 Model 2182 setup commands Note Serial communications only operate with SCPI mode 1 PRINT 1 RST Clear registers PRINT 1 CLS Clear Model 2182 PRINT 1 INIT CONT OFF ABORT Init off PRINT 1 SENS FUNC VOLT DC DCV PRINT 1 SENS CHAN 1 Channel 1 PRINT 1 SYST AZER STAT OFF Auto zero off PRINT 1 SENS VOLT PRINT 1 SENS VOLT PRINT 1 SENS VOLT PRINT 1 SENS VOLT PRINT 1 SENS VOLT PRINT 1 FORM ELEM PRINT 1 TRIG COUN PRI
340. tes that the reading is greater than the High Limit 1 setting Bit B3 Low Limit 2 LL2 Set bit indicates that the reading is less than the Low Limit 2 setting Bit B4 High Limit 2 HL2 Set bit indicates that the reading is greater than the High Limit 2 setting Bit B5 Reading Available RAV Set bit indicates that a reading was taken and processed Bit B6 Not used Bit B7 Buffer Available BAV Set bit indicates that there are at least two readings in the trace buffer Bit B8 Buffer Half Full BHF Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is half full Bit B9 Buffer Full BFL Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is full Bits B10 through B15 Not used Figure 15 4 Measurement event register Bit Position B15 B10 Event BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HLT LL1 ROF i ighti 512 256 1283 32 16 8 4 2 1 Decimal Weighting 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 2 value of ot ot o j oa on of of of of Value 1 Measurement Event Set Events BFL Buffer Full 0 Measurement Event Cleared BHF Buffer Half Full BAV Buffer Available RAV Reading Available HL1 High Limit 1 HL2 High Limit 2 LL1 Low Limit 1 LL2 Low Limit 2 ROF Reading Overflow Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Questionable Event Register Bit
341. that information Table G 2 lists the coupled Table G 1 commands used by the Model 2182 The Model 2182 complies with SCPI version 1991 0 Table 14 2 through Table 14 11 list the SCPI confirmed commands and the non SCPI commands implemented by the Model 2182 IEEE 488 documentation requirements Requirements Description or reference a 2 3 4 5 a b c d e 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 TEEE 488 Interface Function Codes Behavior of 2182 when the address is set outside the range 0 30 Behavior of 2182 when valid address is entered Power On Setup Conditions Message Exchange Options Input buffer size Queries that return more than one response message unit Queries that generate a response when parsed Queries that generate a response when read Coupled commands Functional elements required for SCPI commands Buffer size limitations for block data Syntax restrictions Response syntax for every query command Device to device message transfer that does not follow rules of the standard Block data response size Common Commands implemented by 2182 Calibration query information Trigger macro for DDT See Appendix F Cannot enter an invalid address Address changes and bus resets Determine by SYSTem POSetup Section 15 256 bytes None All queries Common Commands and SCPI None See Table G 2 Contained in SCPI command s
342. the controller RL Remote Local Function RL1 defines the ability of the instrument to be placed in the remote or local modes Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com F 14 IEEE 488 Bus Overview PP Parallel Poll Function The instrument does not have parallel polling capabilities PPO DC Device Clear Function DC1 defines the ability of the instrument to be cleared initialized DT Device Trigger Function DTI defines the ability of the Model 2182 to have readings triggered C Controller Function The instrument does not have controller capabilities C0 TE Extended Talker Function The instrument does not have extended talker capabilities TEO LE Extended Listener Function The instrument does not have extended listener capabilities LEO E Bus Driver Type The instrument has open collector bus drivers E1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information G 2 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Introduction The IEEE 488 2 standard requires specific information about how the Model 2182 implements the standard Paragraph 4 9 of the IEEE 488 2 standard Std 488 2 1987 lists the documentation requirements Table G 1 provides a summary of the requirements and provides the information or references the manual for
343. the elements specified by the ELEMents command The specified elements are sent in a particular order The ASCII data format is in a direct readable form for the operator Most BASIC languages easily convert ASCII mantissa and exponent to other formats However some speed is compromised to accommodate the conversion Figure 15 1 shows the ASCII format that includes all the data elements Figure 15 1 ASCII data format Reading Channel Number I 1 23456789E 00VDC OINTCHAN Mantissa Exponent Units INTCHAN Internal Channel L EXTCHAN External Channel Units VDC DC Volts C Temperature in C F Temperature in F K Temperature in K 0 Internal Temperature Sensor 1 Channel 1 2 Channel 2 1 to 80 External Channel Number An overflow reading is displayed as 9 9E37 with no units Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com normal byte order format for each data element For example if three valid elements are Additional SCPI Commands 15 5 SREal will select the binary IEEE754 single precision data format Figure 15 2 shows the specified the data string for each reading conversion is made up of three 32 bit data blocks Note that the data string for each reading conversion is preceded by a 2 byte header that is the binary equivalent of an ASCII sign and 0 Figure 15 2 IEE754 single precision data format 32 data bi
344. the last sweep point 50uA Model 2182 1 measures SmV and stores the reading in its buffer at location 3 and Model 2182 2 measures the DUT and stores the reading in its buffer at location 3 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 23 Figure 5 10 Test circuit Fixed H Vary I 2182 1 CH1 O ImA gt 1002 HI SourceMeter 2182 2 Thermal Source l D CH 1 EMFs 30 Cables LO DUT 0 Cryostat The readings in the buffer of Model 2182 1 correspond to the current sweep values You can then use the buffer location numbers to reference DUT readings to current amplitudes Model 2182 1 Buffer Model 2182 2 Buffer RDG NO 1 ImV 10pA RDG NO 1 DUT measurement RDG NO 2 2mV 20pA RDG NO 2 DUT measurement RDG NO 3 5mV 50pA RDG NO 3 DUT measurement Delta measurements As previously explained the DC current reversal measurement technique must be used to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs in the test leads By configuring a custom sweep the SourceMeter can function as a bipolar growing amplitude source For example if the test requires current steps of 10uA 20pA and 50pA the 6 point custom sweep would be configured as follows P0000 10nA P0001 10pA P0002 20uA P0003 20pA P0004 50uA P0005 50u A By enabling Delta measurements on the Model 2182 the effects of thermal EMF
345. the standard deviation calculation on a large buffer RS 232 operation can also benefit from OPC Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 10 Common Commands OPC Operation Complete Query Place a 1 in the output queue after all pending operations are completed Description When this common command is sent an ASCII 1 will be placed in the Output Queue after the last pending operation is completed When the Model 2182 is then addressed to talk the 1 in the Output Queue will be sent to the computer The 1 in the Output Queue will set the MAV Message Available bit B4 of the Status Byte Register If the corresponding bit B4 in the Service Request Enable Register is set the RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Status bit in the Status Byte Register will set When used with the Initiate Immediately command INITiate a 1 will not be placed into the Output Queue until the Model 2182 goes back into the idle state The INIT command operation is not considered finished until the Model 2182 goes back into the idle state See the description for WAI for more information on command execution The execution of OPC is not completed until it has placed the 1 in the Output Queue To use OPC exclusively with the TRG command first force the completion of the initiate command so that only the TRG command is pending To do thi
346. tion command is used to clear the Error Queue of messages Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Additional SCP Commands 15 15 ENABle lt list gt STATus QUEue ENABle lt list gt Enable messages for Error Queue Parameter lt list gt numlist where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to enable for the Error Queue Description On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want enabled Messages not specified will be disabled and prevented from entering the queue When this command is sent all messages will first be disabled then the messages specified in the list will be enabled Thus the returned list ENABle will contain all the enabled messages Messages are specified by numbers see Appendix B The following examples show various forms for expressing a message numlist Numlist 110 Single message 110 140 222 Messages separated by commas 110 222 Range of messages 110 through 222 110 222 230 Range entry and single entry separated by a comma NOTE To disable all messages from entering the Error Queue send the following command stat que enab DISable lt list gt STATus QUEue DISable lt list gt Disable messages for Error Queue Parameter
347. tion period S2 100msec integration period S3 1 second integration period Trigger Mode TO Multiple on talk 8 Tl One shot on talk T2 Multiple on GET T3 One shot on GET Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com D 4 Model 182 Emulation Commands Table D 1 Model 182 device dependent command summary cont d Mode Command Description Note T4 Multiple on X T5 One shot on X T6 Multiple on external T7 One shot on external T8 Multiple on manual TRIG key or bus HOX T9 One shot on manual TRIG key or bus HOX T10 Disable all triggers Alternate Output U0 Send machine status 9 Ul Send error conditions U2 Send firmware revision U3 Send buffer length U4 Send buffer average U5 Send buffer standard deviation U6 Send reading relative value U7 Send analog output relative value U8 Send analog output gain value U9 Send trigger interval U10 Send trigger delay U12 Send calibration lock status U13 Send Model 181 like machine status Analog Output VO0 gain Analog output gain 0 001 to 999999 999 10 Trigger Delay WO Disable trigger delay Wvalue Enable trigger delay delay value 1msec to 999999msec Execute x Execute other device dependent commands Terminators YO lt CR LF gt Y1 lt LF CR gt Y2 lt CR gt Y3 lt LF gt Y10 lt CR LF gt Y13 lt LF CR gt Reading Relative ZO Disable reading relative 11 Z1 Enable reading relative using next reading
348. tive mX b and Percent SCPI commands TElat vez ssazesdsssssesensnssasbeveneceeyeevanedashazrtenuesderesedsssecsssenseteadeares 4 4 SCPI commands mX b and percent 0 eee eee seeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeeseeens 4 8 Ratio and Delta SCPI commands ratio and delta oo ee eeeeesesseeesseceseeeeeeeseeeeaeceeeeeaeseseeeeeeeeae 5 16 Buffer SCPI commands buffer eee eee eeeeeeseceeeeseceseeseeesecseeeseeseeeaesseseaeeseeeaeeaeens 6 5 Triggering A to delay HIMES aiesascepicserebscdchshedcedsnsube Laseevsenedeassecpddrdendeasagdensbinads ede E 7 4 SCPI commands triggering nseries iieii erodi 7 16 Limits SCPL commands 11MitS sarino ii i iaa E eE i R 8 5 Stepping and Scanning SCPI commands stepping and scanning cee eeeseeseeceneceeeeeteeceseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 9 12 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 10 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 11 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 12 Table 12 1 13 Table 13 1 14 Table 14 1 Table 14 2 Table 14 3 Table 14 4 Table 14 5 Table 14 6 Table 14 7 Table 14 8 Table 14 9 Table 14 10 Table 14 11 Table 14 12 B Table B 1 C Table C 1 D Table D 1 Analog Output Analog output examples oo esesseeseceeeeaeceeeeseeesessesesecseeeaesseeeaeseeseaeenaees 10 3 SCPI commands analog output oo eee eeeeeseceseeseeeeeeseeeseeseesaeeseeeateneeees 10 6 Remote Operation General bus commands and as
349. to prevent oxidation from forming on exposed connector surfaces Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 2 18 Voltage and Temperature Measurements Temperature configuration If you are going to perform temperature measurements you have to configure the Model 2182 appropriately from the temperature configuration menu Temperature configuration menu The items of the temperature configuration menu are explained as follows UNITS Select the desired units designator for temperature readings C F or K SENS Select the thermocouple TCOUPLE to perform temperature measurements at the thermocouple The internal INTERNL sensor is used to measure the internal temperature of the Model 2182 TYPE Select the thermocouple type that you are using to measure temperature J K T E R S B or N JUNC Select INTRNL to reference measurements to the internal reference junction Select SIM to reference measurements to an external simulated reference After selecting SIM you will be prompted to enter the simulated reference temperature After pressing SHIFT and then TCOUP to access the menu use the following rules to configure temperature There are four menu items UNITS SENS TYPE and JUNC Along with each menu item the present option is displayed For example if C is the present units option then UNITS C is displayed Blinking characters indic
350. tomatic gain calibration Enables disables filter for selected measurement function Enables disables relative for selected measurement function Selects Channel 1 temperature measurement function Selects Channel 2 temperature measurement function Multiplies a scale factor M to the reading X and then adds an offset B Calculates percent deviation from a specified reference Selects Delta V1t1 V 1t2 2 Enables disables line cycle synchronization When enabled noise induced by the power line is reduced at the expense of speed Select filter analog and or digital and configure digital filter window count and type Enables disables relative for Analog Output Enables disables Analog Output Configure temperature measurement units junction type thermocouple type sensor type Selects external triggering front panel bus or trigger link as trigger source Triggers a measurement from the front panel Sets reading count for buffer and enables buffer Displays stored readings including maximum minimum peak to peak average and standard deviation The amp and range keys scroll through the buffer and the lt q and P gt key toggles between reading number and reading Set the upper and lower limits for limit testing Enables disables limit testing and selects beeper mode for limit testing Controls cursor position for making selections or editing values Sets user delay between trigger and measurement
351. tored in the buffer if it is enabled NOTES A sweep in progress can be aborted by pressing EXIT on the SourceMeter If you are done sweeping turn off the source by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key on the SourceMeter Turning the source off prevents heat from building up in the DUT Delta readings stored in the buffer can be accessed by pressing RECALL on the Model 2182 Step 11 Repeating the sweep A On the Model 2182 press EX TRIG twice to disable and then re enable external triggering The TRIG annunciator indicates that the Model 2182 is in the external triggering mode B Repeat Steps 8 9 and 10 However if the SourceMeter output is already on skip Step 8A Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 14 Ratio and Delta Model 2182 and SourceMeter trigger synchronization The timing diagram in Figure 5 4 shows trigger synchronization between the SourceMeter and the Model 2182 for a 2 point custom sweep As shown in the timing diagram the SourceMeter will output a trigger after every source sweep point and the Model 2182 will output a trigger after every A D conversion Figure 5 4 Triggering timing diagram One Delta Measurement _ 1mA P0000 P0000 SourceMeter Output P0001 1mA SourceMeter TRIG OUT Press TRIG Ignored by 2182 Ignored by 2182 2182 Delta Measurements Delay A D Conversion Delay A D Conversion Delay A
352. transfer sequence until the accepting device is ready NDAC Not Data Accepted NDAC is also controlled by the accepting device The state of NDAC tells the source whether or not the device has accepted the data byte The complete handshake sequence for one data byte is shown in Figure F 2 Once data is placed on the data lines the source checks to see that NRFD is high indicating that all active devices are ready At the same time NDAC should be low from the previous byte transfer If these conditions are not met the source must wait until NDAC and NRFD have the correct status If the source is a controller NRFD and NDAC must be stable for at least 100ns after ATN is set true Because of the possibility of a bus hang up many controllers have time out routines that display messages in case the transfer sequence stops for any reason Figure F 2 IEEE 488 handshake sequence DATA SOURCE DAV SOURCE VALID ALL READY ACCEPTOR NRFD a ALL ACCEPTED NDAC ACCEPTOR Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com F 6 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Once all NDAC and NRFD are properly set the source sets DAV low indicating to accepting devices that the byte on the data lines is now valid NRFD will then go low and NDAC will go high once all devices have accepted the data Each device will release NDAC at its own rate but NDAC will not be released to go high until all devices have acc
353. trigger is sent The Delta calculation is performed and the reading is displayed For example assume the filter count for the Moving Filter is 5 Two filter stacks are used one for V1t1 readings and one for V 1t2 readings The filter stack for V1t1 readings is filled with five measurement conversions The five readings are averaged to yield the V1t1 value and an output trigger is sent on each V1tl A D conversion The filter stack for V1t2 readings is then filled with five measurement conversions The five readings are averaged to yield the V1t2 value and an output trigger is sent On each V1t2 A D conversion the Delta calculation is performed using the filtered V1t1 and V1t2 values and the result is displayed on the Model 2182 For every subsequent Delta measurement the operation is basically the same except that each stack only requires one reading to fill it The oldest reading in each stack is discarded NOTE The filter configuration menu cannot be accessed while in Delta To make filter configuration changes you must first disable Delta This can be done by selecting Channel I press Delta Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 5 16 Ratio and Delta SCPI programming ratio and delta Table 5 1 SCPI commands ratio and delta Commands Description Default SENSe 1 SENSe Subsystem FUNCtion lt name gt Select voltage function VOLTage VOLT CHANnel l
354. tring OneReading clear out string contents ReadingOn 1 represents the individual reading on DO OneCharacter MID AsciiRdgsBuf CurrentPosition ParseLength above line reads in the next character for the buffer response IF OneCharacter THEN found an individual reading so store it as such Readings ReadingOn VAL OneReading OneReading clear out so able to read next individual reading ReadingOn ReadingOn 1 increment counter for next individual reading ELSE still building an individual reading so add on the next character OneReading OneReading OneCharacter END IF CurrentPosition CurrentPosition 1 increment character on in the buffer response LOOP UNTIL CurrentPosition gt length loop until pass the number of characters read in with the buffer response Readings ReadingOn VAL OneReading store last individual reading since it will not be separated by a comma Calculate DataIC and DataV values where Chan2 is the CH2 numerical representation for string CH2 data and Chanl is the CH1 numerical representation for string CH1 data CHlpos is the positive portion for channel 1 CHlneg is the negative portion for channel 1 k 1 represents the reading in Reading to use in calculation Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com FOR j 1 TO CalcReadings Chan2 Re
355. trol can be used to null out constant offset voltage The basic procedure to use REL is found in Measuring voltage and temperature and details on Relative are provided in Section 4 AC voltages that are extremely large compared with the DC signal to be measured may be induced into the input of the Model 2182 and corrupt the measurement AC interference can cause the Model 2182 to behave in one or more of the following ways e Unexpected offset voltages Inconsistent readings between ranges e Sudden shifts in a reading To minimize AC pick up keep the test circuit source and the Model 2182 away from strong AC magnetic sources The voltage induced due to magnetic flux is proportional to the area of the loop formed by the input leads Therefore minimize the loop area of the input leads and connect each signal at only one point Shielding also helps minimize AC interference The metal shield should enclose the test circuit and be connected to Channel 1 LO or to the chassis ground screw on the rear panel Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 23 Applications Low resistance measurements The Model 2182 can be used with a current source to measure resistances at levels well below the capabilities of most conventional instruments The following paragraphs discuss low resistance measurement techniques and include some applications t
356. truments Also Front Autozero is disabled to double the speed of Delta Three Delta measurements will be performed one at a source value of 10uA one at 200A and one at 50uA The three readings will be stored in the buffer of the Model 2182 CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL CALL SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND 20e 6 CALL CALL CALL SEND SEND SEND 7 3 7 7 3 7 3 Cie Ty O 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 20e 6 24 24 24 syst pres status a trig del 1 status i sens volt delta on status syst faz off status 1 trig sour ext status 4 trac poin 3 status s strac feed cont next status rst statuss i trig sour tlin status ttrig dir sour status i trig outp sour status g trig coun 6 status sour func curr status j func volt status a volt nplc 0 01 status j sour list curr 10e 6 10e 6 50e 6 50e 6 status g outp on status 1 sour curr mode list status init status 4 2182 System preset defaults 2182 1sec delay 2182 Enable Delta Disable Front Autozero to double Delta speed 2182 External triggering 2182 Buffer size 3 2182
357. ts Header Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 o7 O 7 0 Z 0 s sign bit 0 positive 1 negative e exponent bits 8 f fraction bits 23 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 The Header is only sent once for each measurement conversion DREal selects the binary IEEE754 double precision data format and is shown in Figure 15 3 normal byte order shown This format is similar to the single precision format except that it is 64 bits long Figure 15 3 IEEE754 double precision data format 64 data bits Header Byte 1 Byte 2 Py Byte 7 Byte 8 a a a a E S a a a E rotted IELI C a a a a l E a a a a l E a a a a l E a a a a l 0 1redtttd 1ororedtte4d i E a a a a l E a a a a a l a a a a E S a a a D E i S a a a E i S a a a D i ANA a 10 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com C E Bytes 3 4 5 and 6 not shown s sign bit 0 positive 1 negative e exponent bits 11 f fraction bits 52 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 8 Byte 7 Byte 1 The Header is only sent once for each measurement conversion 15 6 Additional SCPI Commands BORDer command BORDer lt name gt FORMat BORDer lt name gt Specify binary byte order Parameters
358. ts Rate and Filter Autoranging To enable autoranging press the AUTO key The AUTO annunciator turns on when autoranging is selected While autoranging is enabled the instrument automatically selects the best range to measure the applied signal Autoranging should not be used when optimum speed is required Note that the AUTO key has no effect on temperature TEMP1 and TEMP2 Up ranging occurs at 120 of range while down ranging occurs at 10 of nominal range To disable autoranging press AUTO the RANGE A or key Pressing AUTO to disable autoranging leaves the instrument on the present range SCPI programming range Table 3 1 SPCI commands range Commands Description Default SENSe SENSe Subsystem VOLTage Volts function CHANnel1 Channel 1 DCV1 RANGe Range selection UPPer lt n gt Specify expected reading 0 to 120 volts 120 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range CHANnel2 Channel 2 DCV2 RANGe Range selection UPPer lt n gt Specify expected reading 0 to 12 volts 12 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range Programming example The following program fragment enables autoranging for DCV1 and sets DCV2 to the 1V range CALL SEND 7 sens volt rang auto on status CALL SEND 7 sens volt chan2 rang 0 5 status Enable autorange for DCV1 Set DCV2 to 1V range Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02
359. ts for trigger count SYSTem PRESet sets the count to INF infinite RST sets the count to 1 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Stepping and Scanning 9 13 Programming example The following program fragment performs a five measurement internal scan The five readings are stored in the buffer and displayed on the computer CRT CALL SEND 7 rst status Restore RST defaults CALL SEND 7 samp coun 5 status Set sample count to 5 CALL SEND 7 rout scan int cco 4 status Set channel 1 count to 4 CALL SEND 7 rout scan lsel int status Enable internal scan CALL SEND 7 read status Trigger scan and request readings reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length2 7 status Address 2182 to talk PRINT reading Display the 5 readings on the CRT Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 9 14 Stepping and Scanning Application I V curves using internal scan SCAN for IV curves Measure V sweep I constant H magnetic field or T temperature SCAN can be used to measure V while sweeping the current through a sample with a constant magnetic field or a constant temperature With the use of a Keithley Model 2400 SourceMeter and a Model 8501 Trigger Link cable see Section 7 for more details on triggering the 2400 can be prog
360. tting and press ENTER If MANual is chosen also enter the duration of the delay using the lt q P gt A and V keys The maximum is 99H 99M 99 999S Press ENTER to accept the delay or EXIT for no change Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Triggering 7 5 Device action The primary device action is a measurement However the device action block could include the following additional actions refer to Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Device action From Delay block To Output Trigger of Figure 7 1 block of Figure 7 1 Filter DEVICE ACTION Filtering If the repeating filter is enabled the instrument samples the specified number of reading conversions to yield single filtered reading Only one reading conversion is performed if the filter is disabled or after the specified number of reading conversions for a moving average filter is reached After a reading Rdg is procured operation proceeds to Hold Hold The Hold feature is used to screen out reading anomalies When enabled the user selects a window and count for Hold In general when a reading is outside the window it is rejected operation loops back to be beginning of the Device Action as shown in Figure 7 2 The hold count specifies how many readings have to be within the window before it is accepted See Reading hold autosettle for operation details After a Hold Reading is acq
361. ture melting point Take care not to damage a LEMO connector or any other device by applying excessive heat Model 2107 input cable The Model 2107 Input Cable which is a supplied accessory is terminated with a LEMO con nector on one end and copper lugs on the other end The cable is shielded to chassis ground when connected to the Model 2182 The cable wires are made from twisted silver wire The input cable is shown in Figure 2 2 This cable can be used to make voltage measurements and temperature measurements that use an external simulated reference junction Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Voltage and Temperature Measurements 2 13 Figure 2 2 Model 2107 input cable 2182 Red HI CHANNEL 1 Channel 1 LO HI CHANNEL 2 120V MAX Channel 2 12V MAX CATI 350V PEAK ANY TERMINAL TO CHASSIS Voltage Connections Mechanically connect clamp the cleaned copper lugs of the cable to the cleaned copper connectors of the test circuit For the test circuit use clean 10 copper bus wire wherever possible Clean copper to copper connections minimize thermal EMFs which could corrupt a measurement See Cleaning test circuit connectors located in this section If necessary you can cut the copper lugs off the Model 2107 Input Cable and connect the wires directly to your test circuit If soldering use silver solder to mini
362. ubsystems tables see Table 14 1 through Table 14 12 Block display messages 12 characters max See Programming syntax in Section 11 See Programming syntax in Section 11 None See DISPlay subsystem in Section 15 See Common Commands in Section 12 Not applicable Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Table G 1 cont IEEE 488 documentation requirements Requirements IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Description or reference G 3 15 Macro information Not applicable 16 Response to IDN identification See Common Commands in Section 12 17 Storage area for PUD and PUD Not applicable 18 Resource description for RDT and RDT Not applicable 19 Effects of RST RCL and SAV See Common Commands in Section 12 20 TST information See Common Commands in Section 12 21 Status register structure See Status Structure in Section 11 22 Sequential or overlapped commands All are sequential except INIT and INIT CONT ON which are overlapped 23 Operation complete messages OPC OPC and WAT see Common Commands in Section 12 Table G 2 Coupled commands Command Also changes To TRAC POIN TRAC FEED CONT NEV TRAC CLE TRAC FEED CONT NEV Sense Subsystem Commands RANG UPP RANG AUTO OFF IREF ACQ REF presently displayed reading SENS
363. ueue holds data that pertains to the normal operation of the instrument For example when a query command is sent the response message is placed in the Output Queue When data is placed in the Output Queue the Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte Register sets A data message is cleared from the Output Queue when it is read The Output Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Output Queue clears the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register Read a message from the Output Queue by addressing the Model 2182 to talk after the appropriate query is sent Error queue The Error Queue holds error and status messages When an error or status event occurs a message that defines the error status is placed in the Error Queue This queue will hold up to 10 messages When a message is placed in the Error Queue the Error Available EAV bit in the Status Byte Register is set An error message is cleared from the Error Status Queue when it is read The Error Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Error Queue clears the EAV bit in the Status Byte Register Read an error message from the Error Queue by sending either of the following SCPI query commands and then addressing the Model 2182 to talk e SYSTem ERRor e STATus QUEue Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Remote Operation 11 19 Status byte and service request SRQ Service request is c
364. uired operation proceeds to Channel Closure e Channel closure When stepping or scanning the last device action is channel control Using the hold feature provides an auto settling time for switching relays Each open close transition will restart the hold process and a reading for each channel will not occur until the relay settles Output trigger After the device action an output trigger occurs and is available at the rear panel Trigger Link connector This trigger can be used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation e g select the next channel for an external scan Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 7 6 Triggering Reading hold autosettle With hold enabled HOLD annunciator on the first processed reading becomes the seed reading and operation loops back within the device action block After the next reading is processed it is checked to see if it is within the selected hold window 0 01 0 1 1 10 of the seed reading If the reading is within the window operation again loops back within the device action block This looping continues until the specified number 2 to 100 of consecutive readings are within the window If one of the readings is not within the window the instrument acquires a new seed reading and the hold process continues When a hold reading is acquired an audible beep is sounded if enabled and t
365. ulate2 subsystem After the selected statistic is enabled IMMediate or IMMediate must be sent to calculate the statistic from the data in the buffer The DATA command does not initiate a calculate operation It simply returns the result of the last calculation If new data is stored in the buffer you must again send the IMMediate or IMMediate to recalculate the Statistic from that new data There is no SCPI command to obtain the Peak to Peak statistic To get the Peak to Peak Statistic your program will have to calculate it from the MAX and MIN statistics NOTE Since CALC2 IMM and CALC2 IMM are slow responding when performing the standard deviation calculation on large buffers OPC or OPC should be used with them Details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 6 5 6 6 Buffer Programming example The following program fragment stores 20 readings into the buffer and then calculates the mean average on the buffer readings Store Readings CALL SEND 7 trac poin 20 status Set buffer size to 20 CALL SEND 7 trac feed sens status Store raw input readings CALL SEND 7 trac feed cont next status Start storing readings CALL SEND 7 trac data status Request all stored readings reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 7 status Address
366. ure lt function gt Parameters lt function gt VOLTage DC Voltage TEMPerature Temperature Description This command combines all of the other signal oriented measurement commands to perform a one shot measurement and acquire the reading When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order that they are presented ABORt CONFigure lt function gt READ When ABORt is executed the instrument goes into the idle state if continuous initiation is disabled If continuous initiation is enabled the operation re starts at the beginning of the Trigger Model When CONFigure is executed the instrument goes into a one shot measurement mode See CONFigure for more details When READ is executed its operations will then be performed In general another ABORt is performed then an INITiate and finally a FETCh to acquire the reading See READ for more details Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 SCPI Reference Tables Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 14 2 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14 1 CALCulate command summary Table 14 2 CALibrate command summary Table 14 3 DISPlay command summary Table 14 4 FORMat command summary Table 14 5 OUTPut command summary Table 14 6 ROUTe command summary Table 14 7 SENSe command
367. w Common commands Common commands are commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a common operation such as reset The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted SCPI commands SCPI commands are commands that are particular to each device on the bus These commands are designated by the instrument manufacturer and are based on the instrument model defined by the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Consortium s SCPI standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a particular operation such as setting a range or closing a relay The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted Command codes Command codes for the various commands that use the data lines are summarized in Figure F 3 Hexadecimal and the decimal values for the various commands are listed in Table F 2 Table F 2 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes Command _ j Hex value Decimal value GTL 01 1 SDC 04 4 GET 08 8 LLO 11 17 DCL 14 20 SPE 18 24 SPD 19 25 LAG 20 3F 32 63 TAG 40 5F 64 95 SCG 60 7F 96 127 UNL 3F 63 UNT 5F 95 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington St
368. ween the two channels Channel 2 cannot be used as an independent stand alone measurement channel Its inputs must be referenced to Channel 1 LO NOTE Asa general rule use Channel 1 whenever possible for low voltage lt 1V measurements If using Channel 2 for measurements below 1V and the impedance between Channel 2 LO and Channel 1 LO is 2100kQ pumpout current could be high enough to corrupt measurements For details see Performance considerations Pumpout current low charge injection mode in this section Voltage measurements The Model 2182 has two voltage measurement functions DCV1 and DCV2 DCV1 is available for input Channel 1 and DCV2 is available for Channel 2 DCV1 Channel 1 has five measurement ranges 10mV 100mV 1V 10V and 100V and can measure voltage from InV to 120V DCV2 Channel 2 has three measurement ranges 100mV 1V and 10V and can measure voltage from 10nV to 12V Accuracy for each channel is listed in the specifications Appendix A Temperature measurements The Model 2182 has two temperature measurement functions TEMP 1 and TEMP2 TEMP 1 is available for input Channel 1 and TEMP is available for Channel 2 Depending on which thermocouple type is used J K T E R S B or N the Model 2182 can measure temperature from 200 C to 1820 C The specifications Appendix A provide the measurement ranges for the various thermocouple types Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington
369. wo principal factors that can corrupt measurements are thermal EMFs and noise induced by AC interference NOTE More detailed information on thermal EMFs and other factors that affect low level measurements are explained in Appendix C Also for comprehensive information on low level measurements see the Low level measurements handbook which is available from Keithley Thermal EMFs Thermal EMFs thermoelectric potentials are generated by thermal differences between the junctions of dissimilar metals These voltages can be large compared to the signal that the Model 2182 is trying to measure Thermal EMFs can cause the following conditions e Instability or zero offset that is above acceptable levels The reading is sensitive to and responds to temperature changes This effect can be demonstrated by touching the circuit by placing a heat source near the circuit or by a regular pattern of instability corresponding to changes in sunlight or the activation of heating and air conditioning systems To minimize thermal EMFs use clean copper to copper connections wherever possible in the test circuit See Connections for details on connection techniques and cleaning Widely varying temperatures within the circuit can also create thermal EMFs Therefore maintain constant temperatures to minimize these thermal EMFs A shielded enclosure around the circuit under test also helps by minimizing air currents The REL Relative con
370. ws a representation of how thermal EMFs are generated The test leads are made of the A material while the source under test is the B material The temperatures between the junctions are shown as T and T gt To determine the thermal EMF generated the following relationship may be used Er Qar T T2 where Ey Generated thermal EMF Qag Thermoelectric coefficient of material A with respect to material B uV C T Temperature of B junction C or K T Temperature of A junction C or K In the unlikely event that the two junction temperatures are identical no thermal EMFs will be generated More often the two junction temperatures will differ and considerable thermal EMFs will be generated A typical test setup will probably have several copper to copper junctions As pointed out earlier each junction can have a thermoelectric coefficient as high as 0 2uV C Since the two materials will frequently have a several degree temperature differential it is easy to see how thermal potentials of several microvolts can be generated even if reasonable precautions are taken Figure C 1 Thermal EMF generation 2182 Er Qas Ty Tp A HI O CH1 LOO PL Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com C 4 Measurement Considerations Minimizing thermal EMFs To minimize thermal EMFs use only copper wires lugs and test leads for the entire test setup Also it
371. x0 001 x1 K x1000 and M x1 000 000 With the cursor on the polarity sign the A and W keys toggle polarity 3 Press ENTER to enter the Gain value and display the Offset value B 00 000000 factory default 4 Key in the Offset value 5 Press ENTER to enter the Offset value and enable Analog Output The instrument returns to the normal display state 6 To disable Analog Output press SHIFT and then AOUT Analog output rel With analog output enabled Analog Output Rel is used to automatically reference the analog output voltage to zero When Analog Output Rel is turned ON the present analog output voltage is used as the Rel value This sets the analog output voltage to zero Subsequent analog output readings will be the difference between the actual analog output and the Rel value To enable Analog Output Rel press SHIFT and then OUTPUT The message AOUT REL ON will be displayed briefly to indicate that it is enabled To disable Analog Output REL press SHIFT and then OUTPUT a second time The message AOUT REL OFF will be displayed briefly NOTE Anew Rel value for analog output can be established at any time by first disabling Analog Output Rel and then re enabling it Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 10 6 Analog Output SCPI programming analog output Commands for analog output are summarized in Table 10 2 Additional information on th
372. y canceled the 10u V thermal EMF External triggering is required to control the timing between voltage measurements and current source reversals Trigger synchronization between the source and the Model 2182 is explained in Model 2182 and SourceMeter trigger synchronization which follows the Delta measurement procedure using a SourceMeter Figure 5 2 Delta measurement using bipolar source VTHERM SourceMeter 2182 Source 1mA A Delta Vout 100nV CH 1 At 1mA At 1mA V1tl 10uV 100uV V1t2 10uV 100uV 110uV 90uUV VIt V1t2 110uV C90uV VbeLTA 100uV 2 2 Vpoeuta Vout Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Ratio and Delta 5 9 Selecting Delta Delta is selected by pressing the SHIFT key and then the V1 V2 key The Vt1 Vt2 2 message appears briefly before displaying the result of the calculation Delta is disabled by selecting a single measurement function DCV1 DCV2 TEMP 1 or TEMP2 or by selecting Ratio NOTES To double the speed of Delta measurements disable Front Autozero as follows Press SHIFT gt Press CONFIG gt Set FRONT AUTOZERO to N gt Press ENTER For details on Front Autozero see Autozeroing modes in Section 2 Delta reading is indicated by a small d on the display after the reading Delta performs voltage measurements on Channel 1 If on Channel 2 the
373. y initiating INIT CONT ON sending this query may cause a 213 Init ignored error but will still give a new reading When appropriate If the Model 2182 receives a RST command then it defaults to INIT CONT OFF TRIG SOUR IMM and TRIG COUNT 1 Sending a READ query under these conditions will trigger a new reading MEASure lt function gt What it does This query will reconfigure the instrument to the function specified in the query set the trigger source for immediate set the trigger count to 1 and configure the measurement parameters to RST defaults It will then trigger a single reading and return the result Limitations This query is much slower than a READ or FETCh query because it has to reconfigure the instrument each time it is sent It will reset the NPLC autoranging and averaging to default settings When appropriate This is an ideal command for taking one shot measurements if the default settings for a measurement are appropriate and speed is not a requirement Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com H 4 Measurement Queries SENSe 1 DATA FRESh2 What it does This query is similar to the FETCh in that it returns the latest reading from the instrument but has the advantage of making sure that it does not return the same reading twice Limitations Like the FETCh query this c
374. yte query Reads the Status Byte Register TRG Trigger command Sends a bus trigger to the 2182 TST Self test query Performs a checksum test on ROM and returns the result WAI Wait to continue command Wait until all previous commands are executed Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com Common Commands 12 3 CLS Clear Status Clear status registers and error queue Description Use the CLS command to clear reset to 0 the bits of the following registers in the Model 2182 e Standard Event Register e Operation Event Register e Error Queue e Measurement Event Register e Questionable Event Register This command also forces the instrument into the operation complete command idle state and operation complete query idle state Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 TestEquipmentDepot com 12 4 Common Commands ESE lt NRf gt Event Enable Program the standard event enable register ESE Event Enable Query Read the standard event register Parameters lt NR amp O Clear register 1 Set OPC BO 4 Set QYE B2 8 Set DDE B3 16 Set EXE B4 32 Set CME B5 64 Set URQ B6 128 Set PON B7 255 Set all bits Description Use the ESE command to program the Standard Event Enable Register This command is sent with the decimal equivalent of the binary value that determines the desired state 0 o

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual del fabricante TWG 870  増設コードレス子機の登録  Transferir  Istruzioni d`uso  User guide Benutzerhandbuch Brugervejledning  manual - Sierra Chest  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file